ADS TRITON+ User manual

ADS TRITON+ User manual
ADS Intrinsically-Safe TRITON+®
Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
November 2019
340 The Bridge Street, Suite 204
Huntsville, Alabama 35806
(256) 430-3366
www.adsenv.com
QR 775027 A13
ii ADS TRITON+ Manual
 2019 ADS LLC. All rights reserved.
ADS , ADS Environmental Services, FlowView, TRITON+®,
XBUS, XIO, AV|GATED, and Qstart XML are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of ADS LLC.
Alpha Wire is a trademark of Alpha Wire.
General Cable is a trademark of General Cable Technologies
Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, and Excel are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Scotchkote is a trademark of 3M.
Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. du Pont de Nemours and
Company.
Telit is a registered trademark of Telit Communications PLC.
Verizon is a registered trademark of Verizon Trademark Services
LLC.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Notice of Proprietary Information
The information contained herein represents the latest information
available at the time of publication. ADS LLC reserves the right to
make any changes or modifications to the content of this document,
without notice, to reflect the latest changes to the equipment. No
part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the
written consent of ADS LLC.
Table of Contents
iii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
..................... 1-1
Intrinsic Safety ............................................................... 1-2
TRITON+ System Certification .............................. 1-3
Installation and IS Considerations .......................... 1-6
Special Conditions for Safe Use ............................. 1-6
Other Conditions for Safe Use ................................ 1-7
Maintenance Restrictions ............................................... 1-9
Warnings, Certifications, Cellular Modem
Compliance, and Conformity ................................... 1-10
Changes or Modifications ..................................... 1-10
Control Drawing ................................................... 1-11
European ATEX Hazardous Area Compliance..... 1-13
IECEx (International Electrotechnical
Commission Explosive) Hazardous Area
Compliance ........................................................ 1-20
CSA Hazardous Area Compliance........................ 1-23
Declaration of Conformity .................................... 1-30
Product Warranty ......................................................... 1-32
New Product Warranty.......................................... 1-32
Out-of-Warranty Product Repairs ......................... 1-32
Troubleshooting Fee ............................................. 1-33
Shipping ................................................................ 1-33
Service .................................................................. 1-34
CHAPTER 2 System Overview ................. 2-1
TRITON+ Flow Monitor ................................................ 2-4
Communications ..................................................... 2-4
Processor Board ...................................................... 2-5
Connector Ports....................................................... 2-7
SIM Card Enclosure.............................................. 2-10
Power .................................................................... 2-11
Sensors ......................................................................... 2-15
AV|Gated Sensor................................................... 2-16
Long Range Depth Sensor .................................... 2-18
Peak Combo Sensor .............................................. 2-20
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor ....................................... 2-22
iv ADS TRITON+ Manual
Surface Combo Sensor.......................................... 2-23
Inclinometer Sensor .............................................. 2-26
I/O and Modbus Capability .......................................... 2-27
Analog Inputs and Outputs.................................... 2-27
Digital Inputs and Outputs .................................... 2-28
Modbus ................................................................. 2-28
Project Organization Checklist..................................... 2-29
CHAPTER 3 Communication.................... 3-1
Cellular-Based Wireless Communication Overview...... 3-3
Installing the Antenna .................................................... 3-5
Gathering Parts and Supplies .................................. 3-5
Installing the Wireless Antenna .............................. 3-8
Installing the SIM Card......................................... 3-14
Activating the SIM Card ....................................... 3-18
Connecting the Antenna to the Monitor................ 3-19
Connecting to the Monitor in the Field ........................ 3-21
Connecting Directly to the Monitor ...................... 3-22
Connecting to the Monitor through the ExPAC.... 3-23
CHAPTER 4 Configuration and
Activation
..................... 4-1
Hardware and Software Compatibility.................... 4-2
Starting QstartXML.................................................... 4-2
Setting Up the QstartXML Parameters....................... 4-3
Configuring the Monitor Location ................................. 4-7
Create and Configure the Monitor Location ........... 4-7
Configure the Monitoring Point(s)........................ 4-10
Assigning and Editing Devices ............................. 4-14
Activating the Monitor................................................. 4-89
Setting Up the RTU to Retrieve the Current Data
through Modbus ........................................................ 4-91
Designating the Data for Retrieval........................ 4-91
Verifying the Modbus Output Data....................... 4-91
Running Sensor Diagnostics ........................................ 4-93
Performing Confirmations............................................ 4-96
Collecting Data from the Monitor................................ 4-99
Upgrading the Monitor Firmware .............................. 4-102
Table of Contents
v
Viewing Diagnostic and Data Logs............................ 4-104
CHAPTER 5 Sensor Installation and
Connection
..................... 5-1
Investigating Site Characteristics ................................... 5-4
Flow Hydraulics...................................................... 5-4
Pipe and Manhole Characteristics........................... 5-5
Installing the Sensors in the Pipe ................................... 5-7
Standard Installation ............................................... 5-7
Special Installations for Peak Combo, AV|Gated,
Surface Combo, or Ultrasonic Depth Sensors....... 5-38
Installing the Sensors in the Manhole Structure........... 5-60
Long Range Depth Sensor Installation.................. 5-60
Securing the Sensor Cables in the Pipe and Manhole .. 5-81
Connecting the Sensors and Sampler to the Monitor ... 5-83
Securing the Dryer Tube to the Monitor ............... 5-85
CHAPTER 6 External Power..................... 6-1
Installation...................................................................... 6-2
DC Power Requirements and Consumption............ 6-3
Mounting the XIO or XBUS ................................... 6-4
Mounting the Recommended Power Supply........... 6-6
Mounting the ExPAC............................................ 6-10
Wiring the AC Power Source to the
Recommended Power Supply ............................ 6-15
Wiring the Power Supply to the ExPAC............... 6-18
Running the Ground Wires ................................... 6-22
Wiring the ExPAC/XBUS/XIO to the Monitor .... 6-29
Final Instructions .................................................. 6-36
CHAPTER 7 Monitor Installation.............. 7-1
Mounting the Monitor on Manhole Rung ...................... 7-3
Mounting the Monitor to the Manhole Wall .................. 7-4
Mounting the Monitor to the Manhole Rim ................... 7-7
vi ADS TRITON+ Manual
CHAPTER 8 Inclinometer
..................... 8-1
Installing the Inclinometer ...................................... 8-2
Inclinometer Data.................................................... 8-6
CHAPTER 9 Analog and Digital Inputs
and Outputs
..................... 9-1
Analog Inputs................................................................. 9-3
Connecting a Third-Party Instrument to an
Analog Input on the XIO...................................... 9-3
Analog Outputs .............................................................. 9-8
Connecting a Third-Party Device to an Analog
Output on the XIO............................................... 9-8
Digital Inputs................................................................ 9-13
Connecting a Third-Party Device to a Digital
Input on the XIO ................................................ 9-13
Digital Outputs ............................................................. 9-16
Connecting a Third-Party Device to a Digital
Output on the XIO.............................................. 9-16
CHAPTER 10 Modbus
................... 10-1
Establishing a Modbus Connection.............................. 10-2
Setting Up a Serial Connection ............................. 10-2
Setting Up a Wireless Connection ........................ 10-9
Configuring the Monitor for Modbus Applications ... 10-10
Modbus Data Registers .............................................. 10-11
Register Addresses for Entity Data ..................... 10-11
CHAPTER 11 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting ................ 11-1
Maintaining the System Components........................... 11-2
Gathering Replacement Parts and Supplies........... 11-2
Inspecting the Monitor .......................................... 11-3
Inspecting, Cleaning, and Handling the Sensors. 11-20
Replacing the SIM Card: LTE-M SIM in
8000-FST-IM-4VZ or 8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ 11-24
Replacing the SIM Card (8000-FST-IM-GL
or 8000-FST-IM-EP-GL) ................................ 11-25
Table of Contents
vii
Replacing the Fuses in the Monitor..................... 11-29
Interpreting the Diagnostic LED Codes on
the ExPAC ....................................................... 11-35
Troubleshooting ......................................................... 11-37
General Monitor Problems.................................. 11-38
Communication Problems................................... 11-42
Long Range Depth Subsystem ............................ 11-46
Ultrasonic Depth Subsystem ............................... 11-48
Upward Depth Subsystem................................... 11-53
Peak Velocity Subsystem.................................... 11-56
Surface Velocity Subsystem ............................... 11-59
Pressure Depth Subsystem .................................. 11-61
Temperature Subsystem ...................................... 11-62
External Power, I/O, and Modbus Subsystems ... 11-63
APPENDIX A Specifications .....................A-1
TRITON+ Flow Monitor
(ADS p/n 8000-FST-IM) .................................... A-1
Intrinsically-Safe Sensors ...................................... A-6
USB Serial Interface (ADS p/n 8000-0337)......... A-15
ExPAC (ADS p/n 8000-0377) ............................. A-16
Power Supply (ADS p/n 508293) ........................ A-17
XBUS (ADS p/n 8000-0427)............................... A-18
XIO (ADS p/n 8000-0400)................................... A-19
APPENDIX B Part Numbers .....................B-1
APPENDIX D Third-Party Logger
Support
.....................D-1
Telog Ru-33 ........................................................... D-2
Ayyeka Wavelet..................................................... D-4
APPENDIX E Sampler Cable Connections
and Specifications ...............E-1
TRITON+ Sampler Cable Illustrations ....................E-2
Sampler Cable Connection Options and
Specifications.......................................................E-2
1-1
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
The Intrinsically-Safe ADS TRITON+® flow monitor measures
open channel flow in sanitary sewers, storm sewers, combined
sewers, and other environments to assist municipalities and other
industry in addressing the following issues:
⚫
Planning sewer systems (sizing and rehabilitation)
⚫
Reducing infiltration and inflow (I/I)
⚫
Monitoring combined sewer overflows (CSOs)
⚫
Detecting and monitoring surcharges
⚫
Managing inter-agency billing
⚫
Monitoring sewage handling facilities (wastewater treatment
plants and pump stations)
The battery- or externally-powered TRITON+ monitor provides
exceptional accuracy and reliability in measuring open-channel
flow depth and velocity to determine flow rate (quantity) in pipes.
This flow data is the essential element required to successfully
perform investigative, analytical, and reporting activities.
This manual offers detailed instructions on installing, operating,
maintaining, and troubleshooting the TRITON+ flow monitor,
sensors, and communication hardware.
1-2 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Intrinsic Safety
Intrinsic safety is an electronic hardware protection concept that
ensures there are no conditions under which the equipment can
operate that could cause a release of energy sufficient to ignite a
hazardous gas or dust mixture. Devices that meet the low power,
current-limited design criteria are deemed Intrinsically Safe (IS).
Special design, testing, quality, and inspection rules apply to
manufacturers and users of IS equipment due to the critical nature
of its deployment in hazardous areas. Areas where hazardous
conditions can be expected to be present on a constant basis are
classified (rated) as Zone 0 (equivalent to Class I, Division 1, in
North America).
The TRITON+ flow monitor (Model 8000-FST-IM) has been
certified and tested to worldwide IECEx (International
Electrotechnical Commission Explosive) standards. The IECEx
scheme allows demonstrated compliance for use in Zone 0
(equivalent to Class I, Division 1 in North America) areas in the
following countries:
United States
Germany
Poland
Australia
Hungary
Romania
Brazil
India
Russia
Canada
Italy
Singapore
China
Japan
Slovenia
Croatia
Korea
South Africa
Czech Republic
Malaysia
Sweden
Denmark
Netherlands
Switzerland
Finland
New Zealand
Turkey
The TRITON+ has also been certified under the ATEX European
Intrinsic Safety standards for Zone 0 rated hazardous areas.
Introduction
1-3
The TRITON+ flow monitor has been CSA (Canadian Standards
Association) certified to CLASS 2258 03 – Process Control
Equipment, Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Systems – For
Zone 0 Hazardous Locations, Ex ia IIB T3 (152°C) areas in
Canada; and CSA certified to CLASS 225883 – Process Control
Equipment, Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Systems – For
Class I Zone 0 Hazardous Locations, AEx ia IIB T3 (152°C) areas
in the USA (equivalent to Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D).
It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure that the certification(s)
provided for the ADS equipment meets applicable regulatory
requirements.
Note: TRITON+ models include the 8000-FST-IM-4VZ,
8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ, 8000-FST-IM-GL, and 8000-FSTIM-EP-GL.
TRITON+ System Certification
The TRITON+ unit and associated telemetry equipment are
certified for use only with approved ADS battery packs, sensors,
communication cables, and telemetry equipment. Connection of
any non-approved devices could result in unsafe operation and will
immediately void the warranty and IS certification.
Note: Connecting the Telog® Ru-33 to the ADS
TRITON+ is an approved application and, therefore, will
not void the TRITON+ warranty. However, because the
Telog unit is not IS certified, the installation will not be
considered intrinsically safe if the Ru-33 is installed in the
manhole with the monitor.
1-4 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Sensors
The TRITON+ monitor supports several approved IS sensors that
vary in measurement methodology, redundancy, and other features.
The monitor is approved for accommodating up to two of the same
or different types of IS sensors. Following are the approved IS
sensors:
•
AV|Gated Sensor Performs upward ultrasonic depth,
pressure depth, and gated velocity measurement and mounts at
the bottom of the pipe under the flow surface (ADS p/n 8KCS7-10-35).
•
Long Range Depth Sensor Performs downward ultrasonic
depth measurement and mounts within 12 inches (305 mm) of
the underside of the manhole cover (ADS p/n 8K-CS6-C1-10).
•
Inclinometer Utilizes an integrated accelerometer in a sealed
and intrinsically safe housing to accurately determine state of
flood gate positioning in water control and management
systems (ADS p/n 8K-0528).
⚫
Peak Combo Sensor Performs upward ultrasonic depth,
pressure depth, and peak velocity measurement and mounts at
or near the bottom of the pipe under the flow surface (ADS p/n
8K-CS4-05-35, 8K-CS4-15-35, or 8K-CS4-30-1H).
⚫
Surface Combo Sensor Performs downward ultrasonic
depth, surcharge pressure depth, surcharge peak velocity, and
surface velocity measurement and mounts at the top (or crown)
of the pipe above the flow (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-05-30, 8KCS5-V2-15-30, or 8K-CS5-V2-30-1H).
⚫
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor Performs downward ultrasonic
depth measurement alone and mounts at the top (or crown) of
the pipe above the flow (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-D1-00-30).
Extension cables are available for these sensors in lengths up to a
maximum of 300 feet (91 m). .
Note: Detailed descriptions and specifications for the
sensors are available in Chapter 2, System Overview, and
Appendix A, Specifications
Introduction
1-5
Power
The TRITON+ flow monitor is powered by an internal 12-volt IS
battery pack (ADS p/n 8000-0043) or an external DC power source
through an external power and communications unit (ExPAC, ADS
p/n 8000-0377), external Modbus interface unit (XBUS™, ADS p/n
9000-0427), or an external input/output device (XIO™, ADS p/n
8000-0400).
Note: Using a battery pack that is not supplied by ADS
will void the warranty and IS certification of the monitor.
Telemetry
Wireless communication is available to the TRITON+ monitor
through an antenna and internal UMTS/HSPA+/GSM or Verizon
LTE-M modem. The antenna through which wireless
communication occurs may be located either inside or outside the
manhole; however, installing the antenna outside the manhole will
maximize signal strength.
ADS’ 9000-0080 antenna is the recommended antenna for use with
the TRITON+ monitor. Customers also may obtain their own
antennas to accommodate specific project needs or requirements.
However, when assessing a third-party antenna, please consult an
ADS representative prior to installing the antenna to verify the
antenna can adequately support monitor communications.
Connecting the TRITON+ to the Telog RTU (Model Ru-33) also
supports wireless communication via the Telog “passthrough”
mode. The Telog is mounted next to the TRITON+ in the
hazardous area and connected to the monitor using the Triton-Telog
Comm Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054-01). However, please note that,
because the Telog unit does not possess IS certification, the
installation will not be considered intrinsically safe if the Telog unit
is installed in the manhole with the monitor.
1-6 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Installation and IS Considerations
When installing the TRITON+ flow monitor, carefully follow any
local regulations for the installation of IS equipment. For example,
many clients only allow the use of special hazardous area tools
(flashlights, radios, etc.) in manholes. Some clients will not allow
the use of an electric drill, either battery-powered or AC-powered,
in a manhole. In this case, air (i.e., pneumatic) tools must be used.
When in doubt as to the applicable regulations, check with the
client or the client’s designated safety representative.
Special Conditions for Safe Use
During the ATEX/IECEx/CSA approval process, certain conditions
are set forth that must be observed when using the certified
equipment. These Special Conditions for Safe Use can be found in
the body of each certification (referenced in this manual), as well as
on a page attached to the Declaration of Conformity. Following is
a summary of these Safe Use Instructions:
⚫
Parts of the enclosure may be non-conducting and may
generate an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge under
certain extreme conditions. Therefore, do not install this
equipment in a location where it may be subject to external
conditions (such as high-pressure steam or dust) that may cause
a buildup of electrostatic charge on non-conducting surfaces.
⚫
As aluminum is used at the accessible surface of this unit, in
the event of rare incidents, ignition sources due to impact and
friction sparks may occur. This shall be considered when it is
being installed, particularly in locations that require equipment
with a Group II Ga level of protection.
⚫
The equipment (ADS Model 8000-FST-IM) shall be used in
the hazardous area only when fully assembled. Do not perform
any maintenance of internal parts, replacement of battery
packs, or replacement of fuses unless the unit is located in a
safe area.
Introduction
1-7
⚫
Applicable to the USB Serial Interface: Measures shall be
taken to limit transient over voltages to the USB Serial
Interface to an appropriately low level in accordance with
Overvoltage Category 1 (IEC 60664-1).
⚫
The equipment shall be installed as per installation drawing
8000BK0009.
⚫
The External Power and Communications Unit (ExPAC) may
only be mounted in a non-hazardous location.
⚫
The 8000-FST-IM Monitor Assembly common line is
connected to the metal enclosure. Therefore, when it is
powered by the “External Power and Communications Unit”
(ExPAC), the Monitor Assembly shall be bonded to the
ExPAC earth with a conductor having a minimum crosssectional area of 4 mm2, to achieve a resistance ≤1 Ω.
Other Conditions for Safe Use
⚫
The ADS Model 8000-FST-IM shall use only the 12-volt IS
Battery Pack (ADS p/n 8000-0043) for internal power.
⚫
Only ADS-approved sensors shall be connected to the ADS
Model 8000-FST-IM: ADS sensor types CSX series.
⚫
The only communication devices that may be connected to the
COMM + EXT PWR connector on the TRITON+ are the
USB Serial Interface (ADS p/n 8000-0337), the
ExPAC/XBUS/XIO power cable (ADS p/n 8000-378-10/25),
the Direct Connect Interface (ADS p/n 8000-0054), the
Inclinometer (ADS p/n 8000-0528), and the Sampler Cable
(ADS p/n 8000-0348).
Note: The Triton-Telog Comm Cable (ADS p/n 80000054-01) also may be connected to the COMM + EXT
PWR connector on the TRITON+ to provide
communication between the Telog Ru-33 and the monitor.
However, because the Ru-33 is not certified for IS
operation, an installation involving a connection between
1-8 ADS TRITON+ Manual
these units will not be considered intrinsically safe, unless
the Telog unit is installed outside the hazardous area.
Introduction
1-9
Maintenance Restrictions
As mentioned earlier, all ADS TRITON+ flow monitors are
manufactured to meet IS standards. The monitor’s IS certification
can be voided instantly if proper maintenance and service
procedures are not followed. ADS must restrict certain
maintenance tasks to ADS IS-certified technicians.
ADS-certified technicians carefully inspect and document their
repairs of IS monitors. This inspection and documentation process
provides legal protection should the monitor's performance or
safety be in question.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, please refer to this
manual for troubleshooting guidelines. The following maintenance
procedures may be performed in the field, but they must be
performed as described in this manual:
⚫
Installing and swapping monitor
⚫
Installing and swapping sensors
⚫
Installing and swapping battery pack
⚫
Swapping fuses in power regulator in monitor
⚫
Installing and swapping SIM card on monitor port
⚫
Replacing pressure depth sensor dryer tube and desiccant beads
⚫
Installing and swapping ExPAC (applicable only when not
housed within an XBUS or XIO), XBUS, or XIO
⚫
Cleaning sensors
⚫
Confirming sensors
Note: Please note that, in all applications, only ADS IScertified Service Technicians are authorized to perform
component-level service on the TRITON+.
If you have any questions about the procedures, warranty
information, or level of service you are allowed to perform on a
monitor, please contact ADS through the contact information listed
at the end of this chapter.
1-10 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Warnings, Certifications, Cellular
Modem Compliance, and Conformity
Manhole and sewer system work involves confined space entry and
is inherently dangerous. Therefore, installers and technicians
should comply with all federal, state, and municipal regulations
concerning confined space entry.
In addition, personnel installing and maintaining this equipment
should follow all guidelines presented in this manual concerning
monitor installation and maintenance. Failure to strictly adhere to
these guidelines can result in personal injury and/or damage to the
monitor.
Changes or Modifications
Changes or modifications to the TRITON+ flow monitor not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance will
void the IS certification.
Personnel performing installation of the TRITON+ flow monitor
should carefully follow the guidelines contained in this manual
when installing and maintaining the monitor. Failure to strictly
adhere to these guidelines can result in personal injury and can
cause damage to the monitor, which would invalidate its warranty.
The TRITON+ flow monitor is designed to be installed in
combined and sanitary sewer lines and manholes. This installation
work is inherently dangerous. All applicable safety guidelines
should be followed and carried out by at least two fully trained and
qualified persons.
Introduction
1-11
Control Drawing
This drawing depicts the interconnections allowed for the
TRITON+. It is intended for use by inspection professionals for
audit certificate compliance; however, it is a good tool for
understanding the structure of the TRITON+ flow monitoring
system.
1-12 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Control Drawing
Introduction
1-13
Note: This is an excerpt from an agency-controlled
document for illustration purposes only. Changes to the
base controlled document require agency approval. For a
full-size copy of this drawing, please contact ADS and
request drawing number 8000BK0009-CERT.
Note: The Telog Ru-33 can be connected to the COMM
+ EXT PWR port on the TRITON+ monitor using the
Telog-Triton Comm Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054-01).
However, this configuration has not been included on this
drawing because the Telog unit is not certified for IS
operation. Therefore, an installation involving this
configuration will not be considered intrinsically safe,
unless the Ru-33 is installed outside the hazardous area.
Cellular Modem Information and Compliance
Wireless telemetry is provided via a third-party, FCC- and carrierapproved, commercial HSPA+/GSM or Verizon LTE-M modem
inside the TRITON+ monitor and a corresponding antenna. Two
antenna options are available through ADS. However, customers
may obtain their own antennas to accommodate specific needs or
requirements. If a customer-supplied antenna is preferable or
required, consult an ADS representative prior to installing the
antenna to ensure it will adequately support TRITON+ monitor
communications and compliance.
European ATEX Hazardous Area Compliance
The following instructions apply to equipment covered by the
certificate numbered Sira 09ATEX2027X (TRITON+, USB Serial
Interface, Combo Sensors CSX Series, IS PSTN modem, and IS
modem DAA). Reference European ATEX Directive 94/9/EC,
Annex II, 1.0.6:
⚫
The equipment may be used with flammable gases and vapors
with apparatus groups IIA and IIB and with temperature
classes T3 (152oC), T4, T5, and T6.
1-14 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
The equipment is only certified for use in ambient temperatures
in the range of -20oC to +60oC and should not be used outside
this range.
⚫
The certificate number has an ‘X’ suffix, which indicates that
special conditions apply to installation and use. Those
installing or inspecting this equipment must have access to the
contents of the certificate.
⚫
Installation shall be carried out in accordance with the
applicable code of practice by suitably-trained personnel.
⚫
Repair of this equipment shall be carried out in accordance
with the applicable code of practice.
⚫
If the equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive
substances, then it is the responsibility of the user to take
suitable precautions that prevent it from being adversely
affected, thus ensuring that the type of protection is not
compromised.
❑ Aggressive substances such as acidic liquids or gases that
may attack metals, or solvents that may affect polymeric
materials
❑ Suitable precautions such as regular checks as part of
routine inspections or establishing from the material’s data
sheet that it is resistant to specific chemicals
⚫
There are no special inspections or maintenance conditions
other than a periodic check.
⚫
TRITON+ monitors delivered outside the U.S. must bear the
following label to substantiate conformance to ATEX, IECEx
and CSA standards as certified through Sira Certification
Services:
Introduction
Sira TRITON+ Certification Label
CSA TRITON+ Certification Label
Sira Combo Sensor CSX Series Certification Label
1-15
1-16 ADS TRITON+ Manual
CSA Sensor and Sampler Cable Certification Label
Sira USB Serial Interface Certification Label
CSA USB Serial Interface Certification Label
Introduction
Sira ExPAC Certification Label
Sira Sampler Cable Certification Label
1-17
1-18 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Inclinometer Certification Label
EC Type Examination Certificate Sira 09ATEX2027X can also be
used to substantiate conformance to applicable EU laws for IS
equipment. The following page is a copy of the first page of the
certificate.
Note: This copy was current at the time of publication of
this manual. To access the latest version and entire
content of the certificate, please contact ADS.
Introduction
First page of the TRITON+ ATEX Certificate
1-19
1-20 ADS TRITON+ Manual
IECEx (International Electrotechnical
Commission Explosive) Hazardous Area
Compliance
The TRITON+ is covered by certificate IECEx SIR 09.0020X
(TRITON+). Reference IECEx standards IEC 60079-0 : 2004; IEC
60079-11 : 2006; and IEC 60079-26 : 2006. This IECEx certificate
can also be used to substantiate conformance to applicable
international standards for IS equipment. The following page is a
copy of the first page of the certificate.
Note: This copy was current at the time of publication of
this manual. To access the latest version and entire
content of the certificate, please contact ADS.
Introduction
First page of the TRITON+ IECEx Certificate of Conformity
1-21
1-22 ADS TRITON+ Manual
CS6 (LRD Sensor) Certificate of Conformity
Introduction
1-23
CSA Hazardous Area Compliance
The TRITON+ is covered by certificate CSA 2671180 (TRITON+
and Combo Sensors, IS modem DAA, ExPAC, Sampler Cable and
USB Serial Interface). Reference CSA requirements C22.2 No. 010; CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-0:11; CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.
60079-11:11; UL 60079-0 Fifth Edition; and UL 60079-11 Fifth
Edition.
The following CSA certificate can also be used to substantiate
conformance to applicable Canadian standards for IS equipment:
Note: The certificate displayed on the following pages
was current at the time of publication of this manual. To
access the latest certificates, please contact ADS.
1-24 ADS TRITON+ Manual
CSA Certificate of Compliance Page 1 of 6
Introduction
CSA Certificate of Compliance – Page 2 of 6
1-25
1-26 ADS TRITON+ Manual
CSA Certificate of Compliance – Page 3 of 6
Introduction
CSA Certificate of Compliance – Page 4 of 6
1-27
1-28 ADS TRITON+ Manual
CSA Certificate of Compliance – Page 5 of 6
Introduction
CSA Certificate of Compliance – Page 6 of 6
1-29
1-30 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Declaration of Conformity
For European (EU member country) applications, a Declaration of
Conformity (DoC) must be kept on file at the facility responsible
for repair and maintenance of this equipment. A copy of the
relevant DoC also must be shipped with each product. If you have
any questions about the DoC, please contact ADS LLC by
telephone at 1-877-237-9585 or email at
[email protected]
Sample TRITON+ Declaration of Conformity – Page 1
Introduction
Sample TRITON+ Declaration of Conformity – Page 2
1-31
1-32 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Product Warranty
This section includes the warranty information for the ADS 
TRITON+ flow monitor.
New Product Warranty
All new products manufactured by ADS will be free from defects in
material and workmanship for up to one (1) year following the
delivery date to the customer with one exception; the Long Range
Depth Sensor is under warranty for up to two (2) years. During this
warranty period, upon satisfactory proof of a defect, the product
may be returned for repair or replacement, at ADS’s sole option.
No returns will be accepted unless the Owner has prepaid shipping
and has received a prior authorization return number from ADS.
Please contact ADS to obtain an authorization return number.
Warranty repairs and replacements will be performed only by ADS.
Any unauthorized repair or replacement will void this product
warranty. Any repair or replacement will be covered by this new
product warranty for ninety (90) days from the date that such
repaired or replaced product is shipped from ADS. This warranty is
available only if the product has been installed and operated in
accordance with the procedures outlined in the ADS Operations and
Maintenance Manual. This warranty does not apply to damage by
catastrophes of nature, fire, explosion, acts of God (including, but
not limited to, lightning damage and power surges), accidents,
improper use or service, damage during transportation, or other
similar causes beyond ADS’s control.
Out-of-Warranty Product Repairs
After the new product warranty expires, a product may be returned,
at the owner’s prepaid expense, to ADS for repair. The owner will
pay for all parts and labor associated with the repair. Any repair
Introduction
1-33
part will be covered by the new product warranty for 90 days from
the date of shipment from ADS.
Troubleshooting Fee
ADS will charge a troubleshooting fee if the reported product
defect cannot be found and/or the reported defect is not due to a
defect in materials or workmanship.
Shipping
All repaired products will be returned via transportation prepaid by
ADS. Import duties, fees, taxes, and other related charges are the
responsibility of the owner.
THIS IS THE ONLY WARRANTY FOR ADS PRODUCTS. NO
OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
MERCHANTABILITY. PRODUCT REPAIR OR
REPLACEMENT IS THE ONLY REMEDY. IN NO EVENT
WILL ADS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, OR SPECIAL DAMAGES.
Warranty Return Information for International
Customers
Please use U.S. Harmonized Schedule Number 9801.00.1012 on
your shipping documents and customs forms to indicate “U.S.
made goods being returned for repair”.
1-34 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Service
For service or warranty issues, please contact ADS customer
support:
Telephone: 1-877-237-9585
Email: [email protected]
2-1
CHAPTER 2
System Overview
The ADS TRITON+® flow monitor supports five flow measurement
devices for gathering flow data:
•
AV|Gated Sensor This sensor, which mounts at the bottom of
the pipe, contains an upward-looking ultrasonic depth sensor, a
gated Doppler velocity sensor which measures flow velocity at
multiple discrete points to measure average velocity, and a pressure
depth sensor.
•
Inclinometer This sensor, which mounts on any flat surface of
the wastewater collection side of the flood gate, allows angle
measurements to accurately determine the state of the flood gate
positioning.
•
Long Range Depth Sensor This sensor, which is secured to
the accompanying mounting bar beneath the manhole cover,
contains an ultrasonic transducer housed within the integral
parabolic reflector. The transducer and reflector work in tandem to
measure the depth of flow in the manhole.
•
Peak Combo Sensor This sensor, which mounts at or near the
bottom of the pipe, contains an upward-looking ultrasonic depth
sensor, Doppler peak velocity sensor, and pressure depth sensor.
•
Surface Combo Sensor This sensor, which mounts at the top
of the pipe, contains an ultrasonic depth sensor, a surface velocity
sensor, a surcharge peak velocity sensor, and surcharge pressure
depth sensor.
•
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor This sensor, which mounts at the top
of the pipe, is a standalone ultrasonic depth sensor.
2-2 ADS TRITON+ Manual
The monitor receives the raw flow depth and velocity data from the
sensors based on a defined time interval and then processes the data,
which may involve calculating the flow rate. The monitor memory can
store up to 150 days of data based on logging 6 entities at a 15-minute
sample rate. The storage capacity varies according to the number of
sensors attached to the monitor, the number of entities stored, the rate at
which the entity data is logged, and the functions activated for the
sensors. This data is available to the user for collection, further
processing, analysis, and reporting. These reports include critical
information that can assist municipalities and other industries in
planning improvements and additions to sewer systems, improving the
accuracy of billing information, and providing overall management of
sewer systems.
The TRITON+ monitor and sensors are primarily designed for
monitoring flow in sanitary and storm sewers. The monitor mounts to
the manhole rim or wall slightly below the manhole cover or to a rung
on the ladder; the sensors attach to a ring or band installed in the sewer
pipe a short distance upstream of the manhole invert or to a mounting
bar installed below the manhole cover. The TRITON+ monitor can
support up to two sensors at one or two separate locations in the pipe.
These sensors display exceptional durability and accuracy, even under
harsh and turbulent flow monitoring conditions.
System Overview
2-3
Typical TRITON+ flow monitoring system installation
Communication between the monitor and the user’s office or field
computer can occur over TCP/IP (remote, wireless communication) or a
USB serial interface cable (on-site communication).
The TRITON+ is powered by a 12-volt IS battery pack or through
external power. Externally-powered units receive power from an
independent source through an intermediate ExPAC (external power
and communications unit), XBUS™, (external Modbus interface unit),
or an XIO™ (external input/output) device.
The ExPAC and XBUS also serve as Modbus interfaces to provide realtime data from the monitor to a SCADA (supervisory control and data
acquisition) or other process control system through an RTU (remote
terminal unit) or another comparable instrument. The XIO also serves
as an analog and digital I/O (input/output) interface that can support
non-ADS sensors, switches, and various third-party equipment.
The ADS Qstart XML software application enables the user to configure
and communicate with the monitor for activation, data collection, and
diagnostic purposes. Configuration involves defining the information
file (XML) for storage in the user's local directory and building the
necessary code and variables for the site. The XML file contains
information such as pipe characteristics, monitor identification, active
sensors, sensor offsets, data log rate, and other parameters necessary for
measuring the flow both accurately and efficiently.
Activation involves downloading the site-specific information from the
XML (stored in the user's local directory or network drive) to the
monitor. It also includes initiating monitor activities such as taking
sensor readings, logging flow data, and managing event notification.
Note: Refer to the Qstart XML online help for more
information.
2-4 ADS TRITON+ Manual
TRITON+ Flow Monitor
The TRITON+ flow monitor is contained in a waterproof, airtight,
cylindrical, high-impact ABS plastic canister housing. It contains a
single processor board attached to the inside of the aluminum
monitor top, a power regulator and cellular modem built into a
protective dome, and a replaceable battery pack.
MONITOR TOP & REGULATOR DOME
EXTERNAL HOUSING
IS 12 VOLT BATTERY
Exploded view of TRITON+ (processor board resides between the monitor
top and protective regulator dome)
Communications
ADS offers remote (wireless) and on-site (direct) communication
options for the TRITON+ monitor.
Wireless Communication
Wireless communication occurs over the 3G/4G UMTS/HSPA+
network or the Verizon® LTE-M network using TCP/IP
(Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). Both TCP/IP
networks facilitate high-speed, low-cost, efficient digital
communication in coverage areas using static and dynamic IP
address services. ADS TRITON+ monitors supporting Verizon
network services have been approved through the Verizon Wireless
Open Development program.
Remote communication with the monitor occurs over the network
through an internal modem located in the monitor’s regulator dome,
provided a static IP address is in use. If the monitor is using a
System Overview
2-5
dynamic IP address, the user cannot communicate directly with
monitor over the wireless network.
Direct Communication
On-site (or direct) communication with all monitors is available
through an IS USB serial interface (direct connect) cable (ADS p/n
8000-0337) for battery-powered units or through a standard A-to-B
USB cable when using external power.
Processor Board
TRITON+ top with processor board attached
The processor board is the source of all monitor activity. The board is
responsible for all of the monitor's high-level functions, including the
following:
•
Managing user communication with the monitor
•
Controlling the timing at which the sensors fire (i.e., take readings)
•
Retrieving and storing sensor data
•
Maintaining the monitor time and date
•
Performing power management
2-6 ADS TRITON+ Manual
•
Storing the parameters required to accomplish the associated
system operations
•
Transmitting the stored and current data to the user's PC or FTP site
•
Outputting a discrete signal pulse to a water quality sampler
•
Displaying system power and operational status and diagnostic
codes
•
Initiating event notification through alarms
•
Transmits readings and signals through analog and digital outputs
and requests and receives data and status information through
analog and digital inputs
The board allocates portions of memory to firmware (embedded
software in the monitor that can be upgraded remotely) and data storage.
The board also includes the monitor clock, random access memory
(RAM), and Flash. The monitor uses RAM while taking readings and
processing the flow data. The RAM then downloads the data to
NVRAM or non-volatile memory, which is backed up by an on-board
battery. Firmware programs concerning operation are stored in Flash.
System Overview
2-7
Connector Ports
A
CH
NN E L
SENSORS
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
WAKE
CPU
SENS
0518
II 1 G
ST AT US
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga Rev
Sira 09ATEX2027X DATE
SIR 006
S/N
CSA 2013 2671180
Ex ia IIB T3 (152°C)
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
IECEx SIR09.0020X
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
See CONTROL DWG 8000BK0009
Voir SCHEMA DE CONTROLE
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
Utilisez uniquement la batterie 8000-0043
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
A
N
A
CONTAINS CELL XMTR
FCC ID: R17HE910
T ENN
C
O
MM
R
TM
W
+ EX T P
R
w w w.a d s e n v.c o m
Monitor top with sensor and communication/power/sampler connector ports
(ADS Model 8000-FST-IM-GL)
2-8 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Monitor top with sensor and communication/power/sampler connector ports
(ADS Model 8000-FST-IM-4VZ)
The connector ports located on top of the monitor can receive up to
two sensors, a communication device and/or power cable, and an
antenna:
System Overview
•
2-9
CHANNEL 1 and CHANNEL 2 Ports These ports can receive
up to two of the following sensors:
❑ AV| Gated Sensor
❑ Long Range Depth Sensor
❑ Peak Combo Sensor
❑ Surface Combo Sensor
❑ Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
Note: The channel ports on the TRITON+ receive any
combination of two sensors, including two of the same
sensor type. However, the sensors attached to the channel
ports must accurately reflect the channel assignments for
the sensor devices in Qstart XML. In addition, two sensors
of the same type may not be assigned to the same
monitoring point. Refer to Connecting Sensors to the
Monitor in Chapter 3, Sensor Installation and Connection,
for more information.
•
COMM+ EXT PWR (Communication and External Power)
Port This port supports one of the following communication,
power, sensor, or sampling options at a time:
❑ Direct, on-site communications with the TRITON+ monitor
through the Qstart XML software installed on a field computer
using a USB serial interface cable
❑ External power from an external source through an ExPAC,
XBUS, or XIO
❑ Flow proportional or level-based water quality sampling
through a third-party sampler
❑ ADS Inclinometer sensor
•
ANTENNA Port This port receives the antenna supporting
wireless communications with the TRITON+ monitor.
The connector ports are keyed to receive only the proper sensor,
antenna, or communication cables.
Some wireless TRITON+ models also have a SIM card enclosure
(described in the following section) that contains a removable SIM card
for wireless communications. An air pressure valve also resides within
this enclosure that exists only for factory and maintenance testing.
2-10 ADS TRITON+ Manual
SIM Card Enclosure
The TRITON+ SIM card, which is required for wireless
communications, is housed within the SIM card enclosure located
on the top of the monitor between the STATUS window and the
COMM + EXT PWR connector. A cam lock mechanism on top
of the SIM card enclosure provides access to the card as well as
secures the watertight seal to prevent moisture from contacting the
card and electronics.
SIM card enclosure with plastic tie
Note: Remote communication directly between the user
and monitor requires a static SIM card. Dynamic SIM
cards may only transfer data to an FTP site or an ADS
Web-based software database. Communicating directly
with a monitor using a dynamic SIM card requires the IS
USB serial interface (direct connect) cable on site (ADS
p/n 8000-0337).
System Overview
2-11
Power
Internal Power
Power is supplied to the TRITON+ flow monitor by an internal 12volt IS battery pack (ADS p/n 8000-0043-02/04). The battery pack
resides within the TRITON+ enclosure and powers monitor
operations. A battery fuse board is attached to the battery pack to
achieve intrinsic safety.
TRITON+ 12-volt battery
The power regulator, built into the dome assembly that covers and
protects the processor board, is critical to intrinsically safe
operation. It regulates the voltage supplied from the internal IS
battery pack to the TRITON+, ensuring that the monitor always
operates within its IS certification requirements. It also includes
replaceable fuses and current-limiting components that will limit
and/or interrupt power if a fault condition occurs.
2-12 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Power regulator dome with IS regulator board
The user receives a warning when the internal 12-volt IS battery
pack drops below a specified threshold (ADS recommends 7.5
volts).
External Power
The TRITON+ also can receive power from an external AC or DC
source through an external power and communications unit
(ExPAC, ADS p/n 8000-0377), external Modbus interface unit
(XBUS, ADS p/n 8000-0427), or external input/output device
(XIO, ADS p/n 8000-0400) located outside the manhole near the
power source. These units regulate the power coming to the
monitor and can provide Modbus (ExPAC or XBUS) and analog
and digital input and output interfaces (XIO) between the monitor
and third-party equipment. The XBUS enclosure includes an
ExPAC and power supply. The XIO enclosure includes an ExPAC,
power supply, I/O module, and I/O interface terminals.
System Overview
ExPAC
XBUS
2-13
2-14 ADS TRITON+ Manual
XIO
External power requires a power source running 9 to 36 volts at 1.2
amperes of peak current. AC power must first come through a
power supply for DC conversion prior to entering the ExPAC.
ADS recommends using a 24-VDC module (ADS, p/n 508293).
DC power can come directly from the power supply, a solar source,
or rechargeable battery to the ExPAC.
Note: ADS offers two versions of the TRITON+ (ADS
p/n 8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ and 8000-FST-IM-EP-GL)
specifically designed for receiving external DC power that
do not include the battery pack. However, batterypowered TRITON+ monitors (ADS p/n 8000-FST-IM-GL
and 8000-FST-IM-4VZ) may be converted to receive
external power using a special kit available through ADS
(p/n 8000-0434-xxx).
Powering the monitor through an external source is particularly
advantageous at a location that requires logging an extensive
amount of data on a short interval and eliminates the periodic need
for battery replacement and disposal.
Refer to Chapter 5, External Power, for more information on
powering a TRITON+ through an external source.
System Overview
2-15
Sensors
The TRITON+ flow monitor can support up to two (2) of the five
(5) sensor types at one time to gather raw flow data. It also can
support two (2) of the same sensor type at one time, configured on
separate mounting points. Using independent measurement
techniques, ultrasonic and pressure depth sensors collect
information used to determine the depth of the flow. Velocity
sensors also use different methods to determine the average and
peak velocity of the flow. This variety of sensor options provides
the versatility of measuring the depth and velocity of the flow from
the top or bottom of the pipe and/or from within or outside of the
flow.
A sewer system's hydraulics are much more stable and uniform in
the incoming pipe than in the manhole invert or outgoing pipe.
Therefore, in installations when accurate flow-rate is desired,
mount the sensors to a stainless steel expandable ring or stainless
steel band and install the sensors in the pipe upstream from the
manhole. Installing them upstream minimizes the hydraulic effects
and erroneous data readings caused by foamy waters, flow waves,
sewer noise, non-laminar flow, and obstructions in the manhole.
If the purpose of the installation is to monitor for manhole
surcharging or overflow, and not accurate flow-rate, the sensor can
be mounted in the manhole structure. ADS recommends using the
Long Range Depth Sensor for this application.
2-16 ADS TRITON+ Manual
AV|Gated Sensor
The AV|Gated sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS7-10-35) mounts at the
bottom center of the pipe and measures ultrasonic depth, average
velocity, pressure depth, and water temperature. The sensor
leverages dual depth technology and provides ultrasonic depth
measurements to full pipe and pressure depth measurements during
surcharge conditions.
AV|Gated sensor
Velocity Sensor
The AV|Gated sensor measures average velocity by measuring
velocity at multiple discrete points within the flow and the returning
reflected signal is processed using a digital signal processor from
which average velocity is calculated.
System Overview
2-17
AV|Gated sensor firing velocity
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
The AV|Gated sensor leverages dual depth technology and
provides ultrasonic depth measurements to full pipe and pressure
depth measurements during surcharge conditions.
To provide the depth of the flow, the sensor sends an ultrasonic
signal upward that bounces off the water surface – air interface.
The travel time from the sensor to the flow surface and back is
converted to distance, which translates into the depth of the flow.
AV|Gated upward looking ultrasonic depth signals bouncing off water surface
2-18 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Pressure Depth Sensor
A pressure transducer in the AV|Gated sensor measures the depth
of the flow over the sensor. The monitor can use this data for
comparison with other depth measurement devices in less than fullpipe conditions. The pressure depth sensor also can measure depths
greater than full pipe that may extend up into the manhole during
surcharge conditions.
Water pressure impacts a diaphragm in the transducer that varies an
electrical current. This current is digitized by a sensor processor
board and the value is sent to the monitor processor board. A vent
tube on the back of the diaphragm equalizes for atmospheric
pressure. The pressure transducers used in the AV|Gated sensor is a
0 - 10 PSI (0 - 0.68 Bar).
Long Range Depth Sensor
The Long Range Depth Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS6-C1-10) with a
standard adjustable Mounting Bar (ADS p/n 8000-0450) attaches
beneath the manhole cover and measures ultrasonic depth.
Long Range Depth Sensor
System Overview
2-19
This sensor has an ultrasonic transducer with a glass reinforced
epoxy acoustic window and is located inside the integral parabolic
reflector. It first transmits an ultrasonic signal horizontally from
the transducer to the optimized reflector, focusing a very narrow
beam downwards. The signal bounces off the flow and returns to
the reflector where it is concentrated and aimed at the same
transducer. The monitor measures the travel time elapsed between
transmission and reception of the reflected sound signal. Based on
the elapsed time and the speed of sound, the monitor determines the
air range. The range represents the distance between the sensor
face and flow surface. The monitor calculates the depth of the flow
by subtracting the range from the manhole depth.
It computes the speed of sound in the air using the temperature
recorded by a temperature sensor housed within the ultrasonic
depth sensor.
Long Range Depth Sensor ultrasonic signals
The Long Range Depth Sensor also includes a magnetic
Submersion Sensor that affixes to the manhole frame. It detects the
water level above the parabolic enclosure up near the manhole lid.
The Submersion Sensor is a reliable digital capacitive sensor that
triggers an alarm when fully submerged.
2-20 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Peak Combo Sensor
The Peak Combo Sensor with a standard 35-foot (10.6-m) or 100foot (30.5-m) cable (ADS p/n 8K-CS4-XX-35/1H) typically mounts
at the bottom of the pipe and measures ultrasonic depth, pressure
depth, and peak velocity using three independent sensors.
Peak Combo Sensor
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
To provide the depth of the flow, the sensor sends an ultrasonic
signal upward that bounces off the water surface – air interface.
The travel time from the sensor to the flow surface and back is
converted to distance, which translates into the depth of the flow.
Upward ultrasonic depth signals bouncing off water surface
Pressure Depth Sensor
A pressure transducer in the Peak Combo Sensor also measures the
depth of the flow over the sensor. The monitor can use this data for
comparison with other depth measurement devices in less than full-
System Overview
2-21
pipe conditions. The pressure depth sensor also can measure depths
greater than full pipe that may extend up into the manhole during
surcharge conditions.
Water pressure impacts a diaphragm in the transducer that varies an
electrical current. This current is digitized by a sensor processor
board and the value is sent to the monitor processor board. A vent
tube on the back of the diaphragm equalizes for atmospheric
pressure. Three versions of pressure transducers are available with
this combo sensor: 0 - 5 PSI (0 - 0.34 Bar), 0 - 15 PSI (0 - 1.03
Bar), and 0 - 30 PSI (0 - 2.07 Bar).
Peak Velocity Sensor
To obtain peak velocity, this sensor sends an ultrasonic signal at an
angle up through the velocity layers in the oncoming flow. It emits
a wide, omni-directional sound wave at a specific frequency
upward into the flow. The sound wave bounces off particles in the
flow and returns to the sensor. The velocity sensor measures the
change in the sound wave's frequency from transmission to
reception. This change is used to determine the peak velocity of the
flow based on the Doppler effect.
FLOW
PARTICLES
Peak Combo Sensor peak velocity transducer
The Doppler effect describes the shift in frequency of a sound wave
emitted by a moving object in relation to a stationary point. The
moving objects represent particles in the flow, the stationary point
is the velocity sensor, and the signal received is the reflection of the
sound wave (emitted by the velocity sensor) off the particles.
2-22 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Based on this information, the sensor determines the peak velocity
of the oncoming flow. ADS’s analytical and data processing
software calculates an average velocity from this peak by applying
a user-defined average-to-peak ratio.
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
The Ultrasonic Depth Sensor with a standard 30-foot (9.1-m) cable
(ADS p/n 8K-CS5-D1-00-30) mounts at the crown of the pipe and
measures ultrasonic depth.
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
This sensor first transmits an ultrasonic signal downward from one
of the crystals on the sensor face that bounces off the flow surface
and returns to the other crystal. The monitor measures the travel
time elapsed between transmission and reception of the reflected
sound signal. Based on the elapsed time and the speed of sound,
the monitor determines the range. The range represents the
distance between the sensor face and flow surface. The monitor
calculates the depth of the flow by subtracting the range from the
pipe diameter. It compensates for the speed of sound in the air
using the temperature recorded by a temperature sensor housed
within the ultrasonic depth sensor.
The ultrasonic depth sensor is located in the front, horizontal
portion of the sensor and has two downward-facing ultrasonic
crystals covered with a clear, moisture-shedding Teflon® coating.
System Overview
2-23
FLOW
Ultrasonic depth sensor sending signals to flow surface to determine range
Surface Combo Sensor
The Surface Combo Sensor with a standard 30-foot (9.1-m) cable
(ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-XX-30/1H) mounts at the top of the pipe and
measures ultrasonic depth, surcharge pressure depth, surface
velocity, and surcharge peak velocity using four independent
sensors.
2-24 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Surface Combo Sensor
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
This sensor first transmits an ultrasonic signal downward from one
of the crystals on the sensor face that bounces off the flow surface
and returns to the other crystal. The monitor measures the travel
time elapsed between transmission and reception of the reflected
sound signal. Based on the elapsed time and the speed of sound,
the monitor determines the range. The range represents the
distance between the sensor face and flow surface. The monitor
calculates the depth of the flow by subtracting the range from the
pipe diameter. It compensates for the speed of sound in the air
using the temperature recorded by a temperature sensor housed
within the ultrasonic depth sensor.
The ultrasonic depth sensor is located in the front, horizontal
portion of the sensor and has two downward-facing ultrasonic
crystals covered with a clear, moisture-shedding Teflon® coating.
System Overview
2-25
Surface Velocity Sensor
This sensor measures the velocity of the flow also by bouncing
signals off the flow surface using a method similar to the ultrasonic
depth sensor, but the velocity signals are angled toward the
oncoming flow surface.
The surface velocity sensor crystals reside in the two descended
portions toward the rear end of the sensor.
ADS does not recommend using this sensor for measuring velocity
at locations with smooth flow surfaces or velocities of less than 1
foot per second (0.3 m/s).
SURFACE VELOCITY
FLOW
Measuring velocity using the surface velocity sensor
Surcharge Peak Velocity Sensor
This sensor measures the velocity of the flow during surcharge
conditions using the same methodology as the Peak Combo
Velocity Sensor. Therefore, it will measure velocity only when the
pipe is full.
The surcharge peak velocity sensor resides in the angled, front
portion of the sensor in front of the ultrasonic depth crystals.
2-26 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Surcharge Pressure Depth Sensor
The surcharge pressure depth sensor in the Surface Combo Sensor
measures pressure depth using the same technique as the other
combo sensors, except from the top of the pipe. Since it can
provide an accurate depth only when submerged, the data from this
sensor is useful only under full-pipe or surcharge conditions. The
Surface Combo Sensor offers three options for pressure
measurement: 0 - 5 PSI (0 - 0.34 Bar), 0 - 15 PSI (0 - 1.03 Bar),
and 0 - 30 PSI (0 - 2.07 Bar).
Inclinometer Sensor
The Inclinometer sensor utilizes an integrated accelerometer in a
sealed and intrinsically safe housing to accurately determine angle
measurements for ascertaining orientation of flood gates. Mounting
is on any flat surface of the wastewater collection side of the flood
gate.
Inclinometer sensor
System Overview
2-27
I/O and Modbus Capability
The TRITON+ supports several different inputs and outputs
through the ADS XIO interface unit. The monitor facilitates
Modbus communications through the ADS ExPAC or ADS XBUS.
Inside of XIO showing I/O terminal block, power supply, and ExPAC
Analog Inputs and Outputs
The monitor can support up to two 4-20mA analog inputs and two
4-20mA analog outputs. The analog output capability may be used
to provide information or signals to third-party systems, such as
monitors from other vendors. The TRITON+ sends out information
through the outputs at the same interval used when taking sensor
readings
2-28 ADS TRITON+ Manual
The analog inputs are designed to store specific data received from
third-party instruments, such as sensors, every 15 seconds.
Digital Inputs and Outputs
The monitor can support up to two digital inputs and two digital
outputs. The digital inputs receive pulses corresponding to
switches that indicate the presence or absence of a particular
condition, such as an alarm occurring through a third-party system.
The TRITON+ records the state of these inputs at an interval
equivalent to the monitor’s sample rate.
The digital outputs serve as relays to notify other third-party
systems concerning certain flow conditions detected by the
TRITON+. Conditions typically involve flows crossing established
thresholds that trigger events. The TRITON+ refreshes the state of
these outputs every 15 seconds.
Modbus
Modbus is a protocol that enables communication to occur between
multiple devices connected to the same network. It often is used to
connect a supervisory computer with a remote terminal unit (RTU)
in supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems.
ADS uses Modbus to provide information directly to RTUs or
SCADA systems.
The ExPAC represents the interface through which Modbus
communications occur.
System Overview
2-29
Project Organization Checklist
In order to set up the TRITON+ monitor to successfully communicate
and record flow information, the following steps must be performed.
Refer to the chapters identified for more detailed information.
Note: Verify your TRITON+ 8000-FST-IM-GL monitors
have SIM cards installed and order if necessary before
proceeding with this checklist.
Perform these steps prior to the field installation:
•
Install the SIM card (TRITON+ 8000-FST-IM-GL and 8000-FSTIM-EP-GL only) (Refer to Chapter 3, Installing the SIM Card)
•
Activate the SIM card and get the IP address (TRITON+ 8000FST-IM-4VZ, 8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ, 8000-FST-IM-GL, and
8000-FST-IM-EP-GL) (Refer to Chapter3, Activating the SIM
Card)
Note: Request the SIM activation within 48 hours of
monitor installation and before heading to the field to
install the TRITON+.
•
Configure and activate the monitor (in-office) (Refer to Chapter 6,
Configuring the Monitor Location and Activating the Monitor)
Perform these steps in the field once the above steps are complete:
•
Install the Sensors (Refer to Chapter 3, Sensor Installation and
Connection)
•
Install and connect the wireless antenna (Refer to Chapter 4,
Installing the Antenna)
•
Install the monitor (Refer to Chapter 7, Monitor Installation)
•
Connect to the monitor for on-site communication (Refer to
Chapter 4, Connecting to the Monitor in the Field)
3-1
CHAPTER 3
Communication
All methods of communication with the TRITON+ require a field
(laptop) computer or office computer equipped with the ADS
Qstart™ software.
Wireless, remote communication occurs through a wireless antenna
and an internal modem housed inside the monitor.
Direct, on-site communication with the monitor is possible through
an intrinsically-safe (IS) USB serial interface connection between
the monitor and a laptop computer.
As well as a providing an overview of communications, this chapter
contains information and instructions concerning the following:
⚫
Activating the SIM card
⚫
Installing the SIM card (TRITON+ 8000-FST-IM-GL and
8000-FST-IM-EP-GL only)
⚫
Connecting the antenna for wireless communication
⚫
Connecting a USB interface cable directly to the monitor for
on-site communication
Note: Manhole and sewer system work involves confined
space entry and is inherently dangerous. Therefore,
installers and technicians must comply with all national,
state, and municipal regulations concerning confined space
entry. ADS is not responsible for any injuries, damages,
claims, or liability resulting directly or indirectly from the
3-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
use of this installation guide or the installation of any ADS
equipment.
Warning: The TRITON+’s internal modem requires
connection to an external antenna. ADS recommends using
ADS antenna p/n 9000-0080 with the TRITON+ monitor.
This antenna supports the frequencies used by the 4VZ and
GL TRITON+ models. The user must maintain a
distance of 9 inches (229 mm) from the antenna
whenever the modem is in operation.
ADS TRITON+ antenna
Communication
3-3
Cellular-Based Wireless
Communication Overview
The ADS TRITON+ monitoring system supports cellular wireless
communication through an internal Telit UMTS/HSPA+/GSM
modem (in TRITON+ monitors supporting global 36 network
services, ADS p/n 8000-FST-IM-GL or 8000-FST-IM-EP-GL) or
Verizon LTE-M modem (in TRITON+ monitors supporting
Verizon® network services, ADS p/n 8000-FST-IM-4VZ or 8000FST-IM-EP-4VZ) using static or dynamic IP address network
services. Any location considered for wireless communication
installation must have access to 800/850, 900, AWS1700, 1900, or
2100 MHz service and B1, B2, B4, B5, and B8, or B13 (for
Verizon LTE-M) operating bands. The wireless device must
contain a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card provisioned with
specific account and network information.
Wireless communications and the quality of service depend on local
conditions and service providers. An optimal location for flow
monitoring may not offer the best wireless network coverage. The
user is responsible for finding the most reliable network for the
project area. Therefore, perform a signal survey to ensure that the
monitoring site has adequate reception for wireless
communications. Consider consulting local wireless providers for
assistance.
Note: Do not rely solely on coverage maps. These can
provide misleading information for specific areas.
Typically, sewer systems exist in low-lying areas in which
network access can be the most difficult to obtain.
Certain static IPs may be used for communicating wirelessly
through the Qstart software platform or networks supporting ADS
hosted system software. The service must support Mobile
Terminated service as well as Mobile-Originated (for alarm cryout)
functionality. Communication with a TRITON+ requires entering
the IP address for the location into the Qstart software.
3-4
ADS TRITON+ Manual
When using a static IP with a public IP address, the PC must have
internet connectivity. When using a static IP with a private IP
address, the PC first must establish a VPN connection with the
provider. (Please consult ADS Client Services for more
information on using private addresses.) Then, the user can
connect to a monitor through Qstart, provided the location has been
properly configured. Consult the Qstart online help for further
information on wireless setup and use.
Currently, dynamic IPs may be used only for uploading data
wirelessly from the monitor to an FTP site or an ADS Web-based
software database. Communicating directly through ADS software
to set up and activate monitors equipped with dynamic IPs must
occur over a direct connection using the ADS USB Serial Interface
cable (ADS p/n 8000-0337).
Direct communication with a TRITON+ monitor configured with a
dynamic IP requires the ADS IS USB serial interface cable (ADS
p/n 8000-0337). Indirect communication can occur through the
FTP Operations device (refer to Chapter 6, Configuration and
Activation, for more information). Using this device enables you to
activate the monitor, upgrade the firmware, and upload data through
the Qstart software.
The following table describes the type of IP addresses available for
use with each model of the ADS TRITON+ and which monitors
require an IP SIM card:
ADS TRITON+
Model
8000-FST-IM-GL1
8000-FST-IM-EP-GL1
8000-FST-IM-4VZ2
8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ2
Dynamic
IP
Static IP
SIM
Card
Public
Private
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Wireless configuration for ADS TRITON+ monitors (1 represents monitors
using global 3G network services; 2 represents monitors using Verizon
network services)
Communication
3-5
Installing the Antenna
Establishing remote, wireless communications with a TRITON+
monitor containing an internal modem involves installing a wireless
antenna and connecting the antenna to the monitor.
Depending on the TRITON+ monitor’s wireless signal strength at
the install site, the antenna may be installed inside or outside the
manhole. If the wireless signal strength is between -50dB and 85dB, then the monitor’s antenna can possibly be installed inside
the manhole. The following sections detail gathering the tools and
equipment needed for in-manhole or out-of-manhole antenna
installations.
Note: Wireless monitor communications will not occur if
the antenna is underwater. Therefore, consider whether the
monitor needs to communicate during surcharge conditions
when deciding on the antenna placement.
Note: For wireless communication, it is very important to
test the TRITON+ to verify the entire system functions and
confirm network quality of service. Perform this
validation before deploying to the field and again at the
monitoring site before installing the monitor.
Gathering Parts and Supplies
Determine the tools and equipment needed for the antenna
installation using the following lists for in-manhole and out-ofmanhole antenna installations.
Parts and Supplies for Inside-the-Manhole
Antenna Installation
When the antenna can be installed inside the manhole, it can be
mounted from the monitor’s mounting bracket, a manhole rung, or
3-6
ADS TRITON+ Manual
an L-bracket can be installed, Obtain the following items for an inmanhole antenna installation:
⚫
ADS wireless antenna (p/n 9000-0080)
⚫
Cable ties to secure the antenna
⚫
Lag bolt, L-bracket and masonry drill bits for drilling through
manhole wall, corbel, and other materials when there is no rung
or mounting bracket from which to hang the antenna
Tools and Equipment for Outside-of-theManhole Antenna Installation
Obtain the following items for an outside-of-the-manhole antenna
installation:
⚫
ADS wireless antenna (p/n 9000-0080) or a customer-supplied
antenna verified by ADS for successful monitor
communications
⚫
Extension cables (16-foot (4.9-m): ADS p/n 509154; 49-foot
(14.9-m): ADS p/n 509155) for 9000-0080 antenna, as needed
⚫
(applicable only to global 3G wireless monitors) AT&T SIM
card with public static IP address (ADS p/n 507181) or
customer-supplied SIM card with dynamic or static IP address
⚫
Magnet for diagnostic operations (ADS p/n 8000-0460)
⚫
8-mm anchor bolts with washers and nuts
⚫
Medium-sized non-rotating demolition hammer with a 0.5-inch
(13-mm), 0.75-inch (19-mm), or 1-inch (25-mm) masonry
chisel (sharpen the chisel before use) and bushing tool, or an
abrasive saw or grinder
⚫
Masonry drill bits for drilling through manhole wall, corbel,
and other materials. Include the following:
❑ 0.5-inch (13-mm) diameter (minimum) x 12-inch (305mm) long (minimum) bit
❑ 0.5-inch (13-mm) diameter x 36-inch (914-mm) long
(minimum) bit
Communication
3-7
❑ 1.25-inch (32-mm) diameter x 12-inch (305-mm) bit
⚫
Standard drill bits and masonry bits up to 0.6 inches (15 mm) in
diameter
⚫
Medium- to heavy-duty hammer drill (if no hammer/drill mode
is available on the demolition hammer)
⚫
Trowel or putty knife for scooping asphalt
⚫
Hammer
⚫
Carpenter’s rule
⚫
Pen, pencil, or chalk for marking asphalt or concrete
⚫
Shop vacuum
⚫
Wire brush
⚫
Alcohol wipes
⚫
Leather work gloves
⚫
Protective goggles
⚫
Heavy-duty, high-quality caulking gun (for regular-sized tubes)
⚫
Appropriate tools for cutting and removing tarmac or dirt for
burying antenna
⚫
Patching and sealing materials for tarmac and for sealing the
cable hole into the manhole
⚫
Cable ties for securing cable coils
⚫
Generator or other power source (for hammer drill)
⚫
Dry sand
⚫
Commercial asphalt cold patch compound (approximately 1
cup)
⚫
Scotch-kote electrical sealing compound (ADS p/n 505171)
⚫
Scotch 130C rubber stretch tape (ADS p/n 145-0001)
3-8
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Installing the Wireless Antenna
Use the following instructions for installing the wireless antenna to
the TRITON+ monitor inside the manhole or outside the manhole.
Inside the Manhole Antenna Installation
The TRITON+ using Verizon LTE-M communication can often
provide enough wireless signal strength to install the antenna inside
the manhole with the monitor. Use the following installation
instructions for installing the antenna inside the manhole when the
monitor wireless signal strength is between -50dB and -85dB while
the antenna is inside the manhole with the manhole lid closed.
Note: The antenna should be installed as close to the
manhole lid as possible.
Note: The antenna must be installed horizontally for
optimal signal strength.
1.
Use a cable tie to secure the antenna to a manhole rung or
monitor mounting bracket, if available. Position the antenna as
flat and parallel to the manhole lid as possible with the “This
Side Up” facing up.
2.
If no manhole rung or mounting bracket exists in the manhole,
install an L-bracket (using a lag bolt) to the manhole wall just
below the manhole rim and secure the antenna to the L-bracket.
Ensure the antenna is positioned as flat and parallel to the
manhole lid as possible with “This Side Up” facing up.
Communication
In-manhole antenna installed to mounting bar with cable tie
3-9
3-10
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Outside the Manhole Antenna Installation
These installation instructions are applicable for installing the
antenna in the road, ground, or under other paving materials.
ADS TRITON+ antenna
Install a wireless antenna in the road, in the dirt, or under other
paving materials in the following way:
Note: While this section describes the process for
installing this antenna, all wireless antennas provided
through ADS also include detailed installation instructions.
1.
Determine the appropriate location in the road near the
manhole to install the antenna:
❑ Locate the antenna in the road between 18 and 30 inches
(457 and 762 mm) from the manhole in which the monitor
is installed. Position the antenna as far as possible from
the massive iron frame and buried flange to prevent
shunting of the RF signal.
Communication
3-11
❑ Avoid locations at which cars will remain parked over the
antenna for extended periods (hampering the signal
strength).
❑ Select a location that drains well so that water will not
collect over the antenna, blocking the signal.
❑ Choose a location that is as flat as possible with stable base
material.
❑ Select a location where the antenna will experience
minimal direct impact from road traffic, where possible.
❑ Make sure the location exists beyond the manhole’s iron
rim beneath the road surface. This will enable you to
access the manhole corbel when drilling the channel for the
antenna cable.
❑ Verify that no buried utility cables exist in the area in
which drilling will occur for the antenna installation.
Consider contacting a Underground Utility Locating
Service for assistance.
2.
Mark the location for the antenna installation, and then mark
the location to drill the corbel hole 2.5 to 3 inches (64 to 76
mm) back from the edge of the antenna hole.
3.
Cut a 9-inch (229-mm) long by 4-inch (102-mm) wide by 0.75inch (19-mm) deep hole in the road using the non-rotating
demolition hammer (in the hammer only mode) with the
chisel/grinder. This will serve as the installation location for
the (mastic covered version) antenna. The corbel hole should
be at the end closest to the manhole cover.
4.
Drill a hole in the end of the cut closest to the manhole cover
through the corbel, and into the manhole using the ½-inch (13mm) by 36-inch (914-mm) hammer drill bit. This will serve as
the channel for the antenna cable extending from the antenna to
the monitor in the manhole. Be careful to avoid any cables in
the manhole, and restart the hole slightly to the right or left if
mesh is encountered or resistance occurs.
3-12
ADS TRITON+ Manual
ANTENNA HOLE
CABLE CHANNEL
CORBEL
TM
TRITON+ MONITOR
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
O
SURFACE COMBO
SENSOR
R
INSTALLATION RING
FLOW
PEAK COMBO SENSOR
Hole running from antenna installation location to manhole
5.
Thoroughly clean out the hole for the antenna of all debris
using a shop vacuum with a brush.
6.
If the protective cap is not present on the connector at the end
of the antenna cable, clean the connector and tape it up with
rubber stretch tape for protection against damage and debris
while it is being fed through the channel.
7.
Feed all of the antenna cable into the hole, through the channel,
and into the manhole. Smooth any rough edges where the cable
enters the corbel hole with the chisel or rubber stretch tape. In
addition, pack rubber stretch tape into the cable hole to prevent
asphalt or sealer from entering the cable hole.
8.
Apply the asphalt on top of the antenna element. When using
asphalt, scoop the warm material into the hole and then pound
it in using a hammer. Place a piece of wood or metal between
the asphalt and the hammer to prevent the hammer from
sticking to the asphalt. Make sure the asphalt protrudes slightly
above the level of the road surface.
Communication
9.
3-13
Sprinkle a thick (approximately 1/8-inch) layer of sand over the
asphalt, and then pound the sand lightly into the surface. The
sand must be used to ensure the asphalt does not adhere to
objects, such as vehicle tires, while drying. ADS recommends
dusting the surface with sand once again before leaving the site.
Antenna in cavity with patch
10. Coil the slack antenna cable and secure it away from the other
cables in the manhole. Slack enables the technicians to remove
the monitor from the manhole for maintenance or service
activities with the antenna cable still connected. Do not bundle
the antenna and sensor cables together! This can significantly
diminish antenna and sensor signal strength, disrupting
communications and limiting sensor accuracy.
Note: To prevent signal loss and damage to the cable and
antenna, do not kink or bend the antenna cable when
coiling.
3-14
ADS TRITON+ Manual
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
CABLE
CABLE CHANNEL
CORBEL
TM
TRITON+ MONITOR
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
OR
SURFACE COMBO SENSOR
INSTALLATION RING
FLOW
PEAK COMBO SENSOR
Installation with antenna cable coiled in manhole
11. Seal the space between the antenna cable and the corbel hole
with electrical duct seal or as required to prevent infiltration
into the manhole.
Note: Do no connect the antenna cable to the monitor
until after installing the SIM card (when applicable).
Installing the SIM Card
NOTE: This instruction only applies to TRITON+ models
8000-FST-IM-GL and 8000-FST-IM-EP-GL.
TRITON+ models 8000-FST-IM-4VZ and 8000-FST-IMEP-4VZ come with the SIM card pre-installed and
therefore this information does not apply.
Communication
3-15
The modems in the TRITON+ monitors supporting global 3G
network services (ADS p/n 8000-FST-IM –GL and 8000-FST-IMEP-GL) require a SIM card for establishing communication. This
modem supports SIM card provisioned by many different carriers,
including SIM cards provisioned by AT&T (ADS p/n 507181) for
public and private, static IP address operations as well as SIM cards
provisioned by other carriers for dynamic IP address operation.
Please contact ADS if you have specific questions about your SIM
card provider and compatibility of the provider’s SIM card with the
TRITON+ monitor.
The TRITON+ monitor performs wireless communications through
an internal modem that is supported by a SIM card located in the
SIM holder at the top of the monitor canister. The TRITON+ 8000FST-IM-4VZ or 8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ come with a SIM card preinstalled. If a SIM card not supplied by ADS is to be used, the
installed SIM card will need to be removed. Refer to Replacing the
SIM Card in Chapter 10 for more information.
Refer to the steps in the following two sections for guidance on
replacing the SIM card.
Note: The SIMs in the 8000-FST-IM-4VZ and 8000-FSTIM-EP-4VZ are specifically linked to the modem in the
monitor, therefore, DO NOT attempt to remove or swap
the SIM card from these monitors.
Install the SIM card in the following way:
Note: Locate the monitor in a dry, clean area (i.e., an
adequate distance away from the manhole) before
installing the SIM card.
1.
(applies only to static IP SIM cards) Record the number of the
SIM card (i.e., the IP address) on the site report. You will need
this address to reconcile billing and when setting up the LIF in
the Qstart software. The IP address is printed directly on the
SIM card or on a label affixed to the card.
3-16
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Example of SIM card
2.
Wipe away any debris or moisture that could enter the SIM
card enclosure on the monitor top once the cap is removed
from the enclosure.
3.
Release and remove the plastic tie running between the locks
holding the cap on the SIM card enclosure.
4.
Pull out the locks securing the cap to the enclosure, and remove
the cap from the enclosure.
SIM card enclosure with plastic tie securing the locks
Communication
3-17
SIM card enclosure locks released (left) and enclosure cap removed (right)
5.
Insert the SIM card into the groove on the inside of the
enclosure, notched edge first with the contacts facing the
pressure valve. Slide the SIM card all the way into the holder,
and press down to lock it into place. The holder has a spring
mechanism that secures the card in the holder.
Inserting the SIM card into the holder (left); SIM card securely seated
Note: To release/remove the SIM card from the holder,
when necessary (e.g., for replacement), push the exposed
edge of the card slightly further into the holder and release.
The card should pop out slightly, freed from its secured
position.
3-18
ADS TRITON+ Manual
SIM card released from secure position in holder
6. Replace the cap onto the SIM card enclosure, and snap the
locks in place to secure the cap.
7. Replace and reconnect the plastic tie between the locks holding
the cap on the SIM card enclosure.
Activating the SIM Card
Note: TRITON+ 8000-FST-IM-4VZ and 8000-FST-IMEP-4VZ monitors come with the SIM card pre-installed.
TRITON+ monitor use a SIM card which must be activated (to
allow for wireless communication) within 48 hours of monitor
activation and before heading to the field to install the monitor.
Use the following to activate the SIM card:
1.
Request activation of the SIM card by emailing
[email protected] Include the serial number of the
specific TRITON+ monitor and the last four digits of the SIM
card number (the 20 digit number found on the attached SIM
punch-out card) as well as the name of the municipality or
company requesting the activation. ADS employees should
Communication
3-19
also include the project name and job number as part of the
request.
SIM Punch-out Card for Verizon LTE-M
2. Wait for a return email from ADS. The email will contain the
IP address of the SIM card and its associated phone number.
Using a permanent marker, write the IP address and its
associated phone number on empty space on the card and save
the card for future reference, as needed.
Note: If the SIM is for a TRITON+ GL monitor, go ahead
and install the SIM into the SIM card holder on the
monitor canister.
3.
Wait at least 15 minutes from receipt of email before
proceeding to the next section.
Note: The SIM card should not be activated more
than 48 hours before the modem is initialized.
Connecting the Antenna to the Monitor
Note: ADS recommends installing the antenna prior to
connecting the antenna to the monitor.
3-20
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Connect the antenna to the monitor in the following way:
1.
Attach the antenna cable connector to the ANTENNA port on
the monitor top (first removing the electrical tape from the
cable end, when applicable).
2.
Wrap rubber stretch tape around the entire cable connection,
extending onto the cable approximately 2 inches (50 mm)
beyond the connection with the antenna cable.
ANTENNA CABLE
COAXIAL STRETCH TAPE
ANTENNA PORT
TRITON+ MONITOR
Antenna cable connected to Antenna port on monitor with stretch tape
properly applied
3.
Carefully coil and secure the remaining slack antenna cabling
as necessary. Slack enables the technicians to remove the
monitor from the manhole for maintenance or service activities
with the antenna still connected.
Note: Remember to avoid bundling the antenna and
sensor cables together! This can significantly diminish
antenna and sensor signal strength, disrupting
communications and limiting sensor accuracy. In addition,
avoid kinking and bending the cables when coiling to
prevent signal loss and damage to the cables and
corresponding equipment.
Communication
3-21
Connecting to the Monitor in the Field
ADS offers two methods for communicating with the monitor onsite or in the field: direct connection or indirect connection.
Direct connection allows you to connect directly to the TRITON+
with a laptop (or office) computer for on-site communications. This
type of communication occurs through the ADS USB Serial
Interface cable (ADS p/n 8000-0337). This interface cable consists
of two parts: the primary 10-foot (3.1-m) cable, which includes the
interface box and the potted, 10-pin metal cable connector, and the
6-foot (1.8-m) standard USB A-to-B cable.
USB Serial Interface Cable
Note: A Direct Serial Interface cable (ADS p/n 80000054) also may be used to connect directly to the
TRITON+. However, using this cable may result in
significantly slower data transmission than when using the
USB Serial Interface cable. In addition, the Direct Serial
Interface cable may require a USB-to-serial converter
cable to enable you to connect to a USB port when a
legacy RS-232 port is not available.
Indirect connection enables you to connect to externally-powered
TRITON+ monitors through the ADS ExPAC with a laptop
3-22
ADS TRITON+ Manual
computer via a standard A-to-B USB cable for on-site
communications. This method must be used for externally-powered
monitors because the port on the monitor through which direct
connection typically occurs is reserved for receiving power from the
ExPAC/XBUS/XIO in these applications.
Before you can communicate with the monitor through your
computer using the ADS USB Serial Interface cable or a standard
USB cable, you must install a special driver on your computer. The
instructions for installing the driver are printed on the label on the
bottom of the cable’s interface box or on the top, left side of the
ExPAC. When selecting the driver from the website, ADS
recommends clicking on the setup executable link in the
Comments column corresponding to your operating system to
initiate the installation process. Then, simply follow the installation
steps as instructed.
Once the driver is installed, connect from a laptop (or office)
computer to the monitor in one of the following ways, based on the
application.
Connecting Directly to the Monitor
1.
Attach the two cables comprising the USB Serial Interface
cable together by inserting the Type B connector from the
standard USB A-to-B cable into the corresponding port on the
interface box of the primary cable.
2.
Insert the Type A connector from the USB Serial Interface
cable into the proper USB port on the computer.
3.
Attach the metal cable connector from the USB Serial Interface
cable to the corresponding COMM + EXT PWR port on the
top of the monitor.
Communication
3-23
USB Serial Interface Cable
Interface Box
Primary cable
USB A-to-B Cable
type - A
connector
type - B
connector
Laptop Computer
A
CH
NN E L
SENSORS
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
WAKE
CPU
SENS
0518
II 1 G
ST AT US
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga Rev
Sira 09ATEX2027X DATE
SIR 006
S/N
CSA 2013 2671180
Ex ia IIB T3 (152°C)
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
IECEx SIR09.0020X
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
See CONTROL DWG 8000BK0009
Voir SCHEMA DE CONTROLE
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
Utilisez uniquement la batterie 8000-0043
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
CONTAINS CELL XMTR
FCC ID: R17HE910
A
NT
A
USB Port
ENN
C
O
MM
R
TM
W
+ EX T P
R
w w w.a d s e n v.c o m
COMM + EXT PWR
TRITON+
Connecting the USB Serial Interface cable to a laptop and monitor
Note: When using the optional extension cable (ADS p/n
8000-0044-25), run it between the monitor and the USB
Serial Interface cable.
4.
Designate the appropriate local USB port on the computer for
communication through the Qstart software. For more
information, refer to the Qstart online help.
Connecting to the Monitor through the ExPAC
1.
Insert the Type A connector from the standard USB cable into
the proper USB port on the computer.
2.
Insert the Type B connector from the other end of the USB
cable into the USB port on the top of the ExPAC.
ADS TRITON+ Manual
USB A-to-B Cable
type - A
connector
type - B
connector
Laptop Computer
ExPAC/EXT POWER & COMMS UNIT
INSTALL DRIVER BEFORE USB CONNECTION
-GO TO WWW.FTDICHIP.COM
VCP DRIVERS
-CLICK ON DRIVERS
-CLICK ON THE SUPPORTED DRIVER FOR YOUR OS
3-24
S/N
DATE
P/N 8000-0377
REV
R
II (1) G
[Ex ia IIB (Ga)
Sira 09ATEX2027X
SIR 006
0518
IECEx SIR09.0020X
[Ex ia IIB (Ga)
Ta = -20°C to +50°C
CSA 2013 2671180
[Ex ia] IIB
Ta = -20°C to +50°C
S/N
See CONTROL DRAWING
Voir SCHEMA DE CONTROLE
8000BK0009
USB Port
ExPAC Module
Connecting the standard USB cable to a laptop and ExPAC
3.
Designate the appropriate local USB port on the computer for
communication through the Qstart software. For more
information, refer to the Qstart online help.
4-1
CHAPTER 4
Configuration and Activation
In order to get the monitor to begin taking flow measurements and
recording flow data, it is necessary to configure and activate the
monitor.
NOTE: ADS recommends that the initial configuration
and activation of the TRITON+ occur in the office prior to
the field installation. Refer to Chapter 2, Project
Organization Checklist, for more information.
This chapter contains general instructions on the following activities
concerning monitor configuration and activation:
⚫
Starting and configuring Qstart™ XML
⚫
Creating and configuring a monitor location
⚫
Configuring the monitoring point installation (pipe) table
(including setting Gain)
⚫
Selecting and editing devices (usually attached sensors)
⚫
Activating the monitor
This chapter also includes the procedures for running diagnostics
and performing confirmations on the sensors, collecting data from
the monitor, and upgrading the firmware (embedded software) in
the monitor using the ADS QstartXML software. You can also
consult the QstartXML online help within the application.
4-2 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Hardware and Software Compatibility
Please note the following compatibility requirements for using the
TRITON+ with the ADS QstartXML software:
⚫
QstartXML is supported on computers running Microsoft®
Windows 10.
⚫
QstartXML supports all TRITON+ and hardware devices for
activation, diagnostics, and data collects.
Starting QstartXML
Before traveling to the field for installation, configuration, and
activation activities, install the QstartXML software on the field
computer.
Once installed, start the QstartXML software from an office or field
computer by selecting Start > All Programs > ADS LLC >
QstartXML from the Microsoft Windows start menu or doubleclicking on the QstartXML icon on the Windows desktop.
QstartXML icon on desktop
The QstartXML main screen displays.
Configuration and Activation
4-3
QstartXML main screen
Setting Up the QstartXML Parameters
The Settings dialog displays the first time you run QstartXML
following installation and can also be accessed through the main
ADS QstartXML dialog. The Settings dialog allows you to designate
settings corresponding to configuration and data files.
QstartXML Settings dialog
4-4 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Complete the Settings dialog in the following way:
1.
Enter the path or browse to the directory to which you want to
save location information files (XMLs) and collected flow data
in the Data Path field.
2.
Select the port on your computer through which you will
connect directly to the monitor from the Serial Port drop-down
list.
3.
Select the port on your computer through which you will
perform landline communications from the Modem Port dropdown list.
4.
Select the units of measure (US or Metric) you want to use
throughout QstartXML when entering values, saving data, and
displaying data from the Units drop-down list. The US units
report quantity in MGD, depth in inches, and velocity in feet
per second. The Metric units report quantity in liters per
second, depth in millimeters, and velocity in meters per second.
5.
Select the format in which you want to save data collected from
the monitor from the Data Format drop-down list. ADS
represents the ADS proprietary Bin format; CSV (commaseparated value) represents a format generally compatible with
most spreadsheet applications, such as Microsoft® Excel®.
Select Both to collect both the ADS and CSV file formats.
6.
Select the Always use monitor XML as preferred
configuration checkbox to ensure QstartXML automatically
overwrites the local configuration with the XML stored in the
monitor memory when an Upload is performed. Choosing this
option also automatically updates the local serial number with
the serial in the monitor (when an inconsistency exists between
the monitor and computer) whenever communication is
established with a monitor.
7.
Select the Use ADS Dates for CSV checkbox to store
collected data in CSV files using the ADS date format. When
this option is not selected, QstartXML stores the CSV data in the
local Windows-configured regional date format.
Configuration and Activation
4-5
8.
Select the appropriate CSV file column break indicator from
the CSV Delimiter drop-down which you want QstartXML to
use in all CSV files. This selection should be appropriate for
the current Windows regional setting on the local computer. A
comma separated values (CSV) file is sometimes called a
character-separated values file because the field separators used
to organize the data into columns does not always have to be a
comma (commas indicate the columns are separated by
commas). For example, users with the regional setting of
English (United States) will use the default of , (comma).
However, users located in other regions of the world
(Germany, Spain, Portugal, Russia, etc.) will choose . (period),
or ; (semicolon) in order to conform to the CSV format of their
region.
9.
Select the CSV decimal placeholder from the CSV Decimal
drop-down which you want QstartXML to use in all CSV files.
This selection should be appropriate for the current
Windows® regional setting on the local computer and will be
used in all QstartXML generated CSV files to indicate the
appropriate decimal placeholder for numerical values. For
example, users with the English (United States) regional setting
will use the default of . (period) to indicate a period symbol
should be used for decimal placeholders (123.45 for example)
in number values included in their QstartXML generated CSV
files. QstartXML users in other regions of the world (Germany,
Spain, Portugal, Russia, etc.) can choose , (comma) to use a
comma (123,45 for example) for decimal positions in the
numbers included in their CSV files.
10. Select the Advanced button to access the settings for the
AV|Gated Accelerometer Slope and Accelerometer
Tolerance.
4-6 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Advanced System Parameters
❑ Accelerometer Slope Tolerance This field displays
the threshold beyond which the user will see a warning that
the AV|Gated sensor has too much slope. This field
defaults to 5.00º.
❑ Accelerometer Rotation Tolerance This field
displays the threshold beyond which the user will see a
warning that the AV|Gated sensor has too much rotation.
This field defaults to 5.00º.
11. The Default Location field indicates the location which
QstartXML will use as a template from which to create all new
locations (when users choose the New button). If you have not
designated a default location, clicking New will populate the
parameters based on QstartXML’s default configuration. This
field remains blank until you designate the default location on
the Settings dialog.
12. Click on the OK button to save the settings from this dialog to
the designated local directory or network.
The ADS QstartXML window displays the default monitor
information.
Note: You can access the data and communication
settings at any time by clicking on the Settings button on
the ADS QstartXML dialog.
Configuration and Activation
4-7
Configuring the Monitor Location
To ensure the most efficient and useful results for each monitor
location, the user must activate the TRITON+ flow monitor with the
proper configuration information to satisfy the specific monitoring
needs of the project and to reflect actual site conditions. The
configuration information includes critical details such as the
monitor name, series, pipe size and shape, sensor assignment and
parameters, and data sample rate.
Users input the configuration details for each monitor into
QstartXML. The configuration details for each are stored in an
information file (XML) on the user’s local directory or network
drive. After the monitor configuration process is completed, users
must then perform a monitor activation to download the specific
elements of the XML to the monitor memory in order to initiate
monitor operations. Following is the general process for creating a
new monitor location.
⚫
Create and configure a monitor location in QstartXML
⚫
Configure the monitoring point(s) for the monitor location
⚫
Select and edit devices for the monitor location
Note: If remote communication already has been
established for the location, these activities can be
performed in cooperation between field and office
personnel. If remote communication is not available,
perform configuration and activation on site through direct
communication with the monitor.
Create and Configure the Monitor Location
Entering the monitor information is the first step to creating a new
monitor location. The following steps describe the process for
entering the information and designating the parameters for an
existing location:
4-8 ADS TRITON+ Manual
1.
(applies only when establishing a new location) Click on the
New button on the ADS QstartXML dialog to set up the monitor
information for a new location. Using this option displays the
parameters corresponding to the Default Location identified
on the Settings dialog.
Note: If you have not designated or established a default
location, clicking New will populate the parameter fields
based on QstartXML's default monitor configuration.
The ADS QstartXML dialog displays the default parameters for
a new location.
2.
Enter a name for the new location in the Location Name field
or select an existing location from the drop-down list. This list
contains all the locations available in the local or network
directory designated previously on the Settings dialog as the
Data Path. A location name may be up to 19 characters in
length. However, do not duplicate more than the first seven
characters of another location's name, unless the 8th or a later
character is followed by an underscore (_) and a unique
character(s). For example, you would not use the names
ADSTriton1 and ADSTriton2, but you could use the names
ADS_Triton1 and ADS_Triton2.
Note: You can click on the Default button to update the
parameters for the current location on the ADS QstartXML
dialog based on the Default Location (designated on the
Settings dialog), without changing the location name.
3.
Select TRITON+ as the type of monitor the location from the
Series drop-down list. If you selected an existing site from the
Location Name drop-down list, this field will automatically
display the monitor series corresponding to that location.
4.
Enter or edit the monitor serial number in the Serial Number
field.
5.
Verify or select the interval at which you want the monitor to
take measurements and log data from the Sample Rate dropdown list.
Configuration and Activation
4-9
6.
Enter or edit the distance (in inches or mm) from the manhole
rim to the bottom center of the invert for the Manhole Depth.
7.
Verify or select the method through which you will
communicate with the monitor from the Connect drop-down
list.
❑ Serial Choose this option to perform direct, serial
communication with the monitor.
Note: Always use Serial communications to perform the
initial monitor activation or after a deactivation.
❑ Wireless Choose this for TRITON+ monitors with SIMs
with static IP addresses for performing wireless
communication.
8.
(applicable only to Wireless communications) Enter the IP
address corresponding to the monitor in the IP Address field.
The field designation displayed depends on the method of
communication selected in the Connect field.
9.
(applicable only to monitors supporting Modbus and Telog
Ru-33 operations) Click on the Modbus button and complete
the Modbus Parameters dialog in the following way:
❑ Select the Enable checkbox.
❑ Enter the slave address number in the ID field to be used
when facilitating communication between the
monitor/EMUX (FlowShark Triton) or
monitor/ExPAC/XBUS (ADS TRITON+/ and the thirdparty system (e.g., a SCADA system, RTU, or process
control system). For TRITON+, FlowShark Triton and
FlowHawk monitors, choose a number from 2 to 57, 59 to
96, or 98 to 247. For installations involving Telog RU-33,
ADS recommends using 1 as the ID.
❑ Enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, following a
request you want the monitor to wait before returning the
requested data to the third-party system in the Delay
Response field. (This field typically does not need
editing.)
4-10 ADS TRITON+ Manual
❑ Click on the OK button.
10. Select the Save button to save the current parameters on the
dialog to the local directory or network.
11. Continue to enter the monitoring point information and assign
and edit the devices.
Configure the Monitoring Point(s)
The second step in configuring a monitor is entering the monitoring
point information. This involves designating the pipe
characteristics at the monitoring point and assigning and editing the
devices corresponding to the monitoring point.
The monitoring point represents the physical location at which the
sensors are installed in the pipe or channel. A monitor location can
support up to two monitoring points, and the settings must be
designated for each monitoring point.
Enter the information for each monitoring point in the following
way:
1.
Select the type or shape of the pipe or channel in which the
sensors are installed from the Type drop-down list on the ADS
QstartXML dialog.
2.
Enter the installation information in the corresponding fields
based on the selected pipe or installation type.
❑ Pipe
−
Height Enter the distance from the bottom of the
pipe to the crown (i.e., top or peak).
−
Width Enter the horizontal distance across the widest
portion of the pipe.
Note: If the width measurement does not equal the height
measurement, select Elliptical for the pipe shape.
Configuration and Activation
4-11
❑ Weir
−
Depth Range If the ultrasonic depth sensor is
installed upstream from the weir wall, enter the
distance from the face of the sensor to the bottom of
the channel. If the ultrasonic depth sensor is mounted
directly over the weir wall, enter the distance from the
face of the sensor to the crest of the weir.
−
Const K This field is read-only for most weir
installations, except Rectangular and Trapezoidal
weirs with Constant K values. The monitor uses the
default Constant K value to convert weir flows to CFS
(cubic feet per second) and to calculate quantity.
Entering a different Constant K value will modify the
weir equation, potentially resulting in inaccurate CFS
quantities. Therefore, please verify all manual
modifications to this value.
−
Capacity Enter the maximum capacity of the weir
based on the type of weir and any parameters applied
and/or measurements taken at the location for the
application.
−
Length Enter the total length of the wall, from one
side of the chamber to the other.
−
Height Enter the distance from the bottom of the
channel to the initial elevation on the crest wall at
which the flow will begin to traverse (or flow over)
the wall.
−
Breadth Enter the thickness of the crest wall from
the upstream edge of the weir to the downstream edge.
❑ Flume
−
Range Enter the distance from the face of the sensor
to the bottom (i.e., floor) of the flume at the
designated measurement point for the flume.
−
Width Enter the distance across the throat of the
flume.
4-12 ADS TRITON+ Manual
−
Capacity Enter the maximum capacity of the flume
based on any parameters applied and/or measurements
taken at the location for the application.
❑ Lookup
−
Height Enter the distance from the bottom of the
pipe to the crown of the pipe.
Click on the Display button to open the Lookup Table
dialog and enter the following parameters on the dialog:
Lookup Table dialog
−
Entries Enter the number of depth values you want
to display.
−
Min Depth Enter the minimum depth possible at the
monitoring point. This parameter defaults to zero and
does not require modification.
−
Max Depth Enter the maximum depth possible at the
monitoring point. This parameter defaults to the value
designated in the Height field and does not require
editing.
Configuration and Activation
−
4-13
Quantity (MGD) Enter the quantity that will
correspond to each depth on the Lookup table.
Click on the OK button to save any changes and entries
made on the Lookup Table dialog and exit the dialog.
Note: Clicking on the Reset button will set all quantities
designated in the Lookup table to 0.00. This will not
modify the values entered in the Entries, Min Depth, or
Max Depth fields. Clicking on the Cancel button will
close the Lookup Table dialog without saving any of the
modifications.
The Description field indicates the physical description for the
monitoring point based on the selected pipe/installation type,
dimensions, and other characteristics (when applicable).
3.
Enter the factor by which the monitor should multiply the peak
velocity to determine the average velocity for calculating the
flow rate in the Gain field. ADS recommends leaving the
default 0.90 setting for Gain.
4.
Enter the depth of the silt at the bottom of the pipe at the
monitoring point in the Silt field.
5.
(optional) Click on the Display button to show a simple
illustration of the pipe based on the current parameters.
6.
Assign the appropriate devices to the monitoring point, and edit
each device as necessary. Refer to Assigning and Editing
Devices on page 4-14 for more information and instructions.
7.
Enter or edit the current location’s USGS latitude and longitude
coordinates in the Latitude and Longitude fields.
8.
Select the combo sensor containing the depth sensor you want
to use for the UNIDEPTH entity from the Depth drop-down
list. ADS recommends using the default of AUTO.
9.
Select the combo sensor containing the velocity sensor you
want to use for VELOCITY entity from the Velocity dropdown list. ADS recommends using the default of AUTO.
4-14 ADS TRITON+ Manual
10. (applies only to a second monitoring point) Click on the
Monitoring Point 2 tab, and repeat steps 1 through 7.
11. Click on the Save button to store the new information and
changes to your local directory or network.
Note: Once you have finished entering and/or editing the
monitor and monitoring point, you must activate (or
reactivate) the monitor.
Assigning and Editing Devices
As part of entering the monitor and monitoring point information,
you must assign and edit the devices for each monitoring point.
Most devices should require only minimal, if any, modification to
the associated parameters.
1.
Click on the browse button located to the right of the Devices
list box.
The Available Device list box displays the devices applicable to the
TRITON+ monitor series.
TRITON+ Monitoring Point 1 - Available Devices list
Configuration and Activation
4-15
TRITON+ Monitoring Point 2 - Available Devices list
2.
Select the devices that you want to assign to Monitoring Point
1. To select multiple devices simultaneously, press and hold
down the Control (Ctrl) key while selecting the individual
devices. To choose consecutive devices in the list, select the
first device you want to assign, press and hold down the Shift
key, and then click on the last device you want to include.
Note: Do not assign two devices of the same type to the
same monitoring point. When data collection occurs,
QstartXML will overwrite the collected data from the first
device with the data from the second device of the same
type. This also will occur when collecting data using other
ADS software products. Therefore, assign only one of the
two devices (of the same type) to a single monitoring
point.
Note: The Smart Depth device represents the standard
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor on the Available Devices dialog.
However, the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor with the pressure
option is represented by the Surface Combo device in
4-16 ADS TRITON+ Manual
QstartXML. Therefore, make sure you select the proper
device when assigning the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to a
monitoring point.
3.
Click on the OK button.
4.
Select a device in the Devices box, and click on the View
button.
The device dialog displays the default or existing parameters
for the selected device.
5.
Edit the parameters for the selected device as necessary, and
then click OK on the device dialog when complete.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each additional device in the Devices
box and then click Save to store the changes to your local
directory or network.
Configuration and Activation
4-17
Refer to the following alphabetical device listing for more
information on editing devices:
Device:
See Page:
Advanced – Diagnostic
4-18
Advanced – Modem Setup
4-19
Advanced – Notification
4-22
Analog
4-24
Alarms
4-27
AV|Gated
4-29
Data Delivery
4-41
Flow
4-44
Flow Loss
4-45
Inclinometer
4-46
Long Range
4-47
Peak Combo
4-51
Sampler
4-63
Smart Depth
4-65
Surface Combo
4-70
Time Zone
4-84
XIO
4-85
4-18 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Editing the Advanced Device - Diagnostic Tab
Advanced Device – Diagnostic tab
Edit the parameters of the Diagnostic tab using the
following information:
⚫
Battery Voltage Select the frequency in which to store the
monitor battery voltage readings.
❑ Store Only at Midnight Select this option to store the
monitor’s battery voltage at midnight. This option is
selected by default and should be sufficient for most
applications.
❑ Store Every Reading Select this option to store the
monitor’s battery voltage at the monitor’s configured
sample rate.
⚫
Temperature Select the Store checkbox to store internal
temperature, TEMP, at the monitor’s configured sample rate.
Configuration and Activation
4-19
Editing the Advanced Device - Modem Setup Tab
Note: The following Modem Setup device only applies
to monitors with ADS supplied AT&T private static or
customer supplied SIM cards. Monitors using ADS
supplied AT&T public static or Verizon LTE-M SIMs
already have the identifying information necessary for
wireless communication.
Each carrier requires you to configure the monitor modem with the
appropriate APN (Access Point Name) information corresponding
to the carrier’s SIM card to ensure access to the provider’s network.
The roaming SIM cards provided by these carriers allow the
monitor to perform wireless communication through multiple carrier
networks near the monitor location. The Modem Setup device
allows you to designate the associated APN information, identify
the providers that support the SIM card and offer service in the
area, and prioritize the order in which you want the monitor to
attempt to communicate through each provider’s network. Priority
should reflect the availability, strength, reliability, and consistency
of the carrier’s signal to ensure communication.
Advanced Device - Modem Setup dialog
4-20 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Note: Customers using AT&T public static or Verizon
LTE-M SIMs do not need to perform the Modem Setup
steps. The APN host, username, and password are already
stored in the wireless monitor’s modem and configuring
this device is not necessary.
Note: Customers using ADS supplied AT&T private
static or customer supplied SIM cards must complete the
Modem Setup.
ADS strongly recommends contacting ADS customer
support for guidance and assistance before attempting to
set up this device. Failure to properly configure this
device can prohibit communication with the monitor.
Edit the Modem Setup device using the following information:
⚫
Provider Identify the host name of your ADS supplied private
static SIM or your non-ADS supplied SIM. If the host name
you want is not included on the list, use the Edit button to add a
new Provider.
⚫
Username This field is read-only and displays the username
associated with the selected Provider. This information is
given to you by your wireless SIM host to gain access to the
wireless network. If the value in this field is incorrect, change it
using the Edit button.
⚫
Password This field is read-only and displays the password
associated with the selected Provider. This information is given
to you by your wireless SIM provider to gain access to the
wireless network. If the value in this field is incorrect, change it
using the Edit button.
⚫
Authentication Select PAP for Password Authentication
Protocol in which the Username and Password are used for
communication authentication. Select CHAP for Challenge
Handshake Authentication Protocol in which a challenge string
is used for authentication. Select None in cases where the
authentication protocol is unknown or not required. This
Configuration and Activation
4-21
information will be given to you by your wireless SIM
provider. ADS recommends using the default selection, None.
⚫
Edit Select Edit to edit an existing APN or Provider.
Select the Edit button to modify or add an APN or Provider
⚫
Highlight the corresponding row and then edit the Parameters
listed at the lower portion of the screen.
⚫
Add a new VPN (SIM host) or Provider by entering the correct
Parameter information and then choosing the Add button
❑ Type Select Provider from the drop-down list. If an
existing provider requires modification, select the
appropriate provider from the Type column in the table of
available APNs and providers.
❑ Description Enter the name of the provider or edit the
existing name as necessary.
❑ Value 1 Enter or edit the wireless carrier code as
necessary. Use or maintain the following format when
entering new or editing existing information in the field:
AT+COPS=1,2,””12345””, where 12345
represents the wireless carrier code
For example, the carrier code for the provider Orange
(located in the United Kingdom) would be
AT+COPS=1,2””23433””.
❑ Value 2 (not applicable to provider information)
4-22 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Providers 2 through 7 Designate the remaining carriers in
descending order of reliability until you have indicated all of
the possible carrier options corresponding to your monitor
location.
Note: ADS reserves the Enable Debug option for
internal diagnostic use only.
Editing the Advanced Device – Notification Tab
Note: TRITON+ model 8000-FST-IM-4VZ does not
currently support the sending of emails directly from the
monitor.
TRITON+ monitors can provide alarm notifications through email
and cellular phones with text messaging (SMS) capability. The
Notification tab allows users to configure up to five (5) email and
phone numbers to receive email or SMS alerts directly from the
monitor when the following conditions arise:
⚫
Alarm events, when configured
⚫
Alarm Return-to-Normal, when configured
⚫
Daily Check-in (optional)
Text messages from the TRITON+ contain basic information
concerning the event; emails include this basic event information as
well as the last (i.e., most recent) few readings from the monitor.
Configuration and Activation
4-23
Advanced Device – Notification tab
⚫
Check-in Sends a daily notification at the configured time
and is an optional configuration. This notification includes
battery voltage and current monitor status information. If
selected, select the check-in time from the Hour drop-down.
⚫
Email Configure up to five (5) email addresses to receive the
notification.
Note: The email address in the Recipient 5 field will
receive data files in CSV format at the Normal (non-alarm
conditions) and Fast (alarm conditions) configured
directly below the Email section. To disable this feature,
select Off for both Normal and Fast rates.
4-24 ADS TRITON+ Manual
SMTP Information This section contains the outgoing SMTP
server information for the wireless provider used by the monitor,
and email address from which the email notification will be sent.
Please contact ADS to obtain this information.
⚫
SMTP Server Enter the name of the server through which the
monitor sends notification to the recipient(s).
⚫
SMTP Username Enter user name for the server through
which the monitor sends notification to the recipient(s).
⚫
SMTP Password Enter the password for the server through
which the monitor sends notification to the recipient(s).
⚫
Email Address Enter designated email address for the
monitor. The default value of
[email protected] does not need to be
changed.
SMS Enter up to five (5) phone numbers for SMS text notification.
The default Start Hour and End Hour allow each Recipient to
receive all notifications, regardless of time of occurrence. To limit
the timeframe that notifications can be sent to certain phone
numbers, select the desired Start Hour and End Hour.
⚫
Recipient 1 through 5 Enter the corresponding phone
number for each contact you want the monitor to notify when
one of the events included in the Event Strings section occurs.
Enter both the area code and the phone number for the cellular
phone (example: 2561234567).
Editing the Analog Device
Use the analog device for TRITON+ monitors to configure up to
eight 4-20mA analog channels in any combination of analog inputs
or analog outputs. Define incoming analog signals and store the
value as AI_1 through AI_8 (at the monitor's sample interval).
Define analog outputs from a list of available data entities and
output the corresponding data value to an external analog device.
Note: The analog device is a custom configuration. Please
consult ADS prior to wiring and configuring this device.
Configuration and Activation
4-25
Analog Device properties dialog
Configure the analog device for a TRITON+ using the following
information:
⚫
# Displays the channel number associated with the analog
input or output. Can be modified, if necessary.
⚫
ID Input the Modbus identification corresponding to the
external analog Modbus module. This value is typically found
in the customer's external analog module's user guide.
⚫
Input/Output Select whether the attached analog device is
for analog inputs or analog outputs.
⚫
Register Enter the Modbus register corresponding to the
external analog Modbus module. This value is typically found
in the customer's external analog module's user guide.
⚫
Style Choose the correct register size for your external analog
Modbus module.
⚫
MinRegister Enter the minimum scaling values
corresponding to the external Modbus module. This value is
typically found in the customer’s external analog module’s user
guide.
⚫
MaxRegister Enter the maximum scaling values
corresponding to the external Modbus module. This value is
typically found in the customer’s external analog module’s user
guide.
4-26 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Entity (for analog outputs) Select the monitor data entity
whose value should be output (as analog signal) to an external
analog device.
⚫
MinVariable Enter the value corresponding to the minimum
data value for the selected Entity for analog outputs or for the
minimum data value corresponding to an analog input. This
value is used for scaling the data value.
⚫
MaxVariable Enter a value corresponding to the maximum
data value for the selected Entity for analog outputs or for the
maximum data value corresponding to an analog input. This
value is used for scaling the data value.
⚫
Store (for analog inputs) Choose this checkbox to store the
corresponding analog input to the monitor memory.
Configuration and Activation
4-27
Editing the Alarms Device
This section describes the parameters of the Alarms device.
f
The Alarms device parameters
⚫
Readings to Average Select the number of consecutive Unidepth
readings you want the monitor to average to minimize the impact of
erroneous readings on the data.
⚫
Enable Select the checkbox corresponding to any alarm which should
be configured in the monitor.
⚫
Low Level Define the depth at which the monitor will trigger a Low
Level alarm to indicates that the flow depth (at the location) has fallen
4-28 ADS TRITON+ Manual
below a predefined threshold. ADS recommends entering a Low Level
depth threshold to a value below the lowest depth that typically occurs at
the location.
⚫
Full Pipe The Full Pipe alarm triggers when the depth in the manhole
is measured at greater than or equal to the pipe height (as defined in the
location’s monitoring point properties).
⚫
High Level Define the depth at which the monitor will trigger a High
Level alarm.
⚫
High High Define the depth at which the monitor will trigger a High
High alarm. The High High value must set to zero (0) when this feature
is not in use, or greater than the value entered for the High Level alarm
when in use. ADS recommends setting the High High value at least 2
inches higher than the High Level value.
⚫
Overflow This event indicates that the TRITON+ monitor’s internal
pressure sensor has detected the site is experiencing overflow conditions
where the flow is above the manhole rim. NOTE: The TRITON+
desiccant tube must be installed outside the manhole if you are going to
use the Overflow Alarm.
⚫
Battery Low Define the voltage at which the monitor will trigger a
battery low alarm. ADS recommends using the default value.
Configuration and Activation
4-29
Editing the AV|Gated Sensor
This section describes the parameters for the AV|Gated device.
Edit the AV|Gated 1 parameters showing the Ultrasonic tab
Edit the Device Parameters located at the bottom of the dialog, and
then edit the individual tabs as described in the following sections.
⚫
Physical Offset The Physical Offset for the AV|Gated
sensor should always be 0.00 as the sensor should always be
installed at the bottom center of the pipe.
⚫
Channel Select the channel number of the port on top of the
monitor to which the device is physically connected.
4-30 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Pipe Height This field displays the pipe height at the
monitoring point, based on the installation table. This
parameter is not editable from this location.
Note: Under normal conditions, the remaining parameters
corresponding to the AV|Gated device should not require
modification. However, if additional adjustments are
necessary, the following sections provide a detailed
description of each parameter.
Ultrasonic tab – AV|Gated
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the upward-looking
ultrasonic depth sensor in the AV|Gated sensor:
⚫
Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking upward ultrasonic depth readings at the designated
interval upon activation. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Flow Type Select the option that best reflects the kind of
flow conditions that typically occur at the monitoring point
from the drop-down list:
❑ Typical Flow exhibits a typical diurnal pattern. This is
the default setting.
❑ Wet/Stagnant Flow remains in the pipe, but moves only
during wet weather events.
❑ Usually Dry Pipe typically remains dry, except under
wet weather conditions.
❑ Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the depth sensor readings and the manually measured depth.
The default value is 0.
❑ Deadband Select the distance from the sensor face within
which readings received will be ignored. The default value
(Auto) represents a percentage of the flow depth and should be
sufficient under normal circumstances. It also is the best option
for handling shallow flows. However, consider another value
when the sensor readings reveal a potential problem with false
drop-outs. Choose a value for the deadband that is sufficiently
Configuration and Activation
4-31
below the minimum depths that legitimately occur at the
monitoring point, yet above the confirmed drop-outs that have
been detected.
❑ Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the depth data to memory. This option is selected by default.
❑ Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
❑ DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
4-32 ADS TRITON+ Manual
❑ Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or
transmitted from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically
require weaker (quieter) amplification; larger pipes
typically require stronger (louder) amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of
full amplification at which to transmit the signal.
Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where
100 percent represents maximum amplification.
Configuration and Activation
4-33
Pressure tab – AV|Gated
Edit AV|Gated 1 dialog displaying the Pressure tab
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the pressure depth
sensor in the AV|Gated sensor:
⚫
Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking pressure depth readings at the designated interval once
activated. This option is selected by default.
4-34 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the pressure depth sensor readings and the manually measured
depth. The default value is 0.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
pressure depth data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
⚫
Automatic Calibration Select this checkbox to ensure the
monitor automatically calibrates questionable or erroneous
pressure depth data to read consistently with the ultrasonic
depth data. The monitor will maintain a running average of the
difference between the pressure depth and the ultrasonic depth
data throughout the day. At midnight each day, the monitor
applies a new offset based on the most recent difference in the
running average.
Configuration and Activation
4-35
Velocity tab – AV|Gated
Edit AV|Gated 1 dialog displaying the Velocity tab
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the Doppler velocity
sensor in the AV|Gated sensor:
Note: The velocity parameters corresponding to the
AV|Gated sensor typically should not require editing.
However, if modifications are necessary, ADS does not
recommend making changes to these parameters without
proper training or assistance.
4-36 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking velocity readings at the designated interval once
activated. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Flow Type Select the option that best reflects the kind of
flow conditions that typically occur at the monitoring point
from the drop-down list:
❑ Typical Flow exhibits a typical diurnal pattern. This is
the default setting.
❑ Wet/Stagnant Flow remains in the pipe, but moves only
during wet weather events.
❑ Usually Dry Pipe typically remains dry, except under
wet weather conditions.
⚫
Velocity Direction Select one of the following options that
reflects the general direction of the flow at the monitoring point
and position of the velocity sensor. The default is Forward.
❑ Bidirectional Choose this option for monitoring points
that potentially experience reverse flows. The AV|Gated
sensor typically is positioned facing upstream into the
flow. Choosing this ensures the monitor analyzes both
positive and negative values returned from the velocity
sensor.
❑ Forward Choose this option for monitoring points where
reverse flows are not expected and to ensure the monitor
only analyzes positive values returned from the velocity
sensor. The AV|Gated sensor is typically positioned facing
upstream into the flow. This is the most common, and the
default, option for selection. ADS recommends using this
setting for most monitoring applications. Forward is the
default selection for Velocity Direction.
❑ Backward The AV|Gated sensor does not currently
support a backward install.
❑ Backward Bidirectional The AV|Gated sensor does
not currently support a backward install.
Configuration and Activation
4-37
⚫
Minimum Velocity Select the minimum expected velocity
that may occur at the site for the monitor to use in fine-tuning
the velocity data. The default setting is 0.05 and should be used
in most instances. The monitor compares the Minimum
Velocity value to the actual velocity readings before storing to
the monitor memory. Any actual velocity reading falling within
a plus or minus range of zero using the Minimum Velocity
value will be set to zero. For example, using a Minimum
Velocity of 0.05, and getting an actual velocity reading of -0.03
causes the monitor to store a velocity reading of 0. Using a
Minimum Velocity of 0.05 and getting an actual velocity
reading of 0.06 causes the monitor to store a 0.06 velocity
reading.
⚫
Maximum Velocity Select the maximum expected velocity
that will occur at the site for the monitor to use in fine-tuning
the velocity data. The default setting is Auto, which serves to
optimize the range and resolution of the velocity data samples
to match the characteristics of the flow.
⚫
Data Acquisition Select the length of time to allow the
monitor to get a velocity reading. The default of Auto should
be used in most instances. Use Low to shorten the length of
time, or use Medium or High to increase the amount of time.
Using Medium or High results in smoother velocity data but
also requires extra battery consumption.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the velocity data to memory. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Enable Scrubbing Select this checkbox to ensure the
monitor confirms questionable or erroneous velocity readings
based on the historical relationship between the ultrasonic
depth and velocity data for the location.
⚫
Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
4-38 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
❑ DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
❑ Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or
transmitted from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically
require weaker (quieter) amplification; larger pipes
typically require stronger (louder) amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
Configuration and Activation
−
4-39
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of
full amplification at which to transmit the signal.
Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where
100 percent represents maximum amplification.
Temperature tab – AV|Gated
The temperature sensor measures the temperature of the flow at the
location at which the sensor is installed. The temperature is logged
at the same interval as the other entity data. The AV|Gated sensor
uses temperature data to calculate the speed of sound in water.
Edit AV|Gated 1 dialog displaying the Temperature tab
4-40 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the temperature
sensor in the AV|Gated sensor:
⚫
Sensor Select the source from which to measure the
temperature used when compensating for temperature in Peak
Combo Sensor readings. The channels correspond to the
sensors connected to those channels (ports) on the monitor.
The option selected here should be consistent with the option
selected for the Channel in the Device Parameters section at
the bottom of the dialog.
Note: The stored temperature value is the actual water
temperature reading from the AV|Gated sensor.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the temperature data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
Configuration and Activation
4-41
Editing the Data Delivery Device
The Data Delivery device enables the monitor to upload flow data
stored in the monitor memory to an ADS hosted system database or
to an FTP site at a user-designated interval. To upload the data to
an FTP site, you must know the address of the FTP site, the folder
at the FTP site in which you want the monitor to place the data, and
the username and password the monitor must use to access the site.
Edit the Data Delivery device
Edit the data delivery device in the following way:
FlowView
⚫
Server Enter IP address 13.82.147.226 to deliver data to the
ADS database at the user selected intervals.
4-42 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Normal Select the data delivery rate for non-alarm conditions
⚫
Fast Select the data delivery rate to use to deliver data to the
ADS database when alarm conditions exist at the monitor. Data
delivery will continue at this interval until the alarm conditions
return to normal.
FTP Setup 1/ FTP Setup 2
⚫
Mode Select either Active or Passive to configure the manner
of communication with the FTP site. Passive is the
recommended selection.
⚫
Normal Select the rate at which you want the monitor to
upload data to the selected destination during non-alarm
conditions. Determine the appropriate interval based on the
sample rate for the monitor and the number of entities for
which the monitor records data. A faster sample rate and/or a
greater number of entities may require a more frequent interval
for data delivery.
•
Fast Select the interval at which you want the monitor to
upload data to the selected FTP destination while under alarm
conditions.
⚫
Server Enter the IP address or URL of the FTP site to which
you want the monitor to send the data.
⚫
Folder (optional) Enter the name of the folder at the FTP
site to which you want the monitor to upload the data. If this
field is left blank, files will be delivered to the root folder.
Note: QstartXML does not create a folder automatically.
Therefore, if you want the monitor to deliver the data to a
specific folder, you must create the folder through the FTP
site manually before the monitor begins uploading data to
the site. For successful data delivery, folder names on the
FTP server cannot have spaces within the name. For
example, My_Folder will work and My Folder will not.
⚫
Username Enter the username through which the monitor
can access the FTP site.
Configuration and Activation
⚫
4-43
Password Enter the password through which the monitor can
access the FTP site.
Note: The Username and Password must contain 20
characters or less. Characters beyond this limit will be
truncated and result in Data Delivery failure.
⚫
CSV Format Select the desired format of the data delivery
file. ADS format will show all available entities. GE format
will group readings and their corresponding quality values in
rows rather than displaying all stored values in column format.
4-44 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Editing the Flow Device
Configure the following parameters when you want the monitor to
calculate and record flow rate so that it is included when you collect
the data from the monitor.
Edit Flow Device Properties dialog
Edit the Flow device in the following way:
⚫
Flow Type Select the method trough which you want the
monitor to calculate flow rate based on depth and velocity or
depth only data from this drop-down list. Available options
include QContinuity, QWeir, QFlume, QLookup, or QManning
dependent upon the pipe installation selected and the
parameters entered.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor stores
the flow data to memory. This option is selected by default.
Configuration and Activation
4-45
Editing the Flow Loss Device
Use the following information to configure the Flow
Loss device for TRITON+ Flow Loss alarms.
Editing the Flow Loss device
Edit the parameters of the Flow Loss device in the following way:
⚫
Type Choose type of flow loss (flow or depth) alarm you want
to configure for the TRITON+. Select Flow (default0 to trigger
an alarm based on a flow rate calculated by the monitor. An
alarm is triggered if the flow rate falls below the threshold for
typical flow rates. Select Depth to trigger an alarm based on
flow depths. An alarm is triggered if the flow depth level
measured by the monitor falls below the threshold of typical
depth levels.
⚫
Percentage Choose the percentage of the average daily flow
rates or depths you want to set as the threshold for the flow rate
4-46 ADS TRITON+ Manual
or depth alarm. If the measured values are above this threshold
percentage, then the monitor will trigger the alarm. Choose
between 20 and 80 percent (default is 25).
⚫
Sensitivity Choose between Low, Medium, or High to
determine the sensitivity to which the TRITON+ should trigger
the Flow Loss alarm. ADS recommends leaving this setting to
the default of Medium. Choosing Low has the lowest potential
to trigger false Flow Loss alarms, but there is more of a
potential to miss an actual alarm. Conversely, choosing High
has a higher potential to trigger false Flow Loss alarms, but the
least potential to miss an actual alarm.
⚫
Clear Pattern History Choose this checkbox to clear (at
activation) the historical flow or depth pattern in the monitor
and recreate a new flow or depth pattern history.
Editing the Inclinometer Device
Edit the parameters of the Inclinometer device using the following
information.
Edit the parameters of the Inclinometer device
Configuration and Activation
4-47
⚫
Store Data Choose this checkbox when you want to store
data from the Inclinometer device attached to the monitor.
(Selected by default.)
⚫
Threshold Enter the degrees which will trigger a Tilt alarm
for the TRITON+ monitor. This value defaults to 5.
Editing the Long Range Device
This section describes the parameters for the Long Range Depth
device.
[location name] Long Range dialog
4-48 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Edit the parameters in the following way:
•
Manhole Depth Distance (in inches or millimeters) from the
manhole rim to the center of the invert. Reference Chapter 3 for
more detailed instructions on how to take this measurement.
•
Physical Offset Distance (in inches or millimeters) from the
manhole rim to the bottom of the Long Range Depth sensor.
Reference Chapter 3 for more detailed instructions on how to
take this measurement.
•
Channel Select the channel number of the port on the top of
the monitor to which the sensor device is connected.
•
Electronic Offset (optional) Enter the difference that exists
between the Long Range Depth readings and manually
measured depth within the invert. The default value is 0.
•
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs to
depth data to memory. This option is selected by default.
•
Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Note: Modifications to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings in place.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Configuration and Activation
4-49
•
Blanking helps prevent pops in installations where there are
problems with the sensor reading near-ranges (nearly full manhole
depths). Leaving Blanking at the default value of 0.00 allows the
monitor to use a built-in function of the manhole depth. A Blanking
value other than 0.00 represents the distance (in inches or
millimeters) from the face of the sensor which will be used to
calculate those ranges the monitor should ignore while the sensor is
firing. For example, choosing a value of 10 will cause all ranges
measured within ten inches (254 millimeters) from the face of the
sensor to be ignored.
•
Temperature Choose the method for computing the air
temperature in the manhole as it relates to sensor signal. ADS
recommends leaving this at the default Compensated setting.
❑ Compensated Select this option to use a normalized
temperature setting to approximate the difference between
the top and bottom of the manhole. This setting is the
default setting and is sufficient in most cases.
❑ Sensor Select this setting in cases where the temperature
is uniform throughout the manhole.
❑ Targeted Select this setting in cases where ADS
temperature targets are in place such that the temperature
can be calculated based on known distances. This option
is not implemented at this time.
•
Power Choose the level of power supplied to the sensor:
❑ Auto Select this option to allow the monitor firmware to
determine the amount of power supplied to the sensor. This
option is a function of the total range (manhole depth).
ADS recommends using the default of Auto. This option is
selected by default.
❑ 1 to 11 Select 1 for the lowest power setting, which would
be most useful in short range installations with no
interference. Select 11 for the highest power setting, which
4-50 ADS TRITON+® Manual
would be most useful in long range installations with
interference.
•
Gain Control Choose the method for managing the amplification
of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
❑ Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
(Recommended)
❑ Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value between 12db (lower amplification) and +12db (higher
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
•
Capacitance
❑ Disable Select this checkbox to disable the Submersion
sensor which detects submersion when fully covered with
liquid.
Note: Disabling the Submersion sensor will also disable
SUBMERGED alarms.
❑ Log Select this checkbox to store the Submersion sensor
readings (Capacitance) to monitor memory.
Configuration and Activation
4-51
Editing the Peak Combo Device
This section describes the parameters for the Peak Combo device.
Edit Peak Combo 1 Parameters dialog showing the Ultrasonic tab
4-52 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Edit the Device Parameters located at the bottom of the dialog, and
then edit the individual tabs as described in the following sections.
⚫
Physical Offset Enter the measured physical offset for the
sensor at the time of installation if it was installed offset from
the bottom center of the pipe. Refer to Chapter 3, Sensor
Installation and Connection, for instructions on measuring the
physical offset. The default physical offset is 0.
⚫
Channel Select the channel number of the port on top of the
monitor to which the device is physically connected.
⚫
Pipe Height This field displays the pipe height at the
monitoring point, based on the installation table. This
parameter is not editable from this location.
Note: Under normal conditions, the remaining parameters
corresponding to the Peak Combo device should not
require modification. However, if additional adjustments
are necessary, the following sections provide a detailed
description of each parameter.
Ultrasonic tab - Peak Combo
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the upward-looking
ultrasonic depth sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor:
⚫
Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking upward ultrasonic depth readings at the designated
interval upon activation. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Flow Type Select the option that best reflects the kind of
flow conditions that typically occur at the monitoring point
from the drop-down list:
❑ Typical Flow exhibits a typical diurnal pattern. This is
the default setting.
❑ Wet/Stagnant Flow remains in the pipe, but moves only
during wet weather events.
❑ Usually Dry Pipe typically remains dry, except under
wet weather conditions.
Configuration and Activation
4-53
❑ Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the depth sensor readings and the manually measured depth.
The default value is 0.
❑ Deadband Select the distance from the sensor face within
which readings received will be ignored. The default value
(Auto) represents a percentage of the flow depth and should be
sufficient under normal circumstances. It also is the best option
for handling shallow flows. However, consider another value
when the sensor readings reveal a potential problem with false
drop-outs. Choose a value for the deadband that is sufficiently
below the minimum depths that legitimately occur at the
monitoring point, yet above the confirmed drop-outs that have
been detected.
❑ Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the depth data to memory. This option is selected by default.
❑ Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
4-54 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
❑ DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
❑ Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or
transmitted from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically
require weaker (quieter) amplification; larger pipes
typically require stronger (louder) amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of
full amplification at which to transmit the signal.
Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where
100 percent represents maximum amplification.
Configuration and Activation
4-55
Pressure tab – Peak Combo
Edit Peak Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Pressure tab
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the pressure depth
sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor:
⚫
Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking pressure depth readings at the designated interval once
activated. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the pressure depth sensor readings and the manually measured
depth. The default value is 0.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
pressure depth data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
4-56 ADS TRITON+® Manual
⚫
Automatic Calibration Select this checkbox to ensure the
monitor automatically calibrates questionable or erroneous
pressure depth data to read consistently with the ultrasonic
depth data. The monitor will maintain a running average of the
difference between the pressure depth and the ultrasonic depth
data throughout the day. At midnight each day, the monitor will
apply a new offset based on the most recent difference in the
running average.
Configuration and Activation
4-57
Velocity tab – Peak Combo
Edit Peak Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Velocity tab
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the Doppler velocity
sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor:
Note: The velocity parameters corresponding to the Peak
Combo Sensor typically should not require editing.
However, if modifications are necessary, ADS does not
recommend making changes to these parameters without
proper training or assistance.
4-58 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Note: When using a Peak Combo Sensor and Surface
Combo Sensor at the same monitoring point, ADS
recommends maintaining the same settings for all of the
parameters corresponding to both Peak Velocity (Velocity
tab on the Edit Peak Combo Parameters dialog) and
Surcharge Peak Velocity (Peak Velocity tab in the Edit
Surface Combo Parameters dialog) to ensure consistency
between the velocity readings.
⚫
Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking velocity readings at the designated interval once
activated. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Flow Type Select the option that best reflects the kind of
flow conditions that typically occur at the monitoring point
from the drop-down list:
❑ Typical Flow exhibits a typical diurnal pattern. This is
the default setting.
❑ Wet/Stagnant Flow remains in the pipe, but moves only
during wet weather events.
❑ Usually Dry Pipe typically remains dry, except under
wet weather conditions.
⚫
Sensitivity Select the appropriate velocity sensor sensitivity
from the drop-down list. A sensitivity that is too high may
produce noise, causing interference in the signal and resulting
in spikes in the data. A sensitivity that is too low can produce
readings that are low in comparison with confirmation readings.
The default sensitivity is 10.
⚫
Velocity Direction Select one of the following options that
reflects the general direction of the flow at the monitoring point
and position of the velocity sensor. The default is Forward.
⚫
Bidirectional Choose this option for monitoring points that
potentially experience reverse flows. The Peak Combo Sensor
typically is positioned facing upstream into the flow. Choosing
this ensures the monitor analyzes both positive and negative
values returned from the velocity sensor.
Configuration and Activation
4-59
❑ Forward Choose this option for monitoring points where
reverse flows are not expected and to ensure the monitor
only analyzes positive values returned from the velocity
sensor. The Peak Combo Sensor typically is positioned
facing upstream into the flow. This is the most common,
and the default, option for selection. ADS recommends
using this setting for most monitoring applications.
Forward is the default selection for Velocity Direction.
❑ Backward Choose this option for monitoring points at
which the Peak Combo Sensor has been positioned facing
downstream and to ensure the monitor only analyzes flows
moving away from the face of the sensor. One application
in which this would be the preferable option would be for
measuring velocity in an outgoing line following two
incoming lines in the manhole.
❑ Backward Bidirectional Choose this option when the
Peak Combo Sensor is installed facing downstream and to
ensure the monitor analyzes flows moving both away from
and toward the face of the sensor. This option would be
beneficial, for example, when using a weir to measure
overflows with the potential of river intrusion.
⚫
Maximum Velocity Select the maximum expected velocity
that will occur at the site for the monitor to use in fine-tuning
the velocity data. The default setting is Auto, which serves to
optimize the range and resolution of the velocity data samples
to match the characteristics of the flow. However, if the
velocity readings at the location measure at least 10 feet per
second (fps) on a regular basis, ADS recommends choosing the
15 fps option for this parameter. If the location is downstream
from a pump station and displays rapid changes in velocity
from reading to reading, ADS also recommends changing the
Maximum Velocity setting from Auto to a setting slightly
above the maximum recorded velocity.
⚫
Transmit Frequency Select the frequency at which to
transmit the signal. ADS recommends leaving the default
setting (High) selected.
4-60 ADS TRITON+® Manual
⚫
Gain This value represents the factor applied to raw velocity
(RAWVEL entity in QstartXML) to determine average velocity
and to calculate quantity for the Flow 1(2) device. QstartXML
does not apply Gain to the velocity readings reported in
Diagnostics, where the raw velocity readings are used for
comparison against the manual measurements.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the velocity data to memory. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Enable Scrubbing Select this checkbox to ensure the
monitor confirms questionable or erroneous velocity readings
based on the historical relationship between the ultrasonic
depth and velocity data for the location.
⚫
Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
❑ DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
Configuration and Activation
4-61
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
❑ Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or
transmitted from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically
require weaker (quieter) amplification; larger pipes
typically require stronger (louder) amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of
full amplification at which to transmit the signal.
Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where
100 percent represents maximum amplification.
Temperature tab – Peak Combo
The temperature sensor measures the temperature of the flow at the
location at which the sensor is installed. The temperature is logged
at the same interval as the other entity data. The Peak Combo
Sensor uses temperature data to calculate the speed of sound in
water.
4-62 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Edit Peak Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Temperature tab
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the temperature
sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor:
⚫
Sensor Select the source from which to measure the
temperature used when compensating for temperature in Peak
Combo Sensor readings. The channels correspond to the
sensors connected to those channels (ports) on the monitor.
The option selected here should be consistent with the option
selected for the Channel in the Device Parameters section at
the bottom of the dialog.
Note: The stored temperature value is the actual water
temperature reading from the Peak Combo Sensor.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the temperature data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
Configuration and Activation
Editing the Sampler Device
Use the following information when you want to edit the parameters for
water quality sampling activities associated with a TRITON+.
Edit the Sampler device
Note: When performing water quality sampling using externally
powered TRITON+ monitors, you must configure one of the analog
output devices on the XIO device dialog with the appropriate entity
for the sampling application through QstartXML and connect the XIO
directly to the sampler.
⚫
Type Select the triggering method you want to use to initiate
sampling operations from Depth, Flow Rate, or Flow
Total. Trigger values are based on readings returned from the
4-63
4-64 ADS TRITON+® Manual
selected sensors in the Combo Sensor to Use section of the MLI
device. Choose Depth to initiate sampling based on UNIDEPTH
readings from the selected depth combo sensor. Flow Rate and
Flow Total are instantaneous calculations based on the selected
depth and velocity sensors in the Combo Sensor to Use.
⚫
Trigger Enter the sampling trigger threshold corresponding to the
selected Type for which you want the sampler activities to
initiate. For example, if Depth is the selected Type, enter the
corresponding threshold value in inches (or millimeters) at which
you want the monitor to pulse the sampler.
⚫
Samples per wakeup Select and enter or use the up/down arrows
to indicate the total, consecutive number of times you want the
monitor to pulse the sampler within a single interval each time the
trigger condition is met.
⚫
Pulse Length Enter the duration of the pulse you want to send to
the sampler once sampling activities begin.
Configuration and Activation
4-65
Editing the Smart Depth Device
Use the following information to edit the parameters of the Smart
Depth device.
Edit Smart Depth 1 Parameters dialog
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the downwardlooking ultrasonic (smart) depth sensor as necessary:
Note: Edit the parameters for an Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
equipped with the pressure option through the Surface
4-66 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Combo Sensor device. Refer to page 4-63 for more
information.
Parameters
Note: Under normal conditions, the parameters in this
section (Parameters) should not require modification.
However, if additional adjustments are necessary, refer to
the detailed description of each parameter.
⚫
Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the smart depth sensor readings and the manually measured
depth, when applicable. The default value is 0.
Note: An electronic offset is rarely needed. An offset
greater than +/- 0.5 inches (13 mm) typically indicates that
the physical offset or pipe height has been measured or
recorded incorrectly.
⚫
Mode Select the mode in which you want the smart depth
sensor to operate based on environmental factors or site
constraints. ADS recommends using the Normal setting for
pipe heights ranging from 6 to 24 inches (15 to 61 cm) and
High for pipe heights greater than 24 inches (61 cm) under
most conditions. However, if erratic Smart Depth readings
occur, consider changing the Power setting.
⚫
Blanking Select the distance from the horizontal face of the
ultrasonic depth sensor within which to ignore data potentially
representing erroneous readings. Select the Auto option
(default) to ensure the monitor disregards depths occurring
within a distance from the horizontal face of the sensor
equivalent to 5 percent of the range from the sensor face to the
bottom of the pipe. This option represents most pipe/flow
conditions; therefore, ADS strongly recommends leaving this
option selected for most applications. Choose one of the other
options only when spikes in the data are occurring beyond 5
percent of this range and under direct consultation with an
ADS representative.
Configuration and Activation
4-67
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the smart depth data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
⚫
Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
❑ DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
4-68 ADS TRITON+® Manual
❑ Surcharge Detection Select the Disable checkbox to
prevent the monitor from implementing the Surcharge
Detection function when processing smart depth data. For
locations that typically do not experience surcharges,
disabling Surcharge Detection eliminates the processing
time required for this function and, as a result, conserves
monitor power.
Sensor
⚫
Physical Offset Enter the physical distance from the face of the
sensor to the crown (top) of the pipe. Refer to Chapter 3, Sensor
Installation and Connection, for instructions on measuring the physical
offset. The default offset is 1.25 inches (31.8 mm).
⚫
Pipe Height This field displays the pipe height at the monitor location,
based on the installation table. This parameter is not editable from this
location.
⚫
Channel Select the channel number of the port on top of the monitor
to which this device is connected.
Temperature
The temperature sensor measures the air temperature in the pipe to
apply when calculating the speed of sound in air.
Note: Under normal conditions, the parameters in the
Temperature section should not require modification.
However, if additional adjustments are necessary, refer to
the detailed description of each parameter.
⚫
Sensor Select the source from which to measure the
temperature used when compensating for temperature in
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor readings. The channels correspond to
the sensors connected to those channels (i.e., ports) on the
monitor. The option selected here should be consistent with the
option selected for the Channel in the Sensor section to the
left of the Temperature section.
Note: The stored temperature value is the actual air
temperature reading from the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor.
Configuration and Activation
⚫
4-69
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the temperature data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
4-70 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Editing the Surface Combo Sensor Device
The following section provides descriptions for the parameters
corresponding to the Surface Combo Sensor device.
Edit Surface Combo 1 Parameters dialog (Smart Depth tab)
Edit the following Device Parameters at the bottom of the dialog,
and then edit the individual tabs as described in the following
sections:
Configuration and Activation
4-71
⚫
Physical Offset Enter the physical distance from the face of
the sensor to the crown (top) of the pipe. Refer to Chapter 3,
Sensor Installation and Connection, for instructions on
measuring the physical offset.
⚫
Channel Select the channel number of the port on top of the
monitor to which this device is connected.
⚫
Pipe Height This field displays the pipe height at the monitor
location, based on the installation table. This parameter is not
editable from this location.
Note: Under normal conditions, the remaining parameters
corresponding to the Surface Combo device should not
require modification. However, if additional adjustments
are necessary, the following sections provide a detailed
description of each parameter.
Smart Depth (Ultrasonic) tab – Surface Combo
The smart depth sensor measures the distance (or range) from the
crown of the pipe to the surface of the flow.
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the downwardlooking ultrasonic (smart) depth sensor in the Surface Combo
Sensor:
⚫
Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the smart depth sensor readings and the manually measured
depth, when applicable. The default value is 0.
Note: An electronic offset is rarely needed. An offset
greater than +/- 0.5 inches (13 mm) typically indicates that
the physical offset or pipe height has been measured or
recorded incorrectly.
⚫
Mode Select the mode in which you want the smart depth
sensor to operate based on environmental factors or site
constraints. ADS recommends using the Normal setting for
pipe heights ranging from 6 to 24 inches (15 to 61 cm) and
High for pipe heights greater than 24 inches (61 cm) under
4-72 ADS TRITON+® Manual
most conditions. However, if erratic Smart Depth readings
occur, consider changing the Power setting.
⚫
Blanking Select the distance from the horizontal face of the
Surface Combo Sensor within which to ignore data potentially
representing erroneous readings. Select the Auto option
(default) to ensure the monitor disregards depths occurring
within a distance from the horizontal face of the sensor
equivalent to 5 percent of the range from the sensor face to the
bottom of the pipe. This option typically represents the vast
majority of pipe/flow conditions; therefore, ADS strongly
recommends leaving this option selected for most applications.
Choose one of the other options only when spikes in the data
are occurring beyond 5 percent of this range and under direct
consultation with an ADS representative.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the smart depth data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
⚫
Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Configuration and Activation
4-73
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
❑ DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
❑ Surcharge Detection Select the Disable checkbox to
prevent the monitor from implementing the Surcharge
Detection function when processing smart depth data. For
locations that typically do not experience surcharges,
disabling Surcharge Detection eliminates the processing
time required for this function and, as a result, conserves
monitor power.
4-74 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Surface Velocity tab – Surface Combo
[location name] - Surface Combo dialog displaying Surface Velocity tab
Edit the parameters corresponding to the surface velocity sensor in
the Surface Combo Sensor.
⚫
Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking velocity readings at the designated interval once
activated. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Transmit Frequency Select the frequency at which to
transmit the signal. ADS recommends leaving the default
setting (Low) for most applications. However, if hydraulic
conditions at the site are resulting in questionable or erroneous
readings, consider applying one of the other frequency options.
Contact ADS for assistance when necessary.
Configuration and Activation
4-75
⚫
Sensitivity Select the appropriate velocity sensor sensitivity
from the drop-down list. A sensitivity that is too high may
produce noise, causing interference in the signal and resulting
in spikes in the data. A sensitivity that is too low can produce
readings that are low in comparison with confirmation readings.
The default sensitivity is 12.
⚫
Velocity Direction Select one of the following options that
reflects the general direction of the flow at the monitoring point
and position of the velocity sensor. The default is Forward.
❑ Forward Choose this option for monitoring points where
reverse flows are not expected and to ensure the monitor
only analyzes positive values returned from the velocity
sensor. The Surface Combo Sensor typically is positioned
facing upstream toward the oncoming flow. This is the
most common option for selection. ADS recommends
using this setting for most monitoring applications. It also
requires less processing time and conserves power.
❑ Backward Choose this option for monitoring points at
which the Surface Combo Sensor has been positioned
facing downstream and to ensure the monitor only analyzes
flows moving away from the face of the sensor. One
application in which this would be the preferable option
would be for measuring velocity in an outgoing line
following two incoming lines in the manhole.
⚫
Maximum Velocity Select the maximum expected velocity
that will occur at the site for the monitor to use in fine-tuning
the velocity data. The Auto option serves to optimize the range
and resolution of the velocity data samples to match the
characteristics of the flow. The default setting is 10 fps.
⚫
Duration Select the amount of time for the sensor to transmit
and receive the velocity signal based on the noise present at the
monitoring point. Most sites require only a one (1) second
(default) interval. However, sites that experience elevated
noise levels or velocity dropouts to zero require a longer
interval (2).
4-76 ADS TRITON+® Manual
⚫
Gain This value represents the factor applied to raw velocity
(RAWVEL entity in QstartXML) to determine average velocity
and to calculate quantity for the Flow 1(2) device. QstartXML
does not apply the Gain to the velocity readings reported in
Diagnostics, where the raw velocity readings are used for
comparison against the manual measurements.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the velocity data to memory. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Enable Scrubbing Select this checkbox to ensure the
monitor confirms questionable or erroneous velocity readings
based on the historical relationship between the depth and
velocity data for the location.
⚫
Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
❑ DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
Configuration and Activation
4-77
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
❑ Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or
transmitted from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically
require weaker (quieter) amplification; larger pipes
typically require stronger (louder) amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of
full amplification at which to transmit the signal.
Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where
100 percent represents maximum amplification.
4-78 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Peak Velocity tab – Surface Combo
Edit Surface Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Peak Velocity tab
Edit the parameters corresponding to the (surcharge) peak velocity
sensor in the Surface Combo Sensor in the following way:
Configuration and Activation
4-79
Note: When using a Peak Combo Sensor and Surface
Combo Sensor at the same monitoring point, ADS
recommends maintaining the same settings for all of the
parameters corresponding to both Peak Velocity (Velocity
tab on the Edit Peak Combo Parameters dialog) and
Surcharge Peak Velocity (Peak Velocity tab in the Edit
Surface Combo Parameters dialog) to ensure consistency
between the velocity readings. However, you may
consider disabling this sensor when both are present to
conserve battery life, monitor memory, and data collection
time.
⚫
Enable Select this checkbox to enable the parameters for
modification and to ensure the monitor begins taking velocity
readings at the designated interval once activated. This option
is selected by default.
⚫
Sensitivity Select the appropriate velocity sensor sensitivity
from the drop-down list. A sensitivity that is too high may
produce noise, causing interference in the signal and resulting
in spikes in the data. A sensitivity that is too low can produce
readings that are low in comparison with confirmation readings.
The default sensitivity is 10.
⚫
Velocity Direction Select one of the following options that
reflects the general direction of the flow at the monitoring point
and position of the velocity sensor. The default is Forward.
❑ Bidirectional Choose this option for monitoring points
that potentially experience reverse flows. The Surface
Combo Sensor typically is positioned facing upstream
toward the oncoming flow. Choosing this ensures the
monitor analyzes both positive and negative values
returned from the velocity sensor.
❑ Forward Choose this option for monitoring points where
reverse flows are not expected and to ensure the monitor
only analyzes positive values returned from the velocity
sensor. The Surface Combo Sensor typically is positioned
facing upstream toward the oncoming flow. This is the
4-80 ADS TRITON+® Manual
most common option for selection. ADS recommends
using this setting for most monitoring applications.
❑ Backward Choose this option for monitoring points at
which the Surface Combo Sensor has been positioned
facing downstream and to ensure the monitor only analyzes
flows moving away from the face of the sensor. One
application in which this would be the preferable option
would be for measuring velocity in an outgoing line
following two incoming lines in the manhole.
❑ Backward Bidirectional Choose this option when the
Surface Combo Sensor is installed facing downstream and
to ensure the monitor analyzes flows moving both away
from and toward the face of the sensor. This option would
be beneficial, for example, when using a weir to measure
overflows with the potential of river intrusion.
⚫
Maximum Velocity Select the maximum expected velocity
that will occur at the site for the monitor to use in fine-tuning
the velocity data. The Auto (default) option serves to optimize
the range and resolution of the velocity data samples to match
the characteristics of the flow. However, if the velocity
readings at the location measure at least 10 feet per second
(fps) on a regular basis, ADS recommends choosing the 15 fps
option for this parameter.
⚫
Transmit Frequency Select the frequency at which to
transmit the signal. ADS recommends leaving the default
setting (Normal) for most applications. However, if hydraulic
conditions at the site are resulting in questionable or erroneous
readings, consider applying the other frequency option.
Contact ADS for assistance when necessary.
⚫
Gain This value represents the factor applied to raw velocity
(RAWVEL entity in QstartXML) to determine average velocity
and to calculate quantity for the Flow 1(2) device.
⚫
Enable Scrubbing Select this checkbox to ensure the
monitor confirms questionable or erroneous velocity readings
based on the historical relationship between the ultrasonic
depth and velocity data for the location.
Configuration and Activation
4-81
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the velocity data to memory. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
❑ DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the amplification of
the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to automatically
optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value between 12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high amplification) at
which to amplify the signal.
❑ Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or transmitted
from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically require weaker (quieter)
amplification; larger pipes typically require stronger (louder)
amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to automatically
optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of full
amplification at which to transmit the signal. Enter a
4-82 ADS TRITON+® Manual
percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where 100 percent
represents maximum amplification.
Pressure tab – Surface Combo
The pressure sensor measures the height of the water above the
sensor (mounted at the crown of the pipe) under surcharge
conditions where the flow has completely filled the pipe and is
rising in the manhole.
Edit Surface Combo 1 dialog displaying the Pressure tab
Configuration and Activation
4-83
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the pressure depth
sensor in the Surface Combo Sensor:
⚫
Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking pressure depth readings at the designated interval once
activated. This option is selected by default.
⚫
Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the pressure depth readings and the value equal to the pipe
height minus the physical offset of the Surface Combo Sensor.
However, ADS recommends leaving this value at zero.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
pressure depth data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
⚫
Automatic Calibration Select this checkbox to ensure the
monitor automatically calibrates questionable or erroneous
pressure depth data to read consistently with the ultrasonic
depth data. The monitor will maintain a running average of the
difference between the pressure depth and the ultrasonic depth
data throughout the day. At midnight each day, the monitor
applies a new offset based on the most recent difference in the
running average.
Temperature tab – Surface Combo
Edit the parameters corresponding to the temperature sensor in the
Surface Combo Sensor in the same way in which you edited the
parameters for the temperature sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor.
Refer to the parameter descriptions and instructions for the
Temperature tab on page 4-61 for detailed information on the
individual parameters on the Temperature tab.
4-84 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Editing the Time Zone Device
The following section provides descriptions for the parameters
corresponding to the Time Zone device.
Edit the Time Zone device parameters
Select the Time Zone of the monitor, not the QstartXML host
computer. Enable the Daylight Savings Rule to adjust the time for
Daylight Saving. Disable to Daylight Saving Rule to maintain
standard time throughout the year.
When applicable, select the Sync Time to Cellular Tower
checkbox when you want the monitor time to adjust to the nearby
cellular tower time every 12 hours (based on activation time). This
option is selected by default.
Configuration and Activation
4-85
Editing the XIO Device
Use the following information to configure the externally powered
XIO™ device for the TRITON+ monitor for up to two analog
inputs, two analog outputs, two digital inputs and two digital
outputs:
XIO Device properties dialog
Note: There is a single XIO device limit per TRITON+.
Analog Input 1 (2) Configure the values in this section to specify
how to process the incoming analog signal from an analog device
connected to the XIO device.
⚫
Entity Select the entity type corresponding to the incoming
analog signal to ensure the correct unit of measure is applied to
the resulting data. The XIO device supports the following
analog inputs: depth (DEPTH_A1), velocity (VEL_A1),
quantity (Q_A1), temperature (TMP_A1), PH (PH_A1), as
well as a generic analog input (AI_A1). For example, choose
DEPTH_A1 to record incoming analog depth values to a
DEPTH_A1 entity which uses corresponding units of measure
in inches (or millimeters).
4-86 ADS TRITON+® Manual
⚫
Min Value Input the minimum value for the incoming analog
signal which will be used to scale the data values. This value
represents the weakest signal corresponding to the incoming
4mA signal. For example, enter the value corresponding to the
lowest depth reading for a DEPTH_A1 input.
⚫
Max Value Input the maximum value for the incoming
analog signal which will be used to scale the data values. This
value represents the strongest signal corresponding to the
incoming 20mA signal. For example, enter the value
corresponding to the highest depth reading for a depth
(DEPTH_A1) input.
The monitor temporarily stores all incoming analog input readings
which occur between each monitor storage interval.
⚫
Average Select this checkbox to store the analog input signal
value as an average of all analog input readings since the last
monitor storage interval. If this checkbox is not selected, the
stored analog input value (when the Store Data checkbox is
selected) will be the most recent analog input
reading. Checkbox is selected by default.
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox when to store the analog
input to the monitor memory at the monitor’s storage
interval. (This value is averaged or actual value depending on
whether the Average checkbox is selected.) Checkbox is
selected by default.
⚫
Store Min Choose this checkbox to store the lowest analog
input reading which occurs within each sample interval as the
MIN_A1 data entity. Checkbox is selected by default.
⚫
Store Max Choose this checkbox to store the highest analog
input reading which occurs within each sample interval as the
MAX_A1 data entity. Checkbox is selected by default.
⚫
Store Avg Select this checkbox to store an averaged value of
the analog input signal as the AVG_A1 data entity. Checkbox is
selected by default.
Configuration and Activation
4-87
Analog Output 1 (2) Configure the following values for each
analog output device (maximum of two) connected to the XIO
device.
⚫
Entity Select the data entity whose value you want the XIO
device to output as an analog signal. While the list contains all
entities, choose only those entities which the monitor is
currently generating.
⚫
Min Value Enter the data value (for the selected entity) which
will correspond to the weakest analog output signal. The Min
Value will be used to translate actual data into analog output
signals and should correspond to the lowest possible entity
value (weakest) in the scale (4mA).
⚫
Max Value Enter the data value (for the selected entity)
which will correspond to the strongest analog output
signal. The Max Value will be used to translate actual data
values into analog output signals and should correspond to the
highest possible entity value (strongest) in the scale (20mA).
⚫
Manual Enter the value to use when manually testing the
analog output signal. This value will be used with the Enable
Manual checkbox for testing the analog output signal.
Important: Be sure to activate the monitor after
changing the Manual or Enable Manual parameter in
order for the new parameter to take effect.
⚫
Enable Manual Select this checkbox when you want to
manually test the analog output signal to output the value
designated in the Manual field.
Digital Input 1 (2) Configure the following values for each
digital input device (maximum of two) connected to the XIO
device.
⚫
Entity Select DI1 (DI2) from the drop-down list to enable the
associated digital input device connected to the XIO device.
4-88 ADS TRITON+® Manual
⚫
Store Data Select this checkbox to store the most current
digital input value (0 or 1) at each monitor wakeup to the
monitor as DI1 (DI2). Digital input channels are scanned
continuously, however, only the most current input signal is
stored at the monitor sample interval.
Digital Output 1 (2) Configure the parameter for the Digital
Output device.
Entity Choose the corresponding MLI event to which you want to
relay (output) the current status to a digital device. The current
event status will be updated and output at each monitor sample
interval.
Configuration and Activation
4-89
Activating the Monitor
Note: ADS recommends the initial TRITON+ monitor
activation be performed in the office prior to installing the
monitor in the field. Attach the wireless antenna before
attempting to connect wirelessly with the TRITON+. Once
the activation is successful, leave the wireless antenna
attached during transport to the field.
After configuring the monitor, activate the monitor to initiate the
flow monitoring process based on the monitor configuration.
Monitor activation involves generating the activation data using the
QstartXML software, downloading this data to the monitor, and
initiating flow data measurement and logging. The activation data
includes relevant portions of the XML and other configuration
parameters necessary to ensure monitoring activities reflect the
specific site conditions and project requirements. The monitor
requires these files and information to properly measure and record
the flow.
Activate the monitor in the following way:
1.
Attach the wireless antenna to the monitor.
2.
Select the monitor you want to activate from the Location
Name drop-down list in the Monitor section on the ADS
QstartXML dialog.
3.
Verify that the configuration parameters and Connect type for
the monitor and monitoring point are correct and make
modifications, as necessary. The initial monitor activation (or
an activation which follows a deactivation) must be performed
using the SERIAL communication.
4.
Click on the Activate button in the Functions section.
The computer connects to the monitor and downloads the
appropriate information and files. Once activation is
complete, the status bar reads Activate successful.
4-90 ADS TRITON+® Manual
5.
Continue with other activities that require communication with
the monitor or disconnect from the monitor by clicking on the
green Hangup button in the Functions section. If applicable
to the connection type, consider checking the monitor status to
verify the monitor is active and the data storage interval reflects
the sample rate selected for the monitor.
Important Note: When installing a TRITON+ monitor
with an AV|Gated sensor, the next step after the monitor
activation and sensor installation is to verify the AV|Gated
sensor is installed properly in the pipe within the +/- 5
degrees from the 6:00 position at the bottom of the pipe.
Proceed to Running Sensor Diagnostics on page 4-93 for
more details.
QstartXML generates a log entry of the activation event which is
available for viewing through the log viewer in QstartXML.
Configuration and Activation
4-91
Setting Up the RTU to Retrieve the
Current Data through Modbus
Following monitor activation, you must program the RTU with the
appropriate Modbus register addresses corresponding to the current
entity and monitor data you want to retrieve from the monitor. ADS
also recommends verifying that the RTU is retrieving the desired
output data shortly following monitor activation.
Note: The Telog Ru-33 does not require programming
with the Modbus register addresses to ensure it retrieves
the correct data. However, consider verifying whether the
Telog unit is successfully retrieving data following monitor
activation and Telog connection.
Designating the Data for Retrieval
Use the appropriate software application supporting the RTU to
designate the entity and monitor data you want the unit to retrieve
for the SCADA or other process control system. Refer to Chapter
9, Modbus, to view the entity and monitor data available for
retrieval and to determine the associated register addresses required
for obtaining the selected data.
Verifying the Modbus Output Data
Perform the following to verify the accuracy of the Modbus output
values, when applicable:
1.
Verify that the monitor has been activated, the RTU has been
programmed to retrieve the desired data, and the applicable
Modbus application has been launched.
4-92 ADS TRITON+® Manual
2.
Allow the TRITON+ monitor to log data for an appropriate
amount of time to obtain an adequate amount of data. Please
note the interval at which the monitor takes readings for
Modbus output is based on the Scan rate.
3.
Collect the data from the monitor. Refer to Collecting Data
from the Monitor on page 4-99 for detailed instructions.
4.
Compare the data collected from the monitor to the output
values obtained through Modbus. The data collected through
QstartXML reflects an average of the readings taken over a
specific interval; the values retrieved through the Modbus
interface represent the current (persistent) data in the monitor
from the last interval (readings). Therefore, the values
compared may not be exactly the same, but should be similar.
Configuration and Activation
4-93
Running Sensor Diagnostics
QstartXML’s diagnostics tool enables the user to verify the proper
operation of sensors, obtain current readings and status, adjust
settings, and identify, diagnose, and troubleshoot potential problems
with ultrasonic depth, velocity, and pressure sensors. Run
diagnostics for the system sensors in the following way:
Note: Device diagnostics for TRITON+ monitors
equipped with SIMs with dynamic IP addresses is only
available when connected serially.
Perform diagnostics on a device in the following way:
1.
Select the monitor for which you want to run diagnostics on a
sensor from the Location Name field in the Monitor section
on the ADS QstartXML dialog.
2.
Click on the Connect button in the Functions section.
QstartXML initiates and establishes communication with the
monitor. The status bar displays Ready once a connection has
been successfully made.
3.
Select the Monitoring Point 1 or Monitoring Point 2 tab
which contains the device you want to diagnose.
4.
Select the device representing the individual sensor(s) on which
you want to perform diagnostics from the Devices list.
5.
Click on the View button.
The device dialog corresponding to the selected device
displays.
6.
When applicable, click on the tab corresponding to the
particular sensor on which you want to run diagnostics.
7.
Click on the Read button below the Results window.
4-94 ADS TRITON+® Manual
The monitor takes the sensor measurements and displays the
readings in the Results window. The results may include the
specific reading (e.g., depth or velocity), the quality of the
reading, the maximum signal strength, and the temperature.
When taking depth measurements, the dialog also displays a
cross section of the pipe, offering a visual perspective of the
depth of the flow.
Note: Pressure depth readings compensate for the
physical and electronic offsets, and the Automatic Pressure
Calibration value (PRESSK and PRESSK2).
Note: After an AV|Gated sensor installation, the
AV|Gated sensor must be verified as being properly
installed within the +/- 5 degrees from the bottom center of
the pipe. Following the monitor activation, get online with
the monitor, select the AV|Gated Ultrasonic tab and Read.
Once the values display in the Results, review the Sensor
Slope and Sensor Rotation values and determine if they
are within +/- 5 degrees of 0 (as in the following picture).
Review the AV|Gated Ultrasonic Sensor Slope and Sensor Rotation values
Configuration and Activation
4-95
8.
Verify the accuracy, consistency, and quality of the readings,
and then edit the corresponding device parameters as necessary.
9.
(optional) Repeat steps 3 through 10 for every other sensor on
the device dialog on which you want to run diagnostics.
10. Click on the OK button once you are finished running
diagnostics for all the appropriate sensors corresponding to the
current device. This saves any changes made to the parameters
to the local directory or network. Clicking on the Cancel
button closes the device dialog without saving any parameter
modifications.
11. If any changes have been made to any of the device parameters,
you must reactivate the monitor by clicking on the Activate
button in the Functions section.
Note: There is no need to reactivate a monitor if there
were no parameter changes!
12. Once activation is complete, the status bar displays Activate
successful.
13. Click on the Hangup button in the Functions section when you
are finished running diagnostics on sensors associated with the
current monitor.
14. Click on the Save button to save any changes in the device
parameters to the local directory or network.
15. QstartXML generates a log entry for each user-initiated
diagnostic reading taken by the monitor that includes the sensor
fired, date and time at which the measurement was taken,
current device parameters corresponding to the sensor, and
readings and associated results. This entry (or entries) are
available for viewing through the log viewer in QstartXML.
4-96 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Performing Confirmations
Confirmations allow you to compare measurements taken by the
sensors to measurements taken manually in the field. These
comparisons help to verify that the sensors are functioning properly
and determine whether specific device parameters may require
modification.
Note: Confirmations for TRITON+ monitors equipped
with SIMs with dynamic IP addresses must be performed
serially.
Confirm the sensors in the following way:
1.
Select the monitor for which you want to perform
confirmations from the Location Name field in the Monitor
section on the ADS QstartXML dialog.
2.
Select the device with the sensor(s) you want to confirm from
the Devices list.
3.
Click on the Confirm button on the Monitoring Point tab.
QstartXML establishes a connection with the monitor and
displays the Confirm Device dialog.
4.
Select the point of reference from which to compare manual
depth to the actual sensor readings from the drop-down list in
the Field Measurement section.
❑ DOF Represents the depth of the flow from the bottom of
the pipe to the flow surface.
❑ Air DOF Crown Represents the distance (or range) from
the top (or crown) of the pipe to the flow surface.
❑ Air DOF Bat Represents the distance (or range) from the
ultrasonic depth sensor face (crystal surface) to the flow
surface.
Configuration and Activation
4-97
5.
Enter the distance measured manually from the bottom of the
pipe to the flow surface in the Depth field or the range from
the pipe crown/sensor face (as applicable) to the flow surface in
the Range field. The measurement perspective depends on the
option selected in step 4. Enter any estimated deviation
corresponding to the measurement in the +/- field.
6.
Enter the velocity of the flow measured manually using a
portable velocity meter in the Velocity field.
7.
Enter the initials or designation for the field personnel in the
Crew field.
8.
Enter any information corresponding to the field measurements,
the flow conditions, or location that may be relevant to the
confirmations in the Comments field.
9.
Click on the Read button to prompt the monitor to take depth
and velocity measurements.
The Monitor Measurement section displays the depth and
velocity readings taken by the monitor.
10. Compare the manual field measurements to the sensor readings.
If a difference exists between the manual depth measurements
and the depth sensor measurements, you can compensate for
this difference by editing the electronic offset parameter for the
appropriate depth sensor. Consider applying this offset to
ensure the monitor produces the most accurate data. Use the
following equation to determine the electronic offset:
Field Depth = Sensor Depth + Electronic Offset
11. If the sensor reading is low, add a positive (+) electronic offset.
12. If the sensor reading is high, add a negative (-) electronic
offset.
Note: Exercise caution when applying an electronic
offset. Use an offset only when you are confident in the
accuracy and reliability of the manual measurements and
physical offset of the sensor.
4-98 ADS TRITON+® Manual
If a difference exists between the manual velocity
measurements and the velocity sensor measurements, you can
compensate for this difference by adjusting certain velocity
sensor parameters, particularly Maximum Velocity and
Sensitivity.
Note: If you change a device parameter, such as an
electronic offset, you must reactivate the monitor.
13. (optional) Click on the Read button again to take additional
measurements, if necessary.
14. Click on the Close button once you are finished performing
confirmations for the selected device to exit the Confirm
Device dialog.
15. Repeat steps 2 through 12 for each additional device that
includes a sensor(s) you want to confirm.
Note: If the location supports a second monitoring point,
remember to confirm the devices assigned to that
monitoring point, as necessary.
16. If a change has been made to any sensor parameter, reactivate
the monitor. See page 4-89 for more information on
reactivating a monitor. If you didn’t change any device
parameters, there is no need to reactivate the monitor.
17. Click on the green Hangup button in the Functions section to
disconnect from the monitor.
QstartXML generates a log entry of the confirmation activity,
which includes the field and monitor readings, the name of the
crew, and any associated comments, and saves it to the local
directory or network. It also generates a log entry for each
user-initiated reading taken by the monitor that includes the
sensor fired, date and time at which the measurement was
taken, current device parameters corresponding to the sensor,
and reading and associated quality. These entries are
available for viewing through the log viewer in QstartXML.
Configuration and Activation
4-99
Collecting Data from the Monitor
Collect data from a monitor in the following way:
1.
Select the monitor from which you want to collect data from
the Location Name drop-down list in the Monitor section on
the ADS QstartXML dialog.
2.
Click on the Collect button in the Functions section.
The Collect Span dialog displays for designating the date/time
range for which you want to collect the data.
3.
Designate the date and time from which you want to begin
collecting data from the monitor in the Start field. QstartXML
defaults to a start date and time of one second past the last data
point stored in the local directory or network for the current
location. To edit a particular value in the Start date or time
field, select the value and enter a new value or use the up/down
arrows to advance through the numbers until you reach the
desired value.
4.
Designate the date and time up to which you want to collect
data from the monitor in the End field. The end date and time
in QstartXML default to the date and time on the local computer.
To edit a particular value in the corresponding date or time,
select the value and enter a new value or use the up/down
arrows to advance through the numbers until you reach the
desired value.
5.
Click on the OK button.
QstartXML establishes communication with the monitor and
initiates the data collection process. Refer to the status bar on
the dialog to monitor the progress of the collect. The View
Data dialog displays when data collection is complete.
Note: You can discontinue the data collection process at
any time by clicking on the Abort button.
4-100 ADS TRITON+® Manual
6.
View the data in tabular and graphical format on the View
Data dialog. Modify the graph based on the time period and
entities in the following ways:
7.
Select the amount of data you want to display on the graph at
one time by selecting the appropriate option from the Report
Type drop-down list (All, Day, Week, or Month).
8.
Limit the entities that display on the graph by clicking on the
Entities button, selecting the entities you want to display, and
clicking on the OK button. To select multiple entities, press
and hold down the Control (Ctrl) key while selecting the
individual entities. To choose consecutive entities in the list,
select the first entity you want to display, press and hold down
the Shift key, and then click on the last entity you want to
include.
9.
Zoom in on a particular portion of data on the graph by
selecting the Zoom option from the Report Type drop-down
list, clicking and dragging from the top left boundary of the
data you want to view on the graph to the bottom right
boundary of the data, and then releasing.
10. Use the scroll bars on the table to navigate to the specific data
you want to view. Sort the data in the table by clicking on the
heading corresponding to the data you want to sort. Clicking
on the DateTime heading enables you to switch between
viewing the most recent and the oldest data collected from the
monitor. Clicking on an entity heading allows you to switch
between viewing the readings in descending order (beginning
with the highest value) and in ascending order (beginning with
the lowest value).
11. Close the View Data dialog when you are finished viewing the
data by clicking on the red
of the dialog.
button at the top right corner
12. Click on the green Hangup button in the Functions section to
discontinue communication with the monitor.
QstartXML generates a collect log entry corresponding to the
data collect activity that includes a summary of the details
Configuration and Activation
4-101
associated with the collect and general monitor status
information at the time of the collect. You can view the
contents of the entry through the log viewer in QstartXML.
4-102 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Upgrading the Monitor Firmware
QstartXML enables you to download updated firmware to the
monitor that may include new monitor or device features and
capabilities or performance improvements.
Upgrade the firmware in the monitor in the following way:
Note: ADS recommends collecting the monitor data
before performing a firmware upgrade.
1.
Select the monitor for which you want to upgrade the firmware
from the Location Name field in the Monitor section on the
ADS QstartXML dialog.
2.
Click on the Upgrade button in the Functions section.
The Open dialog displays.
3.
Browse to the firmware file and then click on the Open button.
QstartXML initiates and establishes communication with the
selected monitor and downloads the new firmware to the
monitor. The status bar indicates when the download is
complete.
4.
Once the firmware download is complete, click on the green
Hangup button in the Functions section to discontinue
communication with the monitor.
5.
Wait at least 30 seconds, and then click on the Activate button.
The computer reconnects to the monitor and downloads the
appropriate information and files. Once activation has
completed, the status bar displays Activate successful.
6.
Click on the Hangup button to disconnect from the monitor.
QstartXML generates a log entry of the firmware upgrade that
documents the date and time at which the upgrade occurred,
the result (success or failure), the previous version of the
Configuration and Activation
4-103
firmware, and the name of the file downloaded during the
upgrade.
4-104 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Viewing Diagnostic and Data Logs
The local directory or network contains detailed diagnostic, status,
and data logs corresponding to many activities performed involving
the monitor and sensors such as activation, data collection, firmware
downloads, sensor diagnostics and confirmations. These logs are
available immediately following the activity and for future access to
historical information.
View a log(s) corresponding to a monitor location in the following
way:
1.
Select the location for which you want to view a log from the
Location Name drop-down list in the Monitor section on the
ADS QstartXML dialog.
2.
Click on the Logs button in the Functions section.
The [location name]-Logs dialog displays.
3.
Select the type of log you want to view from the Log Type
drop-down list.
The Logs list box displays all the logs available in the local
directory or network for the selected location and log type.
4.
Select the date and time corresponding to the log you want to
view from the Logs box.
5.
Click on the View button.
The selected log displays in printable format.
6.
(optional) Click on the Print button to print the contents of the
log file.
7.
Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each additional log you want to
view and/or print for the selected monitor location.
8.
Click on the close button to exit the window.
5-1
CHAPTER 5
Sensor Installation and
Connection
The ADS TRITON+® flow monitor and sensors are primarily
designed for monitoring flow in sanitary, storm, and combined
sewers. The monitor mounts to the manhole rim or wall slightly
below the manhole cover or to a rung in the manhole.
A sewer system’s hydraulics are much more stable and uniform in
the incoming pipe than in the manhole invert or outgoing pipe.
Therefore, the sensors mount to a stainless steel expandable ring or
stainless steel bands installed in the sewer pipe a short distance
upstream from the manhole invert. Installing the sensors upstream
minimizes the hydraulic effects and erroneous data readings caused
by foamy waters, waves in the flow, sewer noise, non-laminar flow,
and obstructions in the manhole.
Following is the basic procedure for installing the TRITON+
monitor and sensors at a location:
⚫
Investigate the Site Characteristics These characteristics
include pipe size and shape, silt level, flow depth, and
hydraulic conditions.
⚫
Prepare the Equipment for Installation The monitor,
communication system, and sensors must be prepared and
initialized for installation (See Chapters 4 and 5 for
communication and initial monitor setup).
5-2 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Install the Sensors in the Pipe This process primarily
includes assembling the ring (for standard installations) or
preparing the bands to which the sensors attach, mounting the
sensors to the ring or bands, securing the sensor cables to the
ring or bands, and installing the ring or bands in the pipe.
⚫
Install the Long Range Depth Sensor in the Manhole
Structure This process involves installing the Mounting Bar
near the top of the manhole, attaching the Long Range Depth
Sensor to the Mounting Bar, and affixing the Submersion
Sensor to the manhole frame.
⚫
Secure and Connect the Cables This procedure involves
securing the sensor cables from the ring or band to the monitor
location in the manhole and connecting the sensors to the
TRITON+ monitor. It also includes general instructions for
connecting a third-party water quality sampler to the monitor.
Typical TRITON+ flow monitor and sensor installation
This chapter contains instructions for properly installing the sensors
in sanitary, storm, and combined sewer lines and manholes.
Sensor Installation and Connection
Note: Manhole and sewer system work involves confined
space entry and is inherently dangerous. Therefore,
installers and technicians must comply with all federal,
state, and municipal regulations concerning confined space
entry. ADS is not responsible for any injuries, damages,
claims, or liability resulting directly or indirectly from the
use of this installation guide or the installation of any ADS
equipment.
5-3
5-4 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Investigating Site Characteristics
Before beginning installation activities, conduct a thorough
investigation of hydraulic and site conditions.
Flow Hydraulics
The hydraulics of a site directly affect the monitor's ability to
accurately measure flow depth and velocity. The following
characteristics indicate when a site exhibits hydraulic conditions
favorable for effective flow monitoring activities:
⚫
Relatively Smooth Flow with Central Peak Velocities
The potential site should exhibit minimal ripples or waves.
Choppy or foamy flow will adversely affect sensor accuracy.
Bulging pipe joints, upstream curves, or upstream merging of
pipes can contribute to choppy surfaces and off-center peak
flow velocities. However, please note that a limited degree of
roughness in the flow is necessary to ensure the sensor signal
can adequately reflect off the flow surface.
⚫
Absence of Significant Silt Buildup at Pipe Bottom
Silt present at an otherwise favorable site must be accounted
for to obtain accurate flow measurements. The sensor may
require positioning up the side of the pipe to ensure it remains
out of the silt. (Refer to Installing the Ring in the Pipe on page
5-29.)
⚫
No Evidence of Surcharging Debris present on ladder
rungs or joints in the manhole may indicate the site experiences
surcharging. If this occurs on a regular basis, consider finding
an alternate location for monitoring if mounting the sensors in
the pipe to measure flow rate.
⚫
Relatively Quiet Pipe A monitoring point in a pipe
experiencing loud noises, such as active drop connections, can
adversely affect the accuracy of air ultrasonic depth
measurements.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-5
⚫
Flow Traveling at Least One Foot Per Second Slower
flows enable debris to settle in the pipe, limiting the accuracy
of flow measurements.
⚫
Higher Elevation than High Water Level that Occurs
in Wet Well at Downstream Pump Station Pipes that are
below the high water level of the pump station wet well could
experience frequent backup and surcharging. This will
increase sensor maintenance and possibly reduce data
accuracy.
Pipe and Manhole Characteristics
The physical characteristics of the pipe affect the flow and
determine the procedure for installing the sensors. Consider the
following factors and perform the following activities when
installing the sensors and monitor:
⚫
Sensor Installation Method Pipe size and shape determine
the installation method to employ for installing the sensors.
❑ Standard Installation Select this option to install
sensors in round pipes from 8 inches (200 mm) to 48
inches (1219 mm) in diameter. Standard installations
involve attaching sensors to an adjustable stainless steel
ring that mounts inside the pipe.
❑ Special Installation in the Pipe Select this option to
install sensors in non-round pipes or round pipes larger
than 48 inches. (1219 mm) in diameter. Special
installations involve attaching sensors to steel bands
secured to the inside of the pipe.
❑ Installation in the Manhole Structure Select this
option to install the Long Range Depth Sensor, the Surface
Combo Sensor, or the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor in the
manhole structure. This installation involves installing the
Long Range Depth Sensor on a mounting bar near the top
of the manhole or installing the Surface Combo or
Ultrasonic Depth Sensors on a special bracket positioned
above the crown of the pipe on the manhole wall.
5-6 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Pipe Height and Width Measure and record the horizontal
and vertical pipe dimensions carefully. Inaccurate pipe
measurements—even slightly inaccurate measurements--can
skew and misrepresent flow data.
⚫
Pipe Shape Taking the appropriate measurements that
precisely reflect the exact pipe shape is essential to obtaining
accurate flow calculations. Therefore, irregularly-shaped pipes
will require additional measurements. Refer to the Qstart
online help for more information.
Note: All relevant pipe dimensions and measurements
are required for entry in the Qstart software during
monitor configuration and activation. The software
primarily requires pipe shape, height, and width during
these activities.
⚫
Manhole Depth Measure the distance from the rim to the
manhole invert. Distances beyond 30 feet could require
extension cables for the Peak Combo, Smart Depth and Surface
Combo sensors. See Appendix B.
Sensor Installation and Connection
Installing the Sensors in the Pipe
This section includes the procedures for performing sensor
installations using one of the following methods:
⚫
Standard Installations
⚫
Special Installations
Note: When installing a monitor with wireless
communications, it is very important to test the TRITON+
with the SIM card installed to ensure the entire system
functions and to verify network quality of service before
installation. This check should be done before field
deployment and again at the monitoring site before
installing the monitor. Refer to Chapter 4,
Communication, for more information.
Standard Installation
Performing a standard sensor installation involves the following
process:
⚫
Gathering the parts and supplies
⚫
Gathering the tools and equipment
⚫
Assembling the ring
⚫
Mounting the sensors on the ring
⚫
Securing the cables to the ring
⚫
Installing the ring in the pipe
5-7
5-8 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Gathering Parts and Supplies
Obtain the following supplies before installing the ring and sensors
to prevent any costly delays. When ordering, specify the
TRITON+ flow monitor installation hardware for ring mounting.
In addition, please indicate the type of mounting hardware desired
for mounting the monitor: mounting bracket (wall/rim mount) or
hook (rung mount).
Quantity
Description
ADS P/N
1
TRITON+ flow monitor (battery or externallypowered)
8000-FST-IM-GL,
8000-FST-IM-EPGL 1, 8000-FST-IM4VZ, or 8000-FSTIM-EP-4VZ 1
1
Monitor mounting bracket/flange (for mounting
monitor to manhole rim or wall)
I40–0009
3
Monitor mounting bracket bolt, hex, SS, M8 x
30mm
508058
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, flat, SS
517-8001254-00
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, split lock, SS
517-8001274-00
1 as
needed
Hook, SS, 2-piece w/ hardware
(for hanging monitor on manhole rung;
Alternative to ADS p/n I40-0009)
8000-0021
1 as
needed
Bracket, mounting, sliding, Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor (mounting plate)
8000-0307
1 as
needed
Bracket, adapter, sliding (for mounting
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to existing I25-0001
mounting plate)
8000-0299
1 as
needed
Bracket, mounting, slide, Surface Combo
Sensor (mounting plate)
8000-0307
1 as
needed
Adapter, silt mount for Peak Combo Sensor
8000-0271
1
Stainless steel ring (sized for pipe)
I25-0081 to 0094
See Appendix B
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
AV|Gated Sensor – upward ultrasonic depth
sensor, surcharge pressure depth sensor,
gated velocity sensor w/ M3 x 6mm stainless
steel, flathead screws
8K-CS7-10-35
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-9
Quantity
Description
ADS P/N
Up to 2 (1
per
monitoring
point)
Peak Combo Sensor – upward ultrasonic depth
sensor, pressure depth sensor, & peak velocity
sensor w/ M3 x 6mm stainless steel, flathead
screws
8K-CS4-xx-35/1H
(35-ft./10.6-m or
100-ft./30.5-m
cable) 2
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Surface Combo Sensor – downward ultrasonic
depth sensor, surcharge pressure depth
sensor, surface velocity sensor, & surcharge
peak velocity sensor
8K-CS5–V2-xx30/1H (30-ft./9.1-m
or 100-ft./30.5-m
cable) 2
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Ultrasonic depth sensor (downward ultrasonic
depth only)
8K-CS5-D1-00-30
(30-ft./9.1-m cable)
1 as
needed
IS standard or custom sensor extension cable
for Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
8000-0023–xxx 3
1 as
needed
IS Standard or Custom Sensor Extension
Cable for Peak Combo and Surface Combo
Sensors
8000-0025–xxx 3
as needed
¼-  2 ¼-in. stainless steel anchor bolts w/ nut
and washer
1
3/8-inch x 3-inch anchor bolt and nut
1
Replacement dryer tube
3704–0032
1
IS PC communication USB Serial Cable
8000-0337
1
Antenna for wireless communication
3800-0162 or
3800-0163
1 as
needed
Magnet (for activating diagnostic codes in the
monitor through the LED STATUS window)
8000-0460
1 as
needed
SIM card (for monitor modem)
507181
1 as
needed
External Power and Communications Unit
(ExPAC)
8000-0377
1 as
needed
24V DC power supply
508293
1 as
needed
External Modbus Interface Unit (XBUS)
8000-0427
1 as
needed
External Input and Output Device (XIO)
8000-0400
1 as
needed
External power/communications cable (from
ExPAC to monitor)
8000-0378-xxx 4
5-10 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Quantity
Description
ADS P/N
1 as
needed
External power grounding kit (also used to
convert a battery-powered TRITON+ monitor to
external power)
8000-0434-xxx 4
1 as
needed
Landline/Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN) modem module
8000-0053
1 as
needed
Data Access Arrangement (DAA) Interface
Module
8000-0158
1 as
needed
DAA communication cable
106298A-xxx5
1 as
needed
Lightning protection module
103313
1 as
needed
Sampler cable (for flow proportional sampling)
8000-0348-01
1 as
needed
Sampler cable (for level activation sampling)
8000-0348-02
4
M3 x 10mm flat head machine screw
507820
15
Plastic push mounts
1
3/8-in. – 16 thread. X 2-in. (10mm x 55mm x
1.5mm thread) stainless steel stud
1
3/8 in. – 16 thread (10mm x 1.5mm thread)
stainless steel nut
As needed
3/8 in. (10mm) stainless washer
15
11-in. (5mm x 300mm) cable ties
25
4-in. (2mm x 100mm) cable ties
15
8-in. (4mm x 200mm) cable ties
15
¼-in. (7mm x 400mm) anchor cable ties
1
18-inch (457-mm) stainless steel crank handle
I10–0012
1
Models 8000-FST-IM-GL and 8000-FST-IM-4VZ include the 12-volt battery
pack; Models 8000-FST-IM-EP-GL and 8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ (for external power)
do not include the battery pack.
IS pressure depth transducers (indicated by —xx- in the part number) are available
in Peak Combo Sensors and Surface Combo Sensors in 0 — 5 psi (0 — 0.34 Bar), 0
— 15 psi (0 – 1.03 Bar), and 0 — 30 psi (0 — 2.07 Bar) pressure ranges. Example:
a Peak Combo Sensor with a 0 – 15 psi (0 – 1.03 Bar) pressure transducer would be
specified in psi: 8K-CS4-15-35.
2
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-11
3
Extension cables can be ordered to specific lengths up to 300 ft. (91m). Note the
desired length (in feet) in the –xxx portion of the part number. Standard lengths are
10 ft. (3.0m), 25 ft. (7.6m), 50 ft. (15.2m), 75 ft. (22.8m), 100 ft. (30.5m), 125 ft.
(38.1m), 150 ft. (45.7m), and 200 ft. (61.0m). All other lengths must be custom
ordered.
4
The external power/communications cable and the ground cable included in the
external power grounding kit can be ordered to specific lengths up to 800 ft. (243m).
Note the desired length (in feet) in the –xxx portion of the part number. Standard
lengths are 10 ft. (3.0m), 25 ft. (7.6m), and 100 ft. (30.5m). All other lengths must
be custom ordered.
5
The DAA communication cable can be ordered in 25-ft. (7.6-m) increments up to
300 ft. (91m). Note the desired length (in feet) in the –xxx portion of the part
number. Standard length is 100 ft. (30.5m).
Gathering Tools and Equipment
Gather the following tools for the installation:
⚫
Battery-powered hammer drill with assorted bits – including
the following at a minimum:
❑ ¼-inch (6-mm) x 6-inch (150-mm) masonry bit
❑ 3/8-inch(10-mm) x 4-inch (100-mm) [minimum length]
masonry bit
❑ 5/16-inch (8-mm) carbide-tipped bit
⚫
Heavy 4-pound (1.5-Kg) hammer
⚫
Rubber mallet
⚫
24-inch (610-mm) carpenter’s level
⚫
Nut driver or socket set (English plus 13-mm for canister
hardware)
⚫
Wrenches (English plus 13-mm for canister hardware)
⚫
Screwdrivers (flathead and Phillips head of assorted sizes)
⚫
Thread tap compatible with the thread spec on the monitor
mounting stud (3/8-in. standard)
⚫
Diagonal wire cutters
⚫
Folding carpenter’s rule with a brass slide
5-12 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Mastic tape (ADS p/n 507193) or rubber coaxial stretch tape
Assembling the Ring
The flow sensors mount to a stainless steel ring for installation in
the pipe. Several different ring sizes exist, and each ring is
adjustable within about 3 inches (76 mm) to fit pipes of different
diameters. Assemble the ring in the following way:
Note: These instructions generally apply to overlapping
rings. However, the 6-inch (152-mm), 8-inch (178- to
211-mm), 10-inch (229- to 262-mm), and 12-inch (279 to
312-mm) rings do not have an overlapping section.
Therefore, these non-overlapping rings will require small
modifications during the assembly process. To assemble a
non-overlapping ring, proceed directly to step 4.
1.
Insert the spreader mechanism screw through the hole in the
center of the ring stabilizer. Ensure that the head of the screw
fits into the countersunk hole.
Ring stabilizer with spreader mechanism screw
2.
Slide the open end of the ring (end without the welded metal
band) through the flanges in the ring stabilizer, making sure the
flanges face the outside of the ring and the spreader mechanism
screw faces the inside of the ring.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-13
Sliding the ring stabilizer onto the ring
3.
Slide the ring stabilizer all the way around the ring until it is
about 4 inches (102 mm) from the welded metal band at the
other end of the ring.
Moving the ring stabilizer into position
4.
Position the ring with the downstream edge (edge with the
holes) facing you.
5-14 ADS TRITON+ Manual
5.
Slide the Surface Combo/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor mounting
plate onto the open end of the ring with the back of the
mounting plate (side with the slots) facing the outside of the
ring. The side with the keyholes should face the inside of the
ring. The end of the plate with the keyholes should be
extending out from the upstream edge of the ring (opposite the
edge with the holes for securing the sensor cable).
Sliding the Surface Combo/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor mounting plate onto the
ring
Note: For applications that involve replacing a previous
version of the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor (for example, ADS
p/n 8K-CS3-V0-XX-30) with a new Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-D1-00-30) or Surface Combo
Sensor and an existing ring remains assembled and
secured in the pipe, use a sliding adapter bracket (ADS p/n
8000-0299) to accommodate the new sensor in the existing
sensor mounting plate. Once the previous sensor has been
Sensor Installation and Connection
removed, slide the adapter bracket into the groves on the
existing plate from the upstream end of the plate until the
adapter bracket contacts the backstop at the downstream
end of the plate. The new sensor attaches to the adapter
bracket in the same way it attaches to the new sensor
mounting plate (ADS p/n 8000-0307), described later in
this chapter.
Mounting plate for previous version of Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
5-15
5-16 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Inserting sliding adapter bracket into existing sensor mounting plate
Sliding adapter bracket seated in existing mounting plate
6.
Move the sensor mounting plate around the ring.
Note: Steps 7 and 8 apply only to overlapping rings.
Proceed directly to step 9 for non-overlapping rings.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-17
7.
Slide the open end of the ring through the slot in the welded
band of the ring until it overlaps about 4 inches (102 mm).
8.
Spread the ring sections apart so that you can slide the ring
stabilizer with the spreader mechanism screw into the gap.
Moving the ring stabilizer into position
9.
Perform the following based on the ring type:
❑ Overlapping Insert the spreader mechanism screw
completely through the hole at the open end of the ring.
❑ Non-Overlapping Insert a spreader mechanism screw
through the hole at the left end of the ring so that the end
of the screw extends inside the ring.
5-18 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Ring stabilizer fully connected
10. Place the ring on a flat surface with the spreader mechanism
screw facing up.
11. Orient the ring with the downstream edge (edge with small
holes) facing you.
12. Lay the spreader mechanism across the inside of the ring with
the downstream end of the mechanism (end with the large
welded nut) facing you, the four spreader bars facing toward
the inside of the ring, and the shoulder bolts pointed outside the
ring.
13. Place a washer and then the downstream, left spreader bar over
the spreader mechanism screw.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-19
Orienting and attaching the spreader mechanism
14. Place the upstream, left spreader bar onto the same screw.
15. Lightly turn the hex nut onto the screw, ensuring that it passes
through the holes in the end of the spreader bar.
Note: Steps 16 through 18 apply only to overlapping
rings. For a non-overlapping ring, proceed to step 19.
Attaching the spreader bars
5-20 ADS TRITON+ Manual
16. Turn the ring until the spreader mechanism is in the 12:00
position.
17. Align the spreader mechanism screw so that the head is visible
through one of the ring size adjustment holes.
Aligning the screw head and adjustment hole
18. Tighten the screw through the hole using a Phillips-head
screwdriver while holding the hex nut with a 0.5-inch (12-mm)
nut driver.
Tightening the spreader mechanism screw and hex nut
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-21
19. Insert the second spreader mechanism screw through the
following hole based on the ring type:
❑ Overlapping Appropriate ring size adjustment hole on
the outside of the ring
❑ Non-overlapping Last hole on the other free end of the
ring (inserting the screw from the outside of the ring)
20. Slip the large washer onto the screw on the inside of the ring.
Place the washers onto the second spreader mechanism screw
21. Place the spreader bars over the screw, and tighten a hex nut on
the screw.
5-22 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Spreader mechanism attached to the ring (view from inside the ring)
Although the spreader mechanism fits snugly against the inside of
the ring, the spreader mechanism may seem loose on the hex nuts.
Do not be concerned. The spreader mechanism will tighten once
the ring is installed and tightened inside the pipe. The following
picture displays how a properly assembled ring with the ultrasonic
depth sensor mounting plate should look.
Properly attached spreader mechanism (with Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
mounting plate on ring)
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-23
Mounting the Sensors to the Ring
The following sections provide instructions on mounting the
AV|Gated Sensor and Peak Combo Sensor to the ring. To ensure
the most accurate flow data, standard pipe installations require
proper positioning of the sensors on the ring as well as in the pipe.
When facing upstream and viewing from the downstream edge of
the ring, the sensors should be mounted on the ring in the following
locations:
⚫
AV|Gated Sensor Mount the sensor as close as possible to
the six o’clock position (bottom). The sensor must be within
+/- 5 degrees of the bottom center of the pipe. AV|Gated
sensors should not be installed in pipes with silt.
⚫
Peak Combo Sensor Mount the sensor as close as possible
to the six o’clock position (bottom), provided it is mounted
above the level of any silt present at the bottom of the pipe.
Any silt covering the sensor could interfere with the sensor
signals, potentially producing inaccurate or erroneous readings.
To avoid silt, the Peak Combo sensor can be rotated as much as
15 degrees up either side of the pipe (between the 5:30 and
6:30 positions) without using a special mounting device. A silt
mount adapter can be used to mount the sensor from 15 to 45
degrees up the left side of the pipe (from the 6:30 to 7:30
position) when a higher elevation is necessary. However, keep
in mind that a physical offset measurement must be taken when
mounting the sensor in any position outside the bottom of the
pipe. Refer to Installing the Ring in the Pipe on page 5-29.
5-24 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Proper positioning of sensors on the ring (showing the Surface Combo
Sensor at top and Peak Combo or AV|Gated sensor at the bottom)
⚫
Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
Mount the sensor at the twelve o’clock position (top of the
pipe) when the spreader mechanism is in the one o’clock
position.
Caution: Handle all sensors and cables with extreme
care. The sensors and cables contain delicate mechanisms
and electronics. Keep sharp objects away from sensor
cables, and avoid stepping or placing heavy objects on the
cable during installation.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-25
Mounting the Peak Combo or AV|Gated
Sensors
Important: If the only sensor to be installed on the ring
is a single Peak Combo or a single AV|Gated sensor, the
sensor should be at the 6:00 position and the crank should
be rotated left or right to the 11:00 or 1:00 position so as
not to interfere with the Upward Ultrasonic reading during
surcharge conditions.
Mount the Peak Combo Sensor or AV|Gated to the ring in the
following way:
1.
Use two M3 X 10mm stainless steel flathead screws (do not
substitute any other screws) to attach the sensor at the bottom
of the ring (opposite from the Surface Combo
Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor).
□
The Peak Combo sensor can be installed up to 15 degrees
up either side of the pipe (5:30 to 6:30 position) with the
blunt end (i.e., nose) of the sensor facing upstream.
□
The AV|Gated sensor must be installed within +/- 5
degrees from the bottom center of the pipe.
Mounting the Peak Combo or AV|Gated sensors to the ring
If the Peak Combo sensor (not applicable to the AV|Gated
sensor) requires the use of a silt mount adapter (ADS p/n 80000271) to install the sensor further up the left side of the pipe
5-26 ADS TRITON+ Manual
(between 15 and 45 degrees, or the 6:30 to 7:30 position),
attach the Peak Combo sensor to the ring in the following way:
❑ Seat the sensor onto the slightly elevated portion of the top
of the silt mount adapter. The elevated portion of the
adapter should insert easily into the inset portion of the
bottom of the sensor. Orient the sensor so that the sensor
cable is exiting the sharp, or wedged, side of the adapter.
❑ From the bottom of the adapter, use two M3 X 10mm
stainless steel flathead screws (do not substitute any other
screws) to secure the sensor to the adapter. The pre-drilled
screw holes in the adapter and in the bottom of the sensor
should be in alignment if the sensor is seated properly on
the adapter.
PEAK COMBO SENSOR
SENSOR
SECURED TO
ADAPTER
SCREWS THROUGH
COUNTERSUNK HOLES
SECURE SENSOR
SILT MOUNT ADAPTER
Properly seating and securing the Peak Combo to the Silt Mount Adapter
❑ Use two M3 X 10mm stainless steel flathead screws (do
not substitute any other screws) to secure the adapter to
the ring at the appropriate location on the ring to ensure
the sensor will be positioned between 15 and 45 degrees
(6:30 to 7:30) up the left side of the pipe and below the
flow surface once installed. The nose of the sensor should
be facing the same direction as the upstream edge of the
ring.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-27
ADAPTER/SENSOR ASSEMBLY
INNER SURFACE OF
RING OR BAND
UPSTREAM
EDGE
OUTER SURFACE
OF
RING OR BAND
DOWNSTREAM
EDGE
MOUNTING
SCREWS
Securing the Peak Combo Sensor/Silt Mount Adapter assembly to the ring
2.
Orient the ring so that the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor mounting plate is directly at the top. If neither a
Surface Combo Sensor nor Ultrasonic Depth Sensor will be
used at the top of the pipe, make sure the spreader assembly is
directly on top.
3.
Secure the sensor cable to the ring. Refer to Securing the
Cables to the Ring on page 5-27 for instructions on properly
securing the cable.
Securing the Cables to the Ring
Securing the Peak Combo or AV|Gated sensor cables to the ring
helps prevent debris from collecting between the cable and the ring
or catching on the loose cable. It also prevents the loose cables
from disrupting the flow.
Secure the cable in the following way:
1.
Starting at the appropriate sensor location, begin securing the
sensor cable with 4-inch (2-mm x 100-mm) cable ties through
the pre-drilled holes along the downstream trailing edge of the
ring up the side of the ring. Run the cable up the side of the
ring opposite the spreader mechanism (the right side of the
ring’s downstream edge).
5-28 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Sensor cabling
2.
Continue securing the cables until reaching the Surface Combo
Sensor, Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, or top of the pipe.
3.
Pull the ties until they are taut.
Warning: Do not over-tighten the cable ties or kink the
sensor cables! The sensor cable sheathes two
components: the electrical cables that operate the sensor
and an air tube that ventilates the pressure sensor (when
applicable). Over-tightening the ties or kinking the cable
can damage or restrict the air tube, causing erroneous
pressure depth readings. In addition, make sure the
connector-end of the sensor is not kinked, does not contain
moisture, and includes an attached dryer tube filled with
active blue desiccant.
4.
Use the diagonal cutters to cut off the excess portion of the
cable ties.
Mounting the Surface Combo Sensor or
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
The Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor is not
mounted prior to installation of the ring. The ring mechanism and
sensor mounting plate are assembled as detailed in Assembling the
Ring beginning on page 5-12. After the ring is installed at the
monitoring site, the sensor is inserted into the mounting plate and
leveled (as described in the following section).
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-29
Installing the Ring in the Pipe
The ring must fit securely in the pipe with the sensors properly
positioned to ensure the most accurate monitoring results. Install
the ring in the pipe in the following way:
1.
Examine the pipe for possible obstructions to the flow or
inhibitors to ring installation.
2.
Adjust the ring size to slightly less than the pipe diameter
before placing the ring in the pipe by turning the spreader
mechanism adjustment nut clockwise to contract it.
3.
Place the ring in the input pipe at least 12 inches (305 mm)
upstream from the manhole or edge of the pipe with the
sensors facing upstream toward the oncoming flow. It must
be located far enough upstream from the manhole to minimize
the effect of the draw-down caused by a possible drop in the
manhole invert.
12"
FLOW
Installing the ring at least 12 inches (305 mm) upstream from the manhole
invert
Keep the following in mind:
❑ The installed AV|Gated sensor must be positioned in the
bottom, center of the pipe and cannot exceed +/- 5
degrees from the 6:00 position. Install the AV|Gated
sensor and then verify the sensor is correctly positioned.
After activating the monitor, perform a Diagnostic reading
5-30 ADS TRITON+ Manual
on the AV|Gated Ultrasonic sensor and verify the Sensor
Slope and Sensor Rotation values are not greater than 5.0.
See Chapter 6, Running Sensor Diagnostics for more
information.
❑ Be sure to mount the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor at the top (crown) of the pipe and to mount
the Peak Combo Sensor as close as possible to the bottom
center of the pipe, above any silt present and below the
flow surface (during minimum flows).
(Left) Proper orientation of the ring with the sensors in the pipe without silt
present. (Right) Proper orientation of the ring with silt present (not applicable
to AV|Gated). Note that the sensor mounting plate for the Surface Combo
Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor is centered at the crown of the pipe and the
crank spreader mechanism is offset to the side.
❑ The bottom Peak Combo Sensor (not applicable to
AV|Gated) may be rotated off the bottom centerline up to
15 degrees (5:30 to 6:30 positions) up either side of the
pipe (without the adapter) or from 15 to 45 degrees (the
6:30 to 7:30 positions) up the left side of the pipe (with the
silt mount adapter). However, rotating the ring and sensor
requires accurately measuring the physical offset.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-31
CENTER
OF
PIPE
REQUIRES
SILT MOUNT ADAPTER
45°
15° 15°
MAX ROTATION OFF
BOTTOM CENTER
Rotating the Peak Combo Sensor no more than 15 degrees up either side of
the pipe (between the 5:30 and 6:30 positions) or between 15 and 45
degrees up the left side of the pipe (6:30 to 7:30 position) with the silt mount
adaptor
❑ If necessary, temporarily clear away silt to install the ring.
Restore the silt after fully securing the ring (step 7).
❑ Do not install an AV|Gated sensor in sites with silt as the
silt adapter cannot be used with this sensor.
❑ Make sure the ring is flat (flush) against the inside surface
of the pipe to avoid obstructing the flow or catching
debris.
❑ Verify that the Peak Combo Sensor (with or without silt
adapter) or AV|Gated sensor is flush with the pipe surface.
Any elevation of the sensor or significant deterioration or
imperfection in the pipe surface around the sensor can
create an open space in which debris can become trapped.
An elevated sensor also can misdirect the signal when
taking measurements. These vulnerabilities can quickly
5-32 ADS TRITON+ Manual
result in potential damage or disruption to the sensor
and/or erroneous data.
An elevated sensor provides a gap in which debris can collect
Deterioration in the pipe surface creates a space for debris to collect under
the sensor
4.
Expand the ring by turning the spreader mechanism nut
counter-clockwise with the crank handle or socket. However,
do not tighten the ring against the pipe completely at this point.
5.
Mount the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
to the ring by inserting the studs on the back of the sensor into
the keyholes on the sensor mounting plate (at the top of the
ring) and sliding the sensor back (in a downstream direction)
until it is fully in place. The sensor cable should exit the
downstream edge of the ring. Orient the sensor with the depth
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-33
crystals facing downward toward the inside of the ring (flow
surface).
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
SURFACE COMBO/ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
Mounting the Surface Combo or Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to the mounting
plate on the ring
Note: For applications that involve replacing a previous
version of the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor (for example, ADS
p/n 8K-CS3-V0-XX-30) with a new Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-D1-00-30) and an existing ring
remains assembled and secured in the pipe, use a sliding
adapter bracket (ADS p/n 8000-0299) to accommodate the
new sensor in the existing sensor mounting plate. Once
the previous sensor has been removed, slide the adapter
bracket into the groves on the existing plate from the
upstream end of the plate until the adapter bracket contacts
the backstop at the downstream end of the plate. The new
sensor attaches to the adapter bracket in the same way it
attaches to the new sensor mounting plate (ADS p/n 80000307), described in step 5 above.
5-34 ADS TRITON+ Manual
PREVIOUS VERSION OF
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
SURFACE COMBO/
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
SLIDING ADAPTER BRACKET
Inserting the Sliding Adapter Bracket onto the existing sensor mounting plate
PREVIOUS VERSION OF
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
SLIDING ADAPTER BRACKET
SURFACE COMBO/ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
Attaching the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to Sliding Adapter Bracket
Note: Handle the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor with care, and do not expose it to extreme
temperatures for an extended period of time. Keep the
sensor in its protective packaging until it is time for
installation. Avoid contacting the metal connector at the
end of the sensor cable (or any other sharp object) with
the Teflon®-coated crystals on the sensor.
Sensor Installation and Connection
6.
5-35
Using a 24-inch (500-mm or 1000-mm) carpenter’s level,
orient the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor at
the top of the pipe so that the sensor face is parallel and level
(from side to side) with the flow surface and pipe crown. To
protect the crystals on the sensor, use a block of wood of
uniform dimensions between the level and the flat face of the
horizontal, ultrasonic depth sensor portion of the sensor!
SURFACE COMBO/ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
RING
MANHOLE
WOOD BLOCK SPACER
PIPE
LEVEL
Leveling the ultrasonic depth sensor
If necessary, adjust the level in either sensor in the following
way:
❑ Remove the sensor from the mounting plate.
❑ Loosen the ring slightly to allow the plate to move on the
ring.
5-36 ADS TRITON+ Manual
❑ Tap the sensor mounting plate to the right or left with a
rubber mallet until it is level.
Warning: Tapping the mounting plate with the sensor
attached could damage the sensor. Always remove the
sensor before tapping the plate with a mallet.
❑ Reattach the sensor to the mounting plate, and recheck the
level.
7.
Fully tighten the ring until it fits securely and completely flush
against the pipe wall.
Warning: Avoid over-tightening the ring. This could
bend the crank assembly.
8.
Install an anchor bolt in the manhole wall just above the pipe
crown. Using an anchor cable tie, secure the Surface Combo
Sensor cable.
9.
Restore any silt moved to its previous level, and confirm that
the Peak Combo Sensor is still above the silt level.
10. Measure the physical offsets for the sensors in the following
way.
❑ AV|Gated Sensor There should never be a physical
offset for an AV|Gated sensor.
❑ Peak Combo Sensor Physical Offset Manually
measure the depth of the flow from the bottom of the pipe
to the flow surface, and then measure the distance from the
nose (i.e., front end) of the Peak Combo Sensor to the flow
surface. Subtract the second measurement from the initial
depth of flow to determine the physical offset.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-37
*
DISTANCE FROM
SENSOR NOSE
TO SURFACE
WATER SURFACE
*
CENTER PIPE
DEPTH
SILT
PHYSICAL
OFFSET
Illustrating the method for determining the physical offset for a rotated Peak
Combo Sensor
❑ Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
Physical Offset Measure the distance from the crown
(top) of the pipe to the face of the sensor (horizontal
surface with the two depth crystals) to determine the
physical offset. Typical offsets range from 1.25 to 1.50
inches (32 to 38 mm).
Note: These offsets are required when configuring the
monitor using the Qstart software.
11. Secure the sensor cables from the ring to the location at which
the monitor is mounted in the manhole. Refer to Securing the
Sensor Cables in the Pipe and Manhole on page 5-81 for more
information.
5-38 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Special Installations for Peak Combo,
AV|Gated, Surface Combo, or Ultrasonic
Depth Sensors
A special installation requires two independent installations: one for
the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth Sensor and one for
the Peak Combo or AV|Gated sensor.
Note: Special installations do not involve spreader
mechanisms or rings. All hardware mounts directly to the
pipe surface with anchor bolts.
Performing a special installation involves the following process:
⚫
Gathering the parts and supplies
⚫
Gathering the tools and equipment
⚫
Mounting the Peak Combo Sensor or AV|Gated sensor
⚫
Mounting the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor
⚫
Securing the cables to the band
Before beginning the installation, conduct a thorough investigation
of hydraulic and other site conditions. The hydraulics of a site
directly affect the monitor’s ability to accurately measure flow
depth and velocity. In addition, measure the horizontal and vertical
pipe dimensions carefully. Even slightly inaccurate pipe
dimensions can significantly skew and misrepresent flow data.
Caution: Handle all sensors and cables with extreme
care. The sensors and cables contain delicate mechanisms
and electronics. Keep sharp objects away from sensor
cables, and avoid stepping or placing heavy objects on the
cable during installation. Avoid contacting the metal
connector at the end of the Surface Combo or Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor cable (or any other sharp object) with the
Teflon-coated crystals on the sensor.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-39
Gathering Parts and Supplies
Be sure to obtain the following supplies before performing a special
installation to prevent any costly delays. When ordering, specify
the TRITON+ monitor special installation hardware. In addition,
please indicate the type of mounting hardware desired for mounting
the monitor: mounting bracket (wall/rim mount) or hook (rung
mount).
Quantity
Description
ADS P/N
1
TRITON+ flow monitor (battery or externallypowered)
8000-FST-IM-GL,
8000-FST-IM-EPGL 1, 8000-FST-IM4VZ, or 8000-FSTIM-EP-4VZ 1
1
Monitor mounting bracket/flange (for mounting
monitor to manhole rim or wall)
I40–0009
3
Monitor mounting bracket bolt, hex, SS, M8 X
30mm
508058
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, flat, SS
517-8001254-00
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, lock, SS
517-8001274-00
1 as
needed
Hook, SS, 2-piece w/ hardware
(for hanging monitor on manhole rung;
Alternative to I40-0009)
8000-0021
Up to 2 (1
per
monitoring
point)
AV|Gated Sensor – upward ultrasonic depth
sensor, pressure depth sensor, and AV|Gated
velocity sensor w/ M3 x 6mm stainless steel,
flathead screws
8K-CS7-10-35 (35ft/10.6-m cable)
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Peak Combo Sensor – upward ultrasonic depth
sensor, pressure depth sensor, & peak velocity
sensor w/ M3 x 6mm stainless steel, flathead
screws
8K-CS4-xx-35/1H
(35-ft./10.6-m or
100-ft./30.5-m
cable) 2
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Surface Combo Sensor – downward ultrasonic
depth sensor, pressure depth sensor, surface
velocity sensor, & surcharge velocity sensor
8K-CS5-V2-xx30/1H (30-ft./9.1-m
or 100-ft./30.5-m
cable) 2
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Ultrasonic depth sensor (downward ultrasonic
depth only)
8K-CS5-D1-00-30
(30-ft./9.1-m cable)
1 as
needed
IS Standard or Custom Sensor Extension
Cable for Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
8000-0023–xxx 3
5-40 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Quantity
Description
ADS P/N
1 as
needed
IS Standard or Custom Sensor Extension
Cable for Peak Combo and Surface Combo
Sensors
8000-0025–xxx 3
1 as
needed
Bracket, sliding, Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
(mounting plate)
8000-0307
1 as
needed
Bracket, adapter, sliding (for mounting
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to existing I25-0001
mounting plate)
8000-0299
1 as
needed
Bracket, sliding, Surface Combo Sensor
(mounting plate)
8000-0307
1 as
needed
Adapter, silt mount for Peak Combo Sensor
8000-0271
1 as
needed
Special Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor install band, SS, 12 in. long (Use
with corresponding mounting plate 8000-0307)
700-100238-00
As needed
by length
Stainless steel mounting band
Contact ADS
1 as
needed
Sensor surcharge bracket (used only to mount
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor in manhole)
I40-0010
as needed
¼. In.  2 ¼ in. (M6 x 55mm) stainless steel
anchor bolts w/ nuts and washers
1
Replacement dryer tube
3704–0032
1
IS PC Communication USB Serial Cable
8000-0337
1
Antenna for wireless communication
3800-0162 or
3800-0163
1 as
needed
Magnet (for activating diagnostic codes in the
monitor through the LED STATUS window)
8000-0460
1 as
needed
SIM card (for modem in monitor)
507181
1 as
needed
External Power and Communications Unit
(ExPAC)
8000-0377
1 as
needed
24V DC power supply
508293
1 as
needed
External Modbus Interface Unit (XBUS)
8000-0427
1 as
needed
External Input and Output Device (XIO)
8000-0400
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-41
Quantity
Description
ADS P/N
1 as
needed
External power/communications cable (from
ExPAC to monitor)
8000-0388-xxx 4
1 as
needed
External power grounding kit (also used to
convert a battery-powered TRITON+ monitor to
external power)
8000-0434-xxx 4
1 as
needed
Landline/Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN) modem module
8000-0053
1 as
needed
Data Access Arrangement (DAA) Interface
Module
8000-0158
1 as
needed
DAA communication cable
106298A-xxx 5
1 as
needed
Lightning protection module
103313
1 as
needed
Sampler cable (for flow proportional sampling)
8000-0348-01
1 as
needed
Sampler cable (for level activation sampling)
8000-0348-02
4
M3 x 10mm flat head machine screws
507820
15
Plastic push mounts
1
3/8 in. - 16 thread. x 2.in. (10mm x 55mm x
1.5mm thread) stainless steel stud
1
3/8 in. – 16 thread (10mm x 1.5mm thread)
stainless steel nut
As needed
3/8 in. (10mm) stainless washer
15
11-in. (5mm x 300mm) cable ties
25
4-in. (2mm x 100mm) cable ties
15
8-in. (4mm x 200mm) cable ties
15
¼-in. (7mm x 400mm) anchor cable ties
1
Models 8000-FST-IM-GL and 8000-FST-IM-4VZ include the 12-volt battery
pack; Models 8000-FST-IM-EP-GL and 8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ (for external power)
do not include the battery pack.
2
Pressure depth transducers (indicated by -xx- in the sample part number) are
available in Peak Combo Sensors and Surface Combo Sensors 0 – 5 psi (0 - 0.34
Bar), 0 – 15 psi (0 - 1.03 Bar), and 0 - 30 psi (0 - 2.07 Bar) pressure ranges.
5-42 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Example, a Peak Combo Sensor with a 0 - 15 psi (0 - 1.03 Bar) pressure transducer
would be specified in psi: 8K-CS4--15-35.
3
Extension cables can be ordered to specific lengths up to 300 ft. (91m). Note the
desired length (in feet) in the -xxx-- portion of the part number. Standard lengths
are 10 ft. (3.0m), 25 ft. (7.6m), 50 ft. (15.2m), 75 ft. (22.8m), 100 ft. (30.5m), 125 ft.
(38.1m), 150 ft. (45.7m), and 200 ft. (61.0m). All other lengths must be custom
ordered.
4
The external power/communications cable and the ground cable included in the
external power grounding kit can be ordered to specific lengths up to 800 ft. (243m).
Note the desired length (in feet) in the –xxx portion of the part number. Standard
lengths are 10 ft. (3.0m), 25 ft. (7.6m), and 100 ft. (30.5m). All other lengths must
be custom ordered.
5
The DAA communication cable can be ordered in 25-ft. (7.6-m) increments up to
300 ft. (91m). Note the desired length (in feet) in the –xxx portion of the part
number. Standard length is 100 ft. (30.5m).
Gathering the Tools and Equipment
Gather the following tools for the installation:
⚫
Battery-powered hammer drill with assorted bits – including
the following at a minimum:
❑ ¼-inch (6-mm) x 6-inch (150-mm) masonry bit
❑ 3/8-inch (10-mm) x 4-inch (100-mm) [minimum length]
masonry bit
❑ 5/16-inch (8-mm) carbide-tipped bit
⚫
Heavy 4-pound (1.5-Kg) hammer
⚫
Rubber mallet
⚫
24-inch (610-mm) carpenter’s level
⚫
Nut driver set or socket set (English plus 13-mm for canister
hardware)
⚫
Wrenches (English plus 13-mm for canister hardware)
⚫
Screwdrivers (flathead and Phillips head of assorted sizes)
⚫
Threads tap compatible with the thread spec on the monitor
mounting stud
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-43
⚫
Diagonal wire cutters
⚫
Folding carpenter’s rule with a brass slide
⚫
Mastic tape (ADS p/n 507193) or rubber coaxial stretch tape
Mounting Peak Combo or AV|Gated Sensors
Note: Regardless of which band is used to install the
AV|Gated sensor, it must be installed no more than +/- 5
degrees from the bottom center of the pipe. In addition, it
must not be installed in pipes with silt as a silt adapter
cannot be used with the AV|Gated sensor.
Two special installation methods are available for mounting the
Peak Combo Sensor:
⚫
¾-band mount
⚫
½-band mount
Both mounts require almost identical installation methods. The
only significant differences are that the ¾-band mount allows the
installer to secure the band to both sides of the pipe wall and to
position the sensor at the bottom center of the pipe. These options
are not possible using the ½-band mount. Therefore, the ¾-band
mount is the preferable method for mounting the sensors.
However, a ½-band mount may be appropriate for monitoring
under the following circumstances:
⚫
Large pipes with deep minimum flows
⚫
Large pipes with excessive silt present
5-44 ADS TRITON+ Manual
½- (left) and ¾-band (right) mounts
Note: When positioning the special mounting metal,
ADS recommends reserving the left side of the pipe for the
long end of the ¾-band (end extending almost completely
up one side of the pipe) and the ¼-band for routing the
sensor cable and accommodating the Silt Mount Adapter
(when necessary). The Peak Combo Sensor may not be
offset more than 45 degrees (7:30) up the left side of the
pipe to account for silt. The sensor can be offset a
maximum of 15 degrees (6:30 position) up the side of the
pipe without a special adapter. However, offsets between
15 and 45 degrees (6:30 and 7:30 positions) up the side of
the pipe require the Silt Mount Adapter (ADS p/n 80000271).
¾-Band Mount
Perform the following procedure to mount the Peak Combo or
AV|Gated sensor (when applicable) in a pipe using the ¾-band
mount:
1.
Use a hacksaw to cut the band to the appropriate length. Cut
the band so that, once installed, it will run approximately ¾ of
the circumference of the pipe.
Sensor Installation and Connection
2.
5-45
Locate the sensor at a position on the band based on installing
the long end of the band (end extending almost completely up
one side of the pipe) on the left side of the incoming pipe
(upstream from the manhaole) and the existence of silt at the
bottom of the pipe. ADS recommends reserving the left side of
the pipe for the long end of the band to accommodate the
sensor cable and a silt mount adapter, when applicable.
❑ PEAK COMBO OR AV|GATED In pipes with no silt,
locate the sensor on the band so the sensor is located at the
bottom center of the pipe once installed. (The AV|Gated
must be installed no more than +/- 5 degrees from the
bottom center of the pipe.)
❑ PEAK COMBO ONLY In pipes with silt present, locate the
sensor slightly up the long end (left side) of the band so
the Peak Combo sensor is above the silt level once
installed. However, make sure it will not be more than 45
degrees from the bottom center of the pipe (i.e., 7:30
position).
(Left) Peak Combo or AV|Gated sensor mounted using a ¾-band mount in
the pipe without silt. (Right) Peak Combo sensor only mounted in pipe with
silt.
5-46 ADS TRITON+ Manual
3.
(applies only when mounting the Peak Combo or AV|Gated
sensor less than 15 degrees (6:30 position) up the side of the
pipe. The AV|Gated sensor must be positioned no more than
+/- 5 degrees off the 6:00 position.) Mount the sensor onto the
inside of the band with two M3 x 10-mm countersink screws,
making sure the blunt end (i.e., nose) of the sensor is facing the
upstream edge of the ring (edge opposite cable tie holes). If
mounting holes do not exist on the band at or near the desired
mounting location for the sensor, drill holes in the band using
a 7/32-inch (3-mm) drill bit.
Attaching Peak Combo Sensor to band
4.
(applies only to Peak Combo when mounting the sensor
between 15 and 45 degrees up the side of the pipe) Use the silt
mount adapter (ADS p/n 8000-0271) to attach the sensor to the
band in the following way:
❑ Seat the Peak Combo Sensor onto the slightly elevated
portion of the top of the silt mount adapter. The elevated
portion of the adapter should insert easily into the inset
portion of the bottom of the sensor. Orient the sensor so
that the sensor cable is exiting the sharp, or wedged, side
of the adapter.
❑ From the bottom of the adapter, use two M3 x 10mm
stainless steel flathead screws (do not substitute any other
screws) to secure the sensor to the adapter. The predrilled
screw holes in the adapter and in the bottom of the sensor
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-47
should be in alignment if the sensor is seated properly on
the adapter.
PEAK COMBO SENSOR
SENSOR
SECURED TO
ADAPTER
SCREWS THROUGH
COUNTERSUNK HOLES
SECURE SENSOR
SILT MOUNT ADAPTER
Seating and securing the Peak Combo Sensor to the Silt Mount Adapter
Use two M3 x 10mm stainless steel flathead screws (do
not substitute any other screws) to secure the
sensor/adapter assembly to the band at the appropriate
location on the band to ensure the sensor will be
positioned between 15 and 45 degrees up the left side of
the pipe (6:30 to 7:30) and below the flow surface once
installed. The nose of the sensor should be facing the
same direction as the upstream edge of the band. If
mounting holes do not exist on the band at or near the
desired mounting location for the adapter/sensor, drill
holes in the band using a 7/32-inch (3-mm) drill bit.
5-48 ADS TRITON+ Manual
ADAPTER/SENSOR ASSEMBLY
INNER SURFACE OF
RING OR BAND
UPSTREAM
EDGE
OUTER SURFACE
OF
RING OR BAND
DOWNSTREAM
EDGE
MOUNTING
SCREWS
Attaching the Peak Combo Sensor/Silt Mount Adapter assembly to the band
5.
Secure the sensor cables along the downstream edge of the
long end of the band according to the instructions in Securing
the Cables to the Band on page 5-53.
6.
Make sure two pre-drilled holes are visible above the flow
surface on the short end of the band. Maneuver the band so
that the lowest hole is almost at the flow surface.
7.
Mark the pipe wall through the lowest hole with a drill, and
install a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt with a
pneumatic drill.
8.
Secure the band to the anchor bolt with a washer and nut.
9.
Conform the band to the pipe wall around to the long end of
the band so that it is flush with the pipe wall.
10. Install a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt through
the pre-drilled hole closest to the flow surface on the long end
of the band, and secure the band with a washer and nut.
11. Make sure the band and sensors are flush against the pipe wall
with no gaps, and conform the rest of the band to the pipe wall.
12. Install ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolts, nuts and
washers at the pre-drilled hole at the short end of the band and
at the pre-drilled holes along the long end of the band (above
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-49
the flow surface) approximately every 12 to 24 inches (305 to
610 mm) to the top end of the band.
13. Measure the physical offset for the sensor by manually
measuring the depth of the flow from the bottom of the pipe to
the flow surface and then measuring the distance from the nose
(i.e., front end at the pipe surface) of the sensor to the flow
surface. Subtract the second measurement from the initial
depth of flow to determine the physical offset.
14. Run the sensor cables from the sensor location in the pipe to
the monitor location in the manhole according to the
instructions in on page 5-81.
½-Band Mount
Perform the following procedure to mount a Peak Combo or
AV|Gated sensor in a pipe using the ½-band mount:
1.
Use a hacksaw to cut the band to the appropriate length. Cut
the band so that, once installed, it will run almost completely
down the left side of the pipe.
2.
Determine the best location on the band to mount the sensor.
Intend on installing the band on the left side of the incoming
pipe (upstream from the manhaole) to accommodate the sensor
cable and a silt mount adapter (when applicable for Peak
Combo only). The sensor should mount as close as possible to
the bottom (end) of the band, making sure the sensor will be
both above the silt level and below the flow surface once
installed. The Peak Combo sensor should not be more than 45
degrees from the bottom center of the pipe. The AV|Gated
sensor should not be more than +/- 5 degress off the bottom
center of the pipe.
Note: Mounting the Peak Combo Sensor between 15 and
45 degrees up the side of the pipe (between the 6:30 and
7:30 positions) requires a special silt mount adapter.
3.
(applies to the Peak Combo when mounting the sensor no
more than 15 degrees up the side of the pipe or the AV|Gated
when mounting the sensor no more than 5 degrees up the side
of the pipe ) Mount the sensor onto the inside of the band with
5-50 ADS TRITON+ Manual
two M3 x 10-mm countersink screws, making sure the blunt
end (i.e., nose) of the sensor is facing the upstream edge of the
ring (edge opposite the cable tie holes). If mounting holes do
not exist on the band at or near the desired mounting location
for the sensor, drill holes in the band using a 7/32-inch (3-mm)
drill bit.
4.
(applies only when mounting the Peak Combo sensor between
15 and 45 degrees up the side of the pipe) Use the silt mount
adapter (ADS p/n 8000-0271) to attach the sensor to the band
in the following way:
❑ Seat the Peak Combo Sensor onto the slightly elevated
portion of the top of the silt mount adapter. The elevated
portion of the adapter should insert easily into the inset
portion of the bottom of the sensor. Orient the sensor so
that the sensor cable is exiting the sharp, or wedged, side
of the adapter.
❑ From the bottom of the adapter, use two M3 x 10mm
stainless steel flathead screws (do not substitute any other
screws) to secure the sensor to the adapter. The predrilled
screw holes in the adapter and in the bottom of the sensor
should be in alignment if the sensor is seated properly on
the adapter.
❑ Use two M3 x 10mm stainless steel flathead screws (do
not substitute any other screws) to secure the adapter to
the band at the appropriate location on the band to ensure
the sensor will be positioned between 15 and 45 degrees
up the side of the pipe (6:30 to 7:30 position) and below
the flow surface once installed. The nose of the sensor
should be facing the same direction as the upstream edge
of the band.
5.
Secure the sensor cables along the downstream edge of the
band according to the instructions in Securing the Cables to the
Band on page 5-53.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-51
6.
Place the band in the pipe upstream at least 12 inchees (305
mm) [same distance as Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor, when present] from the manhole invert.
Position the band on the left side of the pipe so that the sensors
will remain below the flow surface (during minimum flows)
and above the silt level.
7.
Orient the band so that one of the pre-drilled anchor bolt holes
is just above the flow surface.
8.
Spot drill the pipe wall through the hole, install a ¼-inch x 2
¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt, and secure the band to the
anchor bolt with a washer and nut.
Note: Make sure the submerged portion of the band is
flush with the pipe wall. If it is not, remove the band and
conform the band to the pipe.
9.
Install a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt, washer,
and nut below the flow surface 30 to 80 mm away from the
Peak Combo Sensor on each side. This will hold the sensor
securely against the pipe wall and prevent the end of the band
from twisting in the flow or catching debris.
10. Conform the portion of the band above the flow surface to the
pipe wall, and install an ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm)
anchor bolt, nut, and washer every 12 to 24 inches (305 to 610
mm) up to the top of the band.
5-52 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Completed ½-band mount in pipe
11. Measure the physical offset for the sensor by manually
measuring the depth of the flow from the bottom of the pipe to
the flow surface and then measuring the distance from the nose
(i.e., front end at the pipe surface) of the sensor to the flow
surface. Subtract the second measurement from the initial
depth of flow to determine the physical offset.
Note: There will not be a physical offset for the
AV|Gated sensor as it is always installed at the bottom,
center of the pipe.
Note: This value will be necessary when configuring the
monitor using the Qstart software.
12. Run the sensor cables from the sensor location in the pipe to
the monitor location in the manhole according to the
instructions in Securing the Sensor Cables in the Pipe and
Manhole on page 5-81.
Note: If the pipe is large and the sensor cable cannot
reach the pipe crown, attach the sensor cables to 0.5-inch
(12-mm) PVC tubing and anchor the tubing to the wall.
This will help prevent sensor damage during heavy flow.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-53
Securing the Cables to the Band
Securing the Peak Combo or AV|Gated Sensor cable to the band
helps prevent debris from collecting between the cable and the band
or catching on the loose cable. It also prevents the loose cables
from disrupting the flow.
Secure the cable in the following way:
1.
Starting at the appropriate sensor location, begin securing the
sensor cable with 4-inch (2-mm x 100-mm) cable ties through
the pre-drilled holes along the downstream (trailing) edge of
the band up the side of the band. Run the cable up the right
side of the band (on the downstream edge of the band).
Sensor cabling
2.
Continue securing the cables until reaching the Surface Combo
Sensor, Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, or top of the pipe.
3.
Pull the ties until they are taut.
Warning: Do not over-tighten the cable ties or kink the
sensor cables! The depth cable sheathes two components:
the electrical cables that operate the sensor and an air tube
that ventilates the sensor (when applicable). Overtightening the ties or kinking the cable can damage or
restrict the air tube, causing incorrect pressure depth
readings. In addition, make sure the connector-end of the
sensor is not kinked, does not contain moisture, and
includes an attached dryer tube filled with active blue
desiccant.
5-54 ADS TRITON+ Manual
4.
Use the diagonal cutters to cut off the excess portion of the
cable ties.
Mounting the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor
Two special installation methods are available for mounting the
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor and one for the Surface Combo Sensor:
⚫
Standard Mount This mount, the most common mounting
method in use today, is used for mounting the Surface Combo
Sensor or the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor in the pipe during
special installations.
⚫
Surcharge Mount This mount primarily is used for
mounting the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor in the manhole at sites
where the flow continually occurs within 2 inches (51 mm) of
the top of the pipe, pipe conditions and/or hydraulics prohibit
the installation of a sensor in the pipe, or surcharges frequently
occur. Surcharges are conditions where the flow completely
fills the pipe and extends up into the manhole.
Standard Mount
Mount the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor or the Surface Combo Sensor
using this method in the following way:
Note: Handle the sensor with care, and do not expose it
to extreme temperatures for an extended period of time.
Keep the sensor in its protective packaging until it is time
for installation. Avoid contacting the metal connector at
the end of the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor cable (or any other sharp object) with the Tefloncoated crystals on the sensor.
1.
Position the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
mounting plate in the center apex of the pipe, and scribe a mark
on both sides of the mounting plate.
2.
Center the 12-inch (305-mm) mounting band, allowing the
band to extend about 5.25 inches (133 mm) beyond each side
of the scribed location.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-55
3.
Conform one end of the curved band to the pipe configuration,
and spot drill to mark the bolt location.
4.
Remove the curved band, drill an anchor bolt hole, and gently
tap a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt into the
hole.
5.
Mount the curved band to the anchor bolt through the predrilled hole on the band, and hand-tighten a nut with washer to
the anchor bolt to secure the band.
Securing one end of the sensor mounting band
6.
Slide the sensor mounting plate (ADS p/n 8000-0307) onto the
band with the end of the plate with the keyholes facing
upstream and the two band slots facing up.
5-56 ADS TRITON+ Manual
MOUNTING BAND
SENSOR
MOUNTING
PLATE
Sliding the mounting plate for the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor onto the free end of the mounting band
Note: For applications that involve replacing a previous
version of the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor (for example, ADS
p/n 8K-CS3-V0-XX-30) with a new Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-D1-00-30) and a band already
exists and is secured in the pipe, use a sliding adapter
bracket (ADS p/n 8000-0299) to accommodate the new
sensor in the existing sensor mounting plate. Once the
previous sensor has been removed, slide the adapter
bracket into the groves on the existing plate from the
upstream end of the plate until the adapter bracket contacts
the backstop at the downstream end of the plate.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-57
PREVIOUS VERSION OF
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
SURFACE COMBO/
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
SLIDING ADAPTER BRACKET
Inserting Sliding Adapter Bracket into existing sensor mounting plate
7.
Align the sensor mounting plate with the scribe marks, and
conform the other end of the curved band with the pipe.
8.
Spot drill to mark an anchor bolt location, and mount another
¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt to the pipe.
9.
Hand-tighten a nut with washer to secure the other end of the
band.
Securing the other end of the band
Note: If the mounting plate has too much side play,
attach another anchor bolt approximately 1 inch (22 mm)
from the plate.
5-58 ADS TRITON+ Manual
10. Slide the sensor mounting plate along the metal band until it is
level (from side to side) with the flow surface and pipe crown,
and tighten the nuts securely with a nut driver. For more
information, refer to the instructions on leveling this sensor in
Installing the Ring in the Pipe beginning on page 5-29.
11. Install the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
onto the mounting plate by inserting the studs on the back of
the sensor into the keyholes on the mounting plate and sliding
the sensor back (in a downstream direction) until it is fully in
place. The sensor cable should exit the downstream edge of
the band.
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
SURFACE COMBO/ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
Fastening the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to the
mounting plate on the band
Note: For applications that involve using the sliding
adapter bracket to mount the new Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
onto an older, existing Ultrasonic Depth Sensor mounting
bracket, attach the sensor to the adapter bracket in the
same way it attaches to the new sensor mounting plate,
described in step 11 above.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-59
PREVIOUS VERSION OF
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
SLIDING ADAPTER BRACKET
SURFACE COMBO/ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
Attaching the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to the
Sliding Adapter Bracket
12. Confirm the sensor is still level. To protect the crystals on the
sensor, use a block of wood of uniform dimensions between the
level and the flat face of the horizontal, ultrasonic depth sensor
portion of the sensor!
13. Determine the physical offset for the Surface Combo Sensor or
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor by measuring the distance from the
crown (top) of the pipe to the face of the sensor (horizontal
surface with the two ultrasonic crystals on either sensor). This
value is required when configuring the monitor using the
Qstart software. Do not measure in reference to the the angled
surface velocity or surcharge velocity portions of the sensor.
Sensor Installation and Connection 5-60
Installing the Sensors in the Manhole
Structure
This section includes the procedures for performing installations in
the manhole structure for the following ADS TRITON+ sensors:
⚫
Long Range Depth Sensor
⚫
Surface Combo Sensor
⚫
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
Caution: Handle all sensors and cables with extreme
care. The sensors and cables contain delicate mechanisms
and electronics. Keep sharp objects away from sensor
cables, and avoid stepping or placing heavy objects on the
cable during installation. Avoid contacting the metal
connector at the end of the Surface Combo or Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor cable (or any other sharp object) with the
Teflon-coated crystals on the sensor.
Long Range Depth Sensor Installation
Performing a standard Long Range Depth Sensor installation
involves the following process:
⚫
Selecting an installation location
⚫
Gathering parts and supplies
⚫
Measuring manhole depth
⚫
Installing the Mounting Bar
⚫
Adding Extension Rods to the Mounting Bar (as needed)
⚫
Installing Wall Mount Bar (as needed)
⚫
Installing the sensor on the Mounting Bar
⚫
Installing the Submersion Sensor
⚫
Measuring the physical offset
5-61 ADS TRITON+® Manual
Selecting an Installation Location
Manhole structures with the following characteristics facilitate the
installation of Long Range Depth Sensor:
⚫
Manhole depth between 3 and 21 feet (914 – 6400 mm)
Note: The maximum range of the Long Range Depth
Sensor is 20 feet (6096 mm). Ensure the distance between
the bottom of the sensor and the manhole invert does not
exceed this distance.
⚫
Manhole invert visible from street or ground surface
⚫
Manhole with rungs (If there are no rungs in the manhole, drill
an anchor point into the manhole wall to secure the tether and
therefore the Mounting Bar in case it becomes dislodged.)
⚫
An iron manhole frame with a diameter between 21 inches
(530 mm) and 28 inches (710 mm) and a frame depth of 3
inches (76 mm) or more. Manhole frames greater than 28
inches (710 mm) in diameter require the use of Extension
Rods. See page 3-64, Installing the Mounting Bar, for more
details.
Note: Manhole locations that do not meet characteristics
mentioned above will require special mounting techniques
and possible manhole descent.
5-62 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Gathering Parts and Supplies
Gather the following equipment for the installation:
•
Grade Pole
•
J-Hook
•
Folding Carpenter’s Rule with a brass slide
•
36-inch (914-mm) Carpenter’s Level
Obtain the following supplies from ADS before performing the
Long Range Depth Sensor installation to prevent any costly delays.
When ordering, specify the TRITON+ monitor Long Range Depth
Sensor installation hardware. In addition, please indicate the type
of mounting hardware desired for mounting the monitor: mounting
bracket (wall/rim mount) or hook (rung mount).
Quantity
Description
ADS P/N
1
TRITON+ flow monitor (battery or externallypowered)
8000-FST-IM-GL,
8000-FST-IM-EPGL 1, 8000-FST-IM4VZ, or 8000-FSTIM-EP-4VZ 1
1
Monitor mounting bracket/flange (for mounting
monitor to manhole rim or wall)
I40–0009
3
Monitor mounting bracket bolt, hex, SS, M8 X
30mm
508058
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, flat, SS
517-8001254-00
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, lock, SS
517-8001274-00
1 as
needed
Hook, SS, 2-piece w/ hardware
(for hanging monitor on manhole rung;
Alternative to I40-0009)
8000-0021
1
Long Range Depth Sensor
8K-CS6-C1-10
1 as
needed
Mounting Bar
8000-0450
1 as
needed
Extension Rod
8000-0481
1 as
needed
Wall Mount
8000-0484
1 as
needed
IS Standard or Custom Sensor Extension Cable
for Long Range Depth Sensor
8000-0023–xxx 2
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-63
1
Models 8000-FST-IM-GL and 8000-FST-IM-4VZ include the 12-volt battery
pack; Models 8000-FST-IM-EP-GL and 8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ (for external power)
do not include the battery pack.
2
Extension cables can be ordered to specific lengths up to 300 ft. (91m). Note the
desired length (in feet) in the -xxx-- portion of the part number. Standard lengths
are 10 ft. (3.0m), 25 ft. (7.6m), 50 ft. (15.2m), 75 ft. (22.8m), 100 ft. (30.5m), 125 ft.
(38.1m), 150 ft. (45.7m), and 200 ft. (61.0m). All other lengths must be custom
ordered.
Measuring Manhole Depth
1. Tether Carpenter’s level or other flat, rigid item to keep from
losing it in the flow. This will be used as a measuring reference
point.
2. Extend Grade Pole outside of the manhole and confirm all latches
to keep from losing an unsecured section in the flow.
3. Double-check your Grade Pole scale. (Many pole-scales display
feet and inches while some are in fractions of feet.)
4. Place tethered level or other flat, rigid item across the open
manhole frame.
Placing Carpenter’s level across open manhole frame
5. Insert extended Grade Pole into the invert ensuring that pole end is
in contact with the absolute bottom surface through any silt or
debris that may be present.
5-64 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Extending Grade Pole to absolute bottom surface of invert
6. Read Grade Pole measurement from point where the Grade Pole
crosses the bottom of level or other flat, rigid item. Record
measurement.
Recording measurement for manhole depth
Installing the Mounting Bar
The Mounting Bar is designed to securely position the Long Range
Depth Sensor within a standard manhole frame that is between 21
inches (533 mm) and 28 inches (711 mm).
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-65
Note: For installations within wider manhole frames,
refer to Adding Extension Rods to the Mounting Bar for
information on extending the mounting bar before
proceeding with the installation. If the manhole or
manhole frame will not accommodate a Mounting Bar
with or without extensions, a Wall Mount Bar must be
installed. Refer to Installing the Wall Mount Bar for
installation instructions.
Perform the following procedure to install the Mounting Bar:
1.
Hang large loop from the Mounting Bar tether behind top rung.
Passing Mounting Bar tether behind top rung
2.
Use the J-Hook to pull the large loop under the rung and back
up towards you.
Using J-Hook to pull tether up from top rung
3.
Pass the un-tethered end of the Mounting Bar through the large
loop, cinching the tether to the rung.
5-66 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Passing un-tethered end through large loop
Cinching the tether to the top rung
4.
Position the bar in the manhole frame so the sensor has a clear
view of the manhole invert.
Perform the following adjustments to ensure proper sensor
positioning:
❑ Ensure the point of measurement is properly positioned
over the invert and flow.
Point of Measurement
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-67
❑ If the invert runs through the center of the manhole, the
Mounting Bar should be installed parallel to the flow.
Parallel Mount
❑ If the invert is offset from the center, rotate the Mounting
Bar appropriately so the sensor housing can be pointed
directly at the invert.
Mount Rotation to Offset Accommodation
❑ If the invert takes a bend as it runs through the manhole,
rotate the Mounting Bar appropriately to accommodate the
bend.
5-68 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Mount Rotation to Accommodate Bend
5.
With the Mounting Bar in proper invert-orientation, turn knob
to extend rod to just short of manhole frame walls. Position the
bar so that the distance between it and the street surface is 8
inches (200 mm) to 12 inches (305 mm) and is mounted within
the manhole frame.
Note: Mount the bar sufficiently deep to prevent it from
being dislodged when the manhole lid is opened.
Positioning the Mounting Bar in the manhole frame
Note: The Mounting Bar may be positioned at greater
than 12 inches (305 mm) from the street level; however,
the goal of the installation should be to maximize the level
of surcharge the sensor can measure.
Sensor Installation and Connection
6.
5-69
Reference the bubble level as you tighten the knob on the
Mounting Bar in the manhole frame to ensure that the bar will
provide a level sensor mounting surface.
Ensuring Mounting Bar is level
7.
Twist the locking nut counterclockwise to extend the mounting
bar, spanning the diameter of the frame. Ensure the bar is
secure by grabbing and vigorously pulling on it to confirm it
will not move.
Confirming secure positioning
5-70 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Adding Extension Rods to the Mounting Bar
Extension Rod
If the manhole is larger than standard-sized openings, utilize one
Mounting Bar Extension Rod (ADS p/n 8000-0481) for frames
extending 28 inches (711 mm) to 36 inches (914 mm) and two
Mounting Bar Extension Rods for frames 36 inches (914 mm) to 44
inches (1118 mm).
Add Extension Rods to the Mounting Bar as follows:
1.
From the un-tethered end of the Mounting bar, carefully pry
the black rubber foot off the end of the gray threaded plug.
Removing the black rubber foot
2.
Unscrew and remove the gray threaded plug.
Removing the gray threaded plug
3.
Screw and hand-tighten the Extension Rod onto the end of the
Mounting Bar.
Screwing the Extension Rod onto the Mounting Bar
Sensor Installation and Connection
4.
5-71
Screw and tighten the gray plug onto the end of the Extension
Rod.
Screwing the gray plug onto the Extension Rod
5.
Replace the black rubber foot.
Replacing the black rubber foot
Note: When adding two Extension Rods, repeat the
process on the tethered end, ensuring that the Mounting
Bar tether remains secured at the end after the Rod is
added.
Installing Wall Mount Bar
Wall Mount Bar with bracket
If the manhole or manhole frame will not accommodate a standard
Mounting Bar with or without extensions, utilize the Wall Mount
Bar (ADS p/n 8000-0484) for installation.
Install the Wall Mount Bar as follows:
5-72 ADS TRITON+ Manual
1.
2.
3.
Select location of Wall Mount Bar installation. Make sure the
sensor will have a clear view of the invert. Refer to Step 4 of
Installing the Mounting Bar to ensure proper sensor
positioning.
Place the Wall Mount Bar bracket on selected location,
ensuring bar will be level, and mark screw holes for drilling or
screwing anchor points.
Secure the Wall Mount Bar bracket to the manhole wall with
anchor screws for each of the bracket holes.
Securing bracket to the manhole wall
4.
Screw the Wall Mount Bar into the bracket secured to the wall.
Screwing Wall Mount Bar into installed bracket
Installing the Long Range Depth Sensor onto the
Mounting Bar
The user-friendly design of the Long Range Depth Sensor is
configured to facilitate easy installation.
Note: The same steps below also apply to installing the
Long Range Depth Sensor on the Wall Mount Bar.
1.
Open the Long Range Sensor thumb-screw and flip the top of
the shroud bracket back.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-73
Unscrewing and opening shroud bracket
2.
Position sensor under Mounting Bar and bring hinge over bar
and tighten thumb screw.
Positioning and tightening sensor bracket to Mounting Bar
3.
Ensure that the bar remains level and the bubble on the sensor
is centered.
Maintaining proper level
5-74 ADS TRITON+ Manual
4.
Double-check that the bar is suspended tightly at anchor points.
Long Range Sensor Fully Installed
Installing the Submersion Sensor on Manhole
Frame
Attach the Submersion Sensor to the manhole frame as close to the
top of the rim as possible. The Submersion Sensor senses when
flow depths reach it, and will cause the TRITON+ to send out a
Submerged alarm when the sensor goes under water.
Make sure the
wire from the
Submersion
Sensor is
hanging from
the bottom of
the sensor
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-75
Warning: The Submersion Sensor has a strong magnet
for adherence to the manhole frame. Keep the sensor away
from metal objects as it may potentially cause damage!
Additionally, do not place the Submersion Sensor near a
computerized device with a magnetic hard drive like PCs
and laptops!
Measuring the Physical Offset
Be sure to tether level or other rigid straight item in a fixed position
to keep from losing it in the manhole structure.
1.
Place tethered level or other flat, rigid item across the open
manhole frame.
Note: During installation, or if re-installation is required,
always measure the physical offset making sure to
reactivate the monitor if the measurement has changed.
Refer to Chapter 6 Configuration and Activation for more
information.
2.
Place your fingers on the edge of the sensor and place
Carpenter’s Rule on your fingers so that the edge of the sensor
and the end of the Carpenter’s Rule are the same.
Placing Carpenter’s Rule at base of sensor edge
3.
Read the Carpenter’s Rule measurement from point where the
Carpenter’s Rule crosses the bottom of level or other flat, rigid
straight item. Record measurement.
5-76 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Recording physical offset at measurement intersection
Surcharge Mount (applies to the Ultrasonic
Depth and Surface Combo Sensors)
For a site that may experience surcharge conditions, mount the
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor or Surface Combo Sensor on the manhole
wall directly above the opening of the incoming pipe. This will
ensure the sensor measures the range above the flow surface at the
location the flow enters the manhole. This method of mounting the
sensor requires a special surcharge bracket (ADS p/n I40-0010) and
sliding adapter bracket (ADS p/n 8000-0299). Mount the sensor in
the following way:
Note: Handle the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor and the
Surface Combo Sensor with care. Do not expose the
sensors to extreme temperatures for an extended period of
time. Keep the sensor in its protective packaging until it is
time for installation.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-77
Surcharge Mount
1.
Determine the appropriate height at which to mount the
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor portion of the surcharge bracket
(ADS p/n I40-0010). The sensor attaches to the sliding adapter
bracket (ADS p/n 8000-0299) that slides into the groves of the
mounting plate at the lower portion of the surcharge bracket.
When making this determination, keep in mind that the
maximum range of the sensor is 10 feet (3.05 m).
2.
Press the bracket firmly against the manhole wall.
3.
Identify the three pre-drilled holes at the top of the bracket, and
spot drill the manhole wall through the middle hole with a drill.
4.
Remove the bracket, and drill and mount a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch
(M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt.
5.
Secure the top of the bracket to the manhole wall with a washer
and nut.
6.
Push up on the bottom portion of the bracket until the sensor
portion of the bracket is level.
7.
Hold the bracket firmly in place against the manhole wall.
5-78 ADS TRITON+ Manual
8.
Identify the three pre-drilled holes at the bottom of the bracket,
and spot drill the manhole wall through the middle hole with a
drill.
9.
Rotate the bracket 90, and drill and mount a ¼-inch x 2 ¼inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt.
10. Secure the bottom of the bracket with a washer and nut.
11. Slide the sliding adaptor bracket (ADS p/n 8000-0299) into the
mounting plate on the surcharge bracket.
ANGLED SURCHARGE BRACKET
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
SLIDING ADAPTER BRACKET
Inserting the Sliding Adapter Bracket into the sensor mounting plate on the
surcharge bracket
12. Attach the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to the sliding adapter
bracket by inserting the studs on the back of the sensor into the
keyholes on the adapter bracket and sliding the sensor back
until it is fully in place. The sensor cable should be exiting
toward the manhole wall.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-79
ANGLED SURCHARGE BRACKET
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
SLIDING ADAPTER BRACKET
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
Attaching the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to the Sliding Adapter Bracket
Note: Secure the sensor cable with cable ties to keep the
sensor in place.
13. Verify that the sensor portion of the bracket is level using a
carpenter’s level. To protect the crystals on the sensor, use a
block of wood of uniform dimensions between the level and the
flat face of the horizontal, ultrasonic depth sensor portion of
the sensor! If it is slightly out of level, make horizontal
adjustments to the bottom portion of the bracket by moving it
to the left or right. The oval bottom mounting holes allow
minor horizontal adjustments.
14. Drill and mount a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor
bolt in one of the other pre-drilled holes at the top portion of
the bracket for extra security.
5-80 ADS TRITON+ Manual
15. Confirm that the sensor is level. To protect the crystals on the
sensor, use a block of wood of uniform dimensions between the
level and the horizontal portion of the sensor!
16. Measure the physical offset for the sensor (the distance from
the crown (top) of the pipe to the face of the sensor). Enter this
distance as a negative value. For example, if it is 24 inches
(610 mm) from the top of the pipe to the face of the sensor in
the manhole, you would enter -24 inches (-610 mm) for the
physical offset.
Note: This value will be necessary when configuring the
monitor using the Qstart software.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-81
Securing the Sensor Cables in the
Pipe and Manhole
Securing the sensor cables from the ring (or band, when
applicable), along the pipe crown, and up the manhole helps
prevent debris from collecting on sagging cables or between the
cables and the pipe crown.
Do not allow sensor cables to hang down in the pipe or sag in the
manhole. Loose cables could present a safety hazard in the
manhole or increase the potential for sensor or monitor damage to
occur. The cables should be secured along the pipe crown and
manhole wall under all circumstances.
Secure the cables from the ring (or band) to the monitor location in
the manhole in the following way:
1.
Neatly bundle the cables together with an 8-inch (4-mm x 200mm) cable tie attached to a plastic anchor installed at the top of
the pipe.
❑ Drill a hole of the appropriate size for the shank of the
plastic anchor in the pipe crown. Refer to instructions with
the anchors.
❑ Drive the plastic anchor into the pipe with a hammer until
it is flush and secure.
❑ Run the cable tie through the loop in the plastic anchor and
around the cables.
❑ Tighten the cable tie around the cables, and cut off the
excess cable tie material.
Note: If a plastic anchor will not serve as an adequate
anchor for securing the cable bundle based on the structure
of the pipe, install a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm)
anchor bolt instead.
Warning: Do not over-tighten the cable ties or kink the
sensor cables! The depth cable sheathes two components:
the electrical cables that operate the sensor and an air tube
that ventilates the sensor (when applicable). Overtightening the ties or kinking the cable can damage or
5-82 ADS TRITON+ Manual
restrict the air tube, causing incorrect pressure depth
readings.
2.
Secure the cables with a cable tie and plastic anchor every 18
to 24 inches (457 to 610 mm) along the pipe crown (when
necessary) from the ring to the manhole. If plastic anchors
will not serve as adequate anchors based on the structure of
the pipe, install M6 x 55-mm anchor bolts instead.
3. Secure the cables every 18 to 24 inches (457 to 610 mm) up
the side of the manhole to the monitor location. Loose cables
could present a manhole safety hazard or increase the
potential for sensor or monitor damage to occur. If plastic
anchors will not serve as adequate anchors based on the
structure of the manhole wall, install ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6
x 55-mm) anchor bolts instead.
Warning: Make sure the connector-end of the sensor is
not kinked, does not contain moisture, and includes an
attached dryer tube filled with active blue desiccant.
Securing the sensors cables along the pipe and into the manhole
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-83
Connecting the Sensors and Sampler
to the Monitor
After installing the ring and sensors and securing the sensor cables
to the pipe and manhole wall, connect the sensor cables to the
appropriate ports on the top of the monitor. The ports that receive
the sensors are labeled Channel 1 and Channel 2.
The TRITON+ supports the connection of two sensors in any
combination, including two of the same sensor type, to the channel
ports. However, to simplify the installation and configuration
process, ADS recommends developing a system or convention to
ensure consistency when attaching the sensors to the channel ports
and assigning the corresponding channels to the sensor devices in
Qstart.
Establish a priority or order in which particular sensors are assigned
to a specific channel and, when applicable and possible, correspond
the channel number to the monitoring point. For example, consider
always assigning the AV|Gated Sensor to Channel 1 and the second
sensor to Channel 2.
The TRITON+ also enables the user to connect a water quality
sampler to the monitor for flow proportional or level-based
sampling operations. ADS offers three 25-foot (7.6-m) cable
options for connecting the sampler to the monitor based on the type
of sampling. The No Pre-Wired Connector option can allow for
other types of applications, such as triggering a camera.
⚫
No Pre-Wired Connector (ADS p/n 8000-0348) on application
(non-monitor) end of the cable
⚫
Flow Proportional (ADS p/n 8000-0348-01)
⚫
Level Actuation (ADS p/n 8000-0348-02)
Note: For more information on Sampler Cable
connections and specifications, see Appendix E.
Note: A converter may be necessary to attach the sampler
cable to the monitor.
Connect the sensor and sampler (when applicable) cables to the
monitor ports in the following way:
5-84 ADS TRITON+ Manual
1.
Place the monitor in an upright position to view the monitor
connector ports.
A
CH
NN E L
SENSORS
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
WAKE
CPU
SENS
0518
II 1 G
ST AT US
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga Rev
Sira 09ATEX2027X DATE
SIR 006
S/N
CSA 2013 2671180
Ex ia IIB T3 (152°C)
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
IECEx SIR09.0020X
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
See CONTROL DWG 8000BK0009
Voir SCHEMA DE CONTROLE
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
Utilisez uniquement la batterie 8000-0043
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
A
N
A
CONTAINS CELL XMTR
FCC ID: R17HE910
T ENN
C
O
MM
R
TM
W
+ EX T P
R
w w w.a d s e n v.c o m
Cable connector ports
2.
Visually inspect each sensor connector and monitor connector
port for damaged or broken pins. Replace a monitor or sensor
with defective ports or connectors.
3.
Visually inspect each sensor and monitor connector port for
debris and moisture. Clean off any debris, and dry any
surface moisture. Compressed air is useful for removing
moisture from the inside of the connectors or ports (pin and
socket surfaces).
4.
Verify that the waterproof seal is present inside each sensor
cable end connector. The bright orange (or green), rubber seal
should sit at the bottom of the connector with the pins
protruding through the seal.
5.
Connect each sensor cable to the appropriate port. Tighten
each rotating connector collar in a clockwise direction until it
clicks, and verify that it is seated correctly.
Sensor Installation and Connection
5-85
6.
(applicable only when performing water quality sampling)
Connect the appropriate sampler cable to the COMM + EXT
PWR port. Tighten the rotating connector collar in a
clockwise direction until it clicks, and verify that it is seated
correctly.
7.
For locations exhibiting the presence of hydrogen sulfide
and/or high moisture, provide added protection by wrapping
the connection with mastic tape.
8.
Seal any unused connectors with protective caps. If
necessary, obtain additional caps from ADS.
Note: An air valve is present in the monitor top. This
valve exists only for testing purposes during the
manufacturing process. Do not attempt to fill the monitor
with air or pressurize the monitor!
Securing the Dryer Tube to the Monitor
The Peak Combo, AV|Gated, and Surface Combo sensors each
contain a pressure depth sensor with an associated dryer tube. For
each combo sensor connected to the monitor, you must secure the
corresponding dryer tube (attached to a cable running from the
sensor connector) to the monitor in the following way:
1.
Attach the dryer tube from the pressure depth sensor in the
vertical position to the monitor handle using cable ties. Make
sure the clear, flexible tubing coming from the sensor
connector to the top of the dryer tube is not kinked. If
necessary, use a loose cable tie to hold it in an unkinked
position.
5-86 ADS TRITON+ Manual
COMBO SENSOR
CONNECTOR
DRYER TUBE
SECURED WITH
CABLE TIES
TO MONITOR
TRITON+
MONITOR
END CAP
Securing the dryer tube to the monitor using cable ties
2.
Make sure the black end cap on the dryer tube is removed
before installing the monitor in the manhole.
3.
(applies only when a second dryer tube is present) Repeat
steps 1 and 2 for the other dryer tube, but attach it to the other
vertical portion of the handle on the opposite side of the
monitor.
6-1
CHAPTER 6
External Power
An ADS TRITON+® (models 8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ and 8000FST-IM-EP-GL) supporting wireless communication can receive
power from an external DC power source. However, any
connection of external power to the monitor must occur through an
external power and communication unit (ExPAC, ADS p/n 38000377), an external Modbus interface unit (XBUS™, ADS p/n 80000427), or an external input/output unit (XIO™, ADS p/n 800-0400)
for compliance with IS certification.
Note: When installing an ExPAC, XBUS, or XIO, ADS
recommends locating the unit in close proximity to the DC
power source to maximize the net power available to the
unit.
Note: The externally-powered TRITON+, ExPAC,
XBUS, and XIO are not equipped with backup power.
Therefore, in the event of an interruption or loss of power
at the power source, the monitor will discontinue taking
readings until power is restored. However, a loss of power
will not result in a loss of data. The monitor will retain all
stored data in memory.
6-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Installation
A typical field installation involving external power requires the
following:
•
An AC mains power line terminated at a pole or post close to
the manhole in which the monitor is installed
•
An AC distribution device (i.e., disconnect, fuse, or breaker
box) on the pole/post
•
An earth ground rod installed next to the pole/post bonded to
the AC distribution device
•
An AC to 24-volt DC converter (i.e., power supply). ADS
recommends a power supply available through ADS (p/n
508293), which works with worldwide AC power (94 – 240
VAC, 50 – 60 Hz). This power supply is provided
automatically as part of the XIO and XBUS, but must be
ordered for the ExPAC, when a power supply is required.
However, please note that the customer may use another ACto-DC converter/power supply, if desired, to support the
ExPAC, provided it can supply from 9 to 36 volts of power at a
minimum of 15 watts.
•
A power cable running between the external DC source (i.e.,
power supply) and the ExPAC power input. The customer
must supply this cabling of the appropriate length and
specifications
•
A properly rated enclosure to house and protect the ExPAC
and power supply
Note: Applications involving an XIO or XBUS do not
require an additional power cable or an enclosure because
they are included. The power is pre-run between the
power supply and ExPAC inside the XIO enclosure.
•
A communication cable (ADS p/n 8000-0378-xx, where xx
represents the required length of the cable) running between
the ExPAC/XBUS/XIO and the monitor
External Power
•
6-3
A 10-gauge (4 mm2) earth ground wire (included in external
power grounding kit, ADS p/n 8000-0434-xx, where xx
represents the required length of the wire) running between the
ExPAC/XBUS/XIO and the monitor
Note: All work required to run AC power to the pole and
wire the power into an approved AC distribution device
(i.e., a disconnect, fuse, or breaker) should be performed
by a licensed electrician. Typically, an electrical permit
from the owner of the collection system or local power
authority is required to install a pole or electrical
equipment next to a monitor location.
DC Power Requirements and Consumption
To run on external power, the TRITON+ system requires a power
source capable of supplying between 9 and 36 volts and a minimum
of 15 watts as measured/available at the ExPAC (not at the power
source output). ADS offers a power supply (ADS p/n 508293) for
this application. However, if you choose not to use this
recommended power supply, the alternate power supply must be a
high-quality industrial-type power supply with ripple no greater
than 250mV P-P. When long cable runs are required, size the
supply and cabling to ensure that line losses do not reduce the net
power available to the ExPAC.
To support TRITON+ monitors running in continuous mode, the
external DC power source must be capable of accommodating the
following system requirements concerning power consumption:
Note: The power to the monitor is ATEX/IECEx I.S.
compliant at 8 to 11.8 VDC.
Following are the power requirements for monitors that
communicate wirelessly and obtain power through an ExPAC:
•
Monitor in Sleep Mode with Modem Power On 26 mA
•
Monitor in Sleep Mode with Modem Power Off 25 mA
6-4
ADS TRITON+ Manual
•
Monitor Firing Sensors during Measurement Cycle
without Wireless Communications 110 mA
•
Monitor Firing Sensors during Measurement Cycle
with Wireless Communications Idle 140 mA
•
Monitor Firing Sensors during Measurement Cycle
with Wireless Communications Active (<10
milliseconds) 360 mA
•
Wireless Modem Communications Idle 110 mA
•
Wireless Modem during Data Collection (147 blocks
of data over 150 seconds) 130 mA
•
RS-485 (ExPAC) Modbus Communications (updating
every 2 seconds) 81 mA
•
USB (ExPAC) Communications Idle 86 mA
•
USB (ExPAC) Communications during Data
Collection (147 blocks of data over 50 seconds) 90
mA
Note: Measurement cycle involves firing Peak Combo
Sensor and Surface Combo Sensor and running MLI.
Mounting the XIO or XBUS
Note: These instructions apply only to applications
involving an XIO or XBUS. If the monitor will not
receive external power through an XIO or XBUS, proceed
to the next section, Mounting the Recommended Power
Supply.
Mount and secure the XIO or XBUS in such a way that takes into
account the specific environment in which it will be located. For
outdoor installation, mount it in such a way that will provide the
best protection against the elements and excessive heat or cold.
The operating temperature range for the XIO/XBUS is -14 to 122
F (-10 to 50 C). Locate the enclosure under an awning or other
structure to prevent direct sun exposure. For indoor installation,
External Power
6-5
mount the XIO/XBUS in a location that prevents tampering or
potential damage from occurring.
1.
Turn over the XIO/XBUS, and locate the four holes on the
back of the unit.
2.
Attach the four mounting brackets to the back of the
XIO/XBUS using the mounting bracket screws. The brackets
and screws are included with the XIO/XBUS. Refer to the
following figure for details on how to secure the mounting
brackets to the unit.
XIO/XBUS
MOUNTING BRACKET
MOUNTING BRACKET
SCREW
Attaching the mounting brackets to the back of the XIO/XBUS
3.
Identify the location on the wall, other solid structure, or rack
at which you want to mount the XIO/XBUS.
4.
Secure the XIO/XBUS to the surface or rack through the
mounting brackets using appropriate fasteners (supplied by the
customer).
6-6
ADS TRITON+ Manual
XIO/XBUS
HOLES ON
VERTICAL SURFACE
MOUNTING SCREWS
Mounting the XIO/XBUS to the designated surface or structure
Mounting the Recommended Power Supply
Note: For applications involving an XIO or XBUS, you
can disregard these instructions for mounting the power
supply because both the XIO and XBUS come from the
factory with the power supply pre-mounted to a DIN rail
in the XIO/XBUS enclosure.
Mount and secure the power supply in such a way that takes into
account the specific environment in which it will be located. For
outdoor installation, mount it inside a secure, weatherproof
enclosure (minimum NEMA IP66) that will provide the best
protection against the elements and excessive heat or cold. The
operating temperature range for the power supply is -40 to 158 F
External Power
6-7
(-40 to 70 C). Locate the enclosure under an awning or other
structure to prevent direct sun exposure. For indoor installation,
mount the power supply inside an enclosure or in a location that
prevents tampering or potential damage from occurring.
Note: ADS recommends mounting the power supply and
the ExPAC in the same enclosure or in close proximity.
The power supply is designed for mounting on a 35- x 7.5-mm DIN
rail in the following way:
1.
Notice the inset on the back of the power supply that includes a
wedge at the top and a small notch at the bottom to secure the
power supply to the DIN rail. Slide the top edge of the DIN
rail up into the top wedge on the back of the power supply.
Sliding the top edge of the DIN rail into the wedge on the back of the power
supply
2.
Notice the sliding tab running down the middle of the back of
the power supply. Press down on that tab to slide the tab down
vertically. You also can slide the tab down using the end of a
flathead screwdriver inserted into a slot on the tab located at
the top of the power supply. Hold the tab down to prevent the
6-8
ADS TRITON+ Manual
notch at the bottom of the inset from blocking bottom of the
DIN rail.
Pressing down the sliding tab from the top
3.
Push the bottom edge of the rail into the inset on the back of
the power supply and release the sliding tab. The spring
mechanism will allow the notch to return to its original
position, completely securing the power supply to the DIN rail.
External Power
Power supply firmly secured to the DIN rail
Front view of power supply mounted to DIN rail
6-9
6-10
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Mounting the ExPAC
Note: For applications involving an XIO or XBUS, you
can disregard these instructions for mounting the ExPAC
because both the XIO and XBUS come from the factory
with the ExPAC pre-mounted to a DIN rail inside the
XIO/XBUS enclosure.
Mount and secure the ExPAC in such a way that takes into account
the specific environment in which the unit will be located. For
outdoor installation, mount it inside a secure, weatherproof
enclosure (minimum NEMA IP66) that will provide the best
protection against the elements and excessive heat or cold. The
operating temperature range for the ExPAC is -4 to 122 F (-20 to
50 C). Therefore, make sure the enclosure is also located under an
awning or other structure to prevent direct sun exposure. For
indoor installation, mount the ExPAC inside an enclosure or in a
location that prevents tampering or potential damage from
occurring.
The ExPAC is designed for mounting on a 35- x 7.5-mm DIN rail
or securing to another surface or structure through the four
predrilled holes on the sides of the unit.
Mounting the ExPAC to a DIN Rail
Mount the ExPAC to an existing DIN rail in an enclosure or on a
rack in the following way:
1.
Make sure the red, plastic tabs on the back of the ExPAC are in
the open (or extended) position. To open the tabs, insert a
flathead screwdriver into the inset on the triangular portion of
the tabs (from the front of the unit) and press upward until it
clicks and pops up slightly.
External Power
6-11
ExPAC with red mounting tabs – left tab displayed in closed (locked)
position; right tab displayed in open (released) position
SCREWDRIVER
RED TABS
ExPAC
Using a screwdriver to open (release) the red tabs
2.
Notice the horizontal inset across the back of the ExPAC.
Slide the lower edge of the DIN rail down into the small
groove at the bottom of the inset on the back of the ExPAC.
6-12
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Inserting the lower edge of the DIN rail into the bottom groove on the back of
the ExPAC
3.
Press the top edge of the DIN rail flush against the back of the
ExPAC completely into the inset.
Pressing the upper edge of the DIN rail against the back of the ExPAC
External Power
4.
6-13
Press down the red tabs (using your finger or a screwdriver)
until they click into place, securing the ExPAC to the DIN rail.
Tabs in closed (locked) position, securing the ExPAC to the DIN rail
Front view of ExPAC mounted to DIN rail
6-14
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Securing the ExPAC using Fasteners
If a DIN rail is not available, secure the ExPAC to a solid surface or
structure using suitable
(i.e., screws)
through the four
ExPACfasteners
MOUNTED
TO WALL
predrilled holes on the outer edges of the unit.
Mounting the ExPAC directly to a wall or other structure using screws
through the 4 pre-drilled holes in the unit
External Power
6-15
Wiring the AC Power Source to the
Recommended Power Supply
Note: The following instructions apply only when using
the ADS XIO, ADS XBUS, or the XP Power power
supply recommended by ADS (p/n 508293). This power
supply is also used in the XIO and XBUS. When using
another third-party power supply, refer to the vendor’s
instructions for the proper connection procedures.
The first step in running external power to the monitor involves
wiring the cable coming from the AC power source to the power
supply.
Wire the AC power cable to the power supply in the following way:
1.
Determine the appropriate length and construction of AC
power cable required to run from the external power source to
the power supply. Customer-supplied cabling may be used.
WARNING: When hard-wiring to the AC supply, ensure
that the AC source is de-energized and that all applicable
lockout/tagout and other electrical safety measures are
followed. In addition, do not turn on power until all
wiring and connections are complete, from the AC source
to the TRITON+ monitor.
2.
Run the cable from the AC power source to the power supply.
3.
Loosen and prepare the wires from the cable for connection to
the power supply.
4.
Open the door to the XIO or XBUS by releasing the two
latches or to the other enclosure housing the power supply, as
applicable.
5.
Feed the power cable up through a cable gland in the
XIO/XBUS, or other enclosure. If the power supply is inside
an XIO or XBUS, run the cable through the cable gland on the
right. You may need to loosen the plastic nut on the cable
gland to allow cable entry.
6-16
ADS TRITON+ Manual
XIO/XBUS
AC POWER CABLE
CABLE GLAND
Feeding AC power cable through XIO/XBUS cable gland
Note: When positioning the cable inside the XIO, XBUS,
or other enclosure, maintain a small space between the
cable and the right side of the ExPAC.
6.
Loosen the screws on the AC input terminals at the bottom,
front of the power supply.
External Power
6-17
POWER SUPPLY
AC TERMINAL BLOCK
Location of AC input terminal block on power supply
7.
Connect the power cable wires to the terminals on the power
supply by running each wire through the appropriate terminal
hole in the bottom of the power supply and tightening the
corresponding terminal screw:
❑ Connect the hot (typically black or red) wire from the
power cable to the line (L) terminal on the power supply.
❑ Connect the neutral (typically white) wire from the power
cable to the neutral (N) terminal on the power supply.
❑ Connect the earth ground (typically green) wire from the
power cable or electrical panel chassis to the earth ground
( ) terminal on the power supply.
6-18
ADS TRITON+ Manual
AC TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS
Hot
Ground
Neutral
Input terminal connections on power supply for AC cable
Wiring the Power Supply to the ExPAC
Note: The XIO and XBUS both come from the factory
with the ExPAC and XP Power power supply pre-wired in
the XIO/XBUS enclosure. Therefore, for applications
involving the XIO or XBUS, proceed to the next section,
Running the Ground Wire. Instructions for installing and
wiring the power supply to the ExPAC have not been
included for applications involving an XIO or XBUS.
The next step in connecting the monitor to external power involves
running two wires between the power supply and the ExPAC. ADS
recommends using 18- to 22-gauge stranded wire. However, for
runs longer than 20 feet, use 14-gauge wire.
External Power
Connect the wires to the power supply and the ExPAC in the
following way:
1.
Strip the individual wires on both ends to prepare for
connecting to the terminals on the hardware.
2.
Loosen the screws on one of the –V and one of the +V DC
output terminals (front, top corner) on the power supply.
DC OUTPUT TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS
-V +V DC OK
POWER SUPPLY
DC output terminals on power supply
6-19
6-20
ADS TRITON+ Manual
3.
Loosen the screws on the +, -, and
DC INPUT terminal
connector on the ExPAC (top, right). Refer also to the wiring
label on top of the ExPAC.
DC INPUT TERMINALS
+
_
GND
ExPAC
DC input terminals on ExPAC
4.
Insert the end of one wire into the hole corresponding to the –V
DC output terminal on the power supply, and tighten the
associated terminal screw. Then, insert the other end of the
same wire into the hole corresponding to the negative (-) DC
input terminal on the ExPAC, and tighten the associated
terminal screw.
5.
Insert the end of the other wire into the hole corresponding to
the +V DC output terminal on the power supply, and tighten
the associated terminal screw. Then, insert the other end of the
same wire into the hole corresponding to the positive (+) DC
input terminal on the ExPAC, and tighten the associated
terminal screw.
External Power
DC OUTPUT TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS
POWER SUPPLY
Wires exiting DC output terminal on power supply
6-21
6-22
ADS TRITON+ Manual
DC INPUT TERMINALS
TO POWER SUPPLY
+
_
GND
ExPAC
Positive and negative wires entering DC input terminal connector on ExPAC
Running the Ground Wires
Ground wires are required for all external power applications: one
running from the ExPAC to the earth ground and one running from
the ExPAC to the monitor. The procedure for installing these wires
varies slightly based on whether you are using the XIO, XBUS, or
another enclosure to house the ExPAC.
The XIO and XBUS both come from the factory with a short
ground wire running from the ExPAC to one of two ground
terminal blocks that are adjacent to the ExPAC. For these
applications, you must run a ground wire from one of the ground
terminal blocks to the existing earth ground outside the XIO/XBUS
and then run another ground wire from the other ground terminal
block to the ground connection facility on the TRITON+ monitor.
The ground connection facility represents the specific location on
External Power
6-23
the monitor top at which the ground wire from the ExPAC
terminates.
When using an ExPAC, you first must install two ground terminal
blocks next to the ExPAC and run a short ground wire from the
ExPAC to one of two ground terminal blocks adjacent to the
ExPAC. Then, you must run a ground wire from one of the ground
terminal blocks to the existing earth ground outside the applicable
enclosure and run another ground wire from the other ground
terminal block to the TRITON+ monitor’s ground connection
facility.
The 10-gauge ground wire that runs between a ground terminal
block and the monitor is included in an external power grounding
kit available through ADS (p/n 8000-0434-xxx). This kit is
required for all external power applications. For the ground wire
that runs between a ground terminal block and the existing earth
ground, ADS recommends using at least a 12-gauge ground wire.
For applications that do not include the XIO or XBUS, you must
acquire two ground terminal blocks that can accommodate 18- to
10-gauge wires and obtain an 18-gauge ground wire to run from the
ExPAC to a ground terminal block.
Install the ground wiring in the following way:
1.
(applies only to applications without an XIO or XBUS)
Perform the following steps to prepare the ExPAC before
running the two primary ground wires:
❑ Mount two ground terminal blocks on the existing DIN
rail or other suitable structure to the right of the ExPAC.
Remember, you must use terminal blocks that can
accommodate 18- to 10-gauge ground wire.
Note: If you are not mounting the ground terminal blocks
to a metal DIN rail, make sure they are mounted to a
structure or intersect in such a way that ensures that all the
ground wires attached to both terminal blocks share a
common electrical connection.
6-24
ADS TRITON+ Manual
❑ Loosen the screw corresponding to the earth ground ( )
terminal on the DC INPUT terminal connector on the
ExPAC. Insert one end of the 18-gauge ground wire into
the terminal, and tighten the screw.
DC INPUT TERMINALS
18-Gauge GND wire
ExPAC
18-gauge ground wire inserted into DC input terminal on ExPAC
❑ Loosen the terminal screw corresponding to the top
terminal of one of the new ground terminal blocks. Insert
the other end of the 18-gauge ground wire into the
terminal and tighten the screw.
External Power
6-25
18 Gauge GND Wire
ExPAC
DC Input Terminal
Ground Terminal Blocks
Inserting the 18-gauge ground wire into the top terminal of one of the ground
terminal blocks
2.
Loosen the terminal screw corresponding to the bottom
terminal of one of the ground terminal blocks next to the
ExPAC, and insert one end of the 12-gauge ground wire into
the terminal and tighten the screw.
6-26
ADS TRITON+ Manual
18-Gauge GND Wire
from
ExPAC
DC Input Terminal
Ground Terminal Blocks
12-Gauge GND Wire
to
Earth Ground Outside Enclosure
Securing the 12-gauge ground wire into one of the ground terminal blocks
3.
Run the free end of the 12-gauge ground wire through the cable
gland on the right (for the XIO/XBUS) or through an available
cable exit route from the inside of the existing enclosure. The
cable gland referenced for the XIO/XBUS is the same gland
through which the AC power cable enters the unit.
External Power
6-27
CABLE GLAND
AC CABLE
GND WIRE
Ground wire running from ExPAC through cable gland in enclosure
4.
Connect the free end of the 12-gauge ground wire to the earth
ground available at the location.
5.
Run the free end (without the ring terminal) of the 10-gauge
ground wire (from the external power grounding kit, ADS p/n
8000-0434-xxx) up through the cable gland on the right (on the
XIO/XBUS) or up through an available cable route from the
outside of the existing enclosure. The cable gland or entry
entry route referenced is the same gland/route through which
the AC power cable and other ground wire are exiting the unit.
6-28
ADS TRITON+ Manual
6.
Loosen the terminal screw corresponding to the bottom
terminal of the other ground terminal block next to the ExPAC,
and insert the free end of the 10-gauge ground wire into the
terminal and tighten the screw.
18-Gauge GND Wire
from
ExPAC
DC Input Terminal
Ground Terminal Blocks
10 Gauge GND Wire
to
TRITON+ Monitor
Securing the 10-gauge ground wire into the other ground terminal block
7.
Gently pull on the ground and power cables from the outside of
the enclosure to remove any excess cabling inside the
enclosure.
8.
(applicable only to the XIO and XBUS) Hand-tighten the
plastic nut on the cable gland to secure the cables and prevent
moisture or debris from entering the inside of the enclosure
through the cable entry point.
External Power
6-29
AC power cable running through cable gland with plastic nut (ground wires
are not visible from this perspective)
Wiring the ExPAC/XBUS/XIO to the Monitor
The last step in connecting the monitor to the external power source
involves running the external power/communication cable (ADS
p/n 8000-0378-xx) and ground cable (from the external power
grounding kit, ADS p/n 8000-0434-xxx) between the ExPAC,
XBUS, or XIO and the monitor. One end of the external
power/communication cable has a metal connector for connection
directly into the monitor’s communication/external power port
(COMM + EXT PWR). The other end includes loose wires for
connecting to the terminals on the ExPAC. One end of the ground
cable has a metal ring terminal for attachment to one of the bolts on
the monitor top referred to as the ground connection facility. The
other end of the ground cable should have been connected to the
inside of the ExPAC enclosure, XBUS, or XIO based on the
instructions in the previous section.
Connect the ExPAC/XBUS/XIO to the monitor in the following
way:
1.
(applicable only to the XIO and XBUS) Loosen the plastic nut
corresponding to the middle cable gland on the bottom of the
XIO/XBUS unit.
2.
Feed the end of the communication cable with the loose wires
through the middle cable gland in the XIO/XBUS or a suitable
6-30
ADS TRITON+ Manual
cable entry point into the other enclosure, as applicable, from
the outside of the unit/enclosure.
XIO/XBUS
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
CABLE GLAND
Communications cable coming through the middle cable gland at the bottom
of the XIO/XBUS
3.
Loosen all of the COMMS and DC OUT terminal screws on
the bottom of the ExPAC. Consider removing the
corresponding terminal block connectors from the ExPAC to
simplify the process of loosening the terminal screws, inserting
the wires in the terminals, and re-tightening the screws.
4.
Insert the lighter gauge (i.e., smaller diameter) wires into the
associated terminals on the COMMS terminal block connector
based on the color of the wire, and tighten the corresponding
terminal screws. Refer to the color guide for the wires on the
label at the bottom of the ExPAC in front of the COMMS
terminal connector.
External Power
6-31
CONNECTION DETAIL
WIRE
TERM
O
R
G
5
G
R
N
4
B
L
K
3
B
L
U
2
R
E
D
1
COMMS CONNECTOR
COMMUNICATION
CABLE
Wiring communications cable to COMMS terminal connector on ExPAC
5.
Insert the COMMS terminal block connector back into the
corresponding port on the ExPAC, when applicable.
6.
Insert the heavier gauge (i.e., larger diameter) red and black
wires into the associated RED and BLK terminals on the DC
OUT terminal block connector, and tighten the corresponding
terminal screws. Refer to the color guide for the wires on the
label at the bottom of the ExPAC in front of the DC OUT
terminal connector.
6-32
ADS TRITON+ Manual
CONNECTION DETAIL
WIRE
TERM
S
H
L
3
B
L
K
2
R
E
D
1
DC OUT
CONNECTOR
COMMUNICATION
CABLE
Wiring communications cable to DC OUT terminal connector on ExPAC
7.
Insert the remaining lighter gauge clear wire into the SHL
terminal on the DC OUT terminal block connector, and tighten
the corresponding terminal screw.
8.
Insert the DC OUT terminal block connector back into the
corresponding port on the ExPAC, when applicable.
9.
Gently pull on the communication cable from the outside of the
enclosure to remove any excess cabling inside the enclosure.
10. Hand-tighten the plastic nut on the cable gland to secure the
cable and prevent moisture or debris from accessing the inside
of the enclosure through the cable entry point.
External Power
6-33
Monitor communication cable running through middle cable gland with plastic
nut on XIO or XBUS
11. Run the communication cable and the ground wire (with the
ring terminal) to the monitor location.
12. Remove the bolt adjacent to the COMM + EXT PWR and
ANTENNA ports from the monitor top using a 13-mm nut
driver. This bolt secures the ground connection facility
washers and also helps secure the monitor top to the canister.
You may encounter some resistance to removing the bolt from
the retaining washer located between the monitor top and the
canister.
Retaining washer from bottom of monitor top
13. Remove and discard the used retaining washer.
14. Remove the internal-tooth washer and the washer with the
guide tabs (i.e., two sides turned up) from the bolt, but leave
the square and split (i.e., lock) washers on the bolt.
Internal-tooth washer (left) and washer with guide tabs (right)
ADS TRITON+ Manual
15. Slide the ring terminal from the ground wire onto the bolt (with
the crimp barrel on the ring terminal facing the head of the
bolt), and then slide the washer with the guide tabs and the
internal-tooth washer back onto the bolt. Make sure the ground
wire is exiting one of the sides of the washer that is not turned
up. The ring terminal should be seated flat against the washer
with the guide tabs.
Ground wire ring terminal from ground cable
16. Slide the new retaining washer (from the external power
grounding kit) in between the monitor top and the canister,
positioning it so that it is properly aligned with the bolt hole.
17. Insert the bolt with the stacked washers and ring terminal back
through both the hole in the monitor top and the new retaining
washer back until it contacts the threads in the hole on top of
the canister.
A
CH
NN E L
SENSORS
A
CH
2
NN E L
Hex bolt
1
WAKE
Split Washer
Square Washer
CPU
SENS
0518
II 1 G
ST AT US
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga Rev
Sira 09ATEX2027X DATE
SIR 006
S/N
CSA 2013 2671180
Ex ia IIB T3 (152°C)
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
IECEx SIR09.0020X
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
Ground Wire Terminal
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
See CONTROL DWG 8000BK0009
Voir SCHEMA DE CONTROLE
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
Utilisez uniquement la batterie 8000-0043
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
Washer with Guide Tabs
CONTAINS CELL XMTR
FCC ID: R17HE910
A
A
Internal-Tooth Washer
NT
ENN
TM
C
O
MM
R
w w w.a d se n v.c o m
R
6-34
W
+ EX T P
Retaining Washer
Bolt with ring terminal and washers inserted through monitor top and secured
with the retaining washer
18. Tighten the bolt to approximately 30 inch-pounds (2.50 footpounds/ 3.39 Nm) to fully secure the ground connection facility
and the ground wire, as well as the top to the canister.
External Power
A
CH
NN E L
SENSORS
A
CH
2
NN E L
6-35
1
WAKE
CPU
SENS
0518
II 1 G
ST AT US
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga Rev
Sira 09ATEX2027X DATE
SIR 006
S/N
CSA 2013 2671180
Ex ia IIB T3 (152°C)
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
IECEx SIR09.0020X
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
See CONTROL DWG 8000BK0009
Voir SCHEMA DE CONTROLE
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
Utilisez uniquement la batterie 8000-0043
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
A
NT
A
CONTAINS CELL XMTR
FCC ID: R17HE910
ENN
C
O
MM
R
TM
10-Gauge Ground Wire
W
+ EX T P
R
w w w.a d s e n v.c o m
to
XIO, XBUS, or ExPAC Enclosure
Proper orientation of ground wire in ground connection facility
19. Attach the other end of the communication cable to the
COMM + EXT PWR port on the top of the monitor. If the
monitor will be in a manhole, ADS recommends wrapping
rubber stretch tape around the entire cable connection,
extending 1 to 2 inches onto the cable beyond the connection.
6-36
ADS TRITON+ Manual
COMM + EXT PWR CABLE
COAXIAL Stretch Tape
to XIO, XBUS, or ExPAC Enclosure
10-Gauge Ground Wire
COMM + EXT PWR Port
TRITON+ MONITOR
External power/communication cable attached to COMM + EXT PWR port
and ground wire secured to bolt on top of monitor
Final Instructions
1.
Verify the following before connecting to the power source:
❑ External power cable is connected to both the AC power
source or distribution device (i.e., disconnect, fuse, or
breaker box) and the power supply (when applicable)
❑ Power supply (or appropriate DC power source) is
connected to the ExPAC
❑ Ground wire is connected to both the XIO/XBUS ground
terminal block/ExPAC (as applicable) and the existing
earth ground
❑ Communication cable is connected to both the monitor and
the ExPAC
❑ Grip fittings on the cable glands are tightened securely and
XIO/XBUS (or other enclosure cover) is closed and
latched
2.
Supply power to the system.
External Power
3.
6-37
Verify that the ON LED is illuminated on the power supply
(when applicable) and that both the ExPAC DC IN and DC
OUT LEDs also are illuminated. For more information on
locating and interpreting the LEDs on the ExPAC, refer to
Chapter 10, Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
7-1
CHAPTER 7
Monitor Installation
After installing the sensors and establishing communications, install
the ADS TRITON+® monitor in the manhole. The monitor mounts
inside the manhole by an aluminum mounting bracket attached to
the monitor and bolted to the manhole wall or rim or by a hook
connected to the monitor that attaches to a rung. The following
procedures for monitor installation apply to most sites. However,
because manholes differ in many ways, some sites may require the
installer to implement slight modifications to the standard
installation technique.
Note: When ordering a monitor, please also indicate the
mounting option to ensure you receive the appropriate
installation hardware: wall/rim mount (ADS p/n I40-0009)
or rung mount (ADS p/n 8000-0021).
Before installing the monitor at the site, activate the monitor to
verify that the monitor is configured correctly for the application
and that the battery pack is operating at an adequate voltage. Make
any necessary changes to the configuration before mounting the
unit. Refer to Chapter 10, Maintenance and Troubleshooting, for
information on replacing the battery pack, when necessary.
Note: Manhole and sewer system work involves confined
space entry and is inherently dangerous. Therefore,
installers and technicians must comply with all federal,
state, and municipal regulations concerning confined space
entry. ADS is not responsible for any injuries, damages,
7-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
claims, or liability resulting directly or indirectly from the
use of this installation guide or the installation of any ADS
equipment.
Monitor Installation
7-3
Mounting the Monitor on Manhole
Rung
The simplest way to mount a monitor in a manhole is to attach it to
a rung. TRITON+ monitors come with a standard hook (ADS p/n
8000-0021) for this purpose.
⚫
Make sure the rungs are capable of holding the weight of the
monitor and cables. The monitor weighs 30.3 pounds (13.7 kg)
with added weight coming from the cables.
⚫
The hook must be closed to prevent accidental dislodging from
its support rung. The hook has two pieces, a curved portion
that goes over the rung and a straight portion which closes the
hook underneath the rung. The hook must be closed and the
clamping bolt/nut tight enough to ensure that the straight
closure remains in position.
BURIED
GSM ANTENNA
SERVICE LOOP
(ONLY ONE CABLE
SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
LADDER RUNG
MOUNT
MANHOLE
RIM
ANTENNA CABLE
TRITON+ MONITOR
CABLE(S) ANCHORED TO WALL
TRITON+ monitor secured to a manhole rung
7-4
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Mounting the Monitor to the Manhole
Wall
If the project will involve measuring flow over a long period of
time, consider mounting the monitor permanently to the manhole
wall. Using a monitor mounting bracket/flange (ADS p/n I400009), you can hang the monitor more securely and out of the way
to allow use of the rungs.
Mount the monitor handle to the manhole wall as follows:
1.
Determine the appropriate location to mount the monitor
handle to the manhole wall. Consider the following when
selecting the proper location:
❑ Select a location that will allow you to remove the monitor
easily during service visits using the mounting bracket
(extension handle).
❑ Select a location that provides only a minimal potential for
the monitor to experience surcharge conditions.
❑ Select a location that will prevent the manhole lid from
potentially damaging the monitor during removal or when
rotating in the opening.
❑ Select a location that will allow personnel to enter/exit the
manhole without removing monitor.
2.
Hold the top end of the mounting bracket against the manhole
wall, and mark the location for the mounting hole through the
keyhole in the bracket.
3.
Drill a hole approximately 3 inches (75 mm) deep at the mark,
and install a 3/8-inch x 3-inch. (10-mm x 75-mm) anchor bolt
in the hole.
Note: Make sure all anchor bolts, studs, nuts, and
washers used in mounting the monitor are stainless steel.
Monitor Installation
4.
Twist a nut onto the anchor bolt, but do not tighten it down.
Leave enough space between the nut and the wall for the
thickness of the mounting bracket.
5.
Mount the bottom of the bracket onto the monitor mounting
flange with two M8 x 30-mm stainless steel bolts, two M8
stainless steel lock washers, and two M8 stainless steel flat
washers (supplied with the TRITON+ when shipped).
Bolting the mounting bracket to the flange welded to the monitor
6.
Carefully lower the monitor into the manhole, and place the
keyhole of the mounting bracket over the anchor bolt.
7-5
7-6
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Note: ADS strongly recommends attaching a security line
to the monitor before lowering it into the manhole to
prevent the monitor from accidentally dropping down the
manhole during installation.
7.
Tighten and secure the bolt against the mounting bracket.
Monitor installed in the manhole
8.
Neatly coil and secure the excess sensor and communication
cables in the manhole to simplify future monitor service
activities. Secure the cables to plastic anchors or ¼-inch x 2¼inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolts using 14-inch.(5-mm x 300mm) cable ties.
Note: Be careful to avoid damaging the sensor cables
during installation activities. Even small pinholes in the
cable can cause a sensor to malfunction or fail.
Monitor Installation
7-7
Mounting the Monitor to the Manhole
Rim
Mounting a monitor to the manhole rim has certain advantages.
Removing and reinstalling are easier. The rim may be more
structurally sound than deteriorated rungs. However, the manhole
lid must clear the mounting hardware while it is removed or
replaced.
Mount the monitor bracket/flange (ADS p/n I40-0009) to the
manhole rim in the following way:
1.
Determine the appropriate location to mount the monitor
handle to the inside of the iron manhole rim. Consider the
following when selecting the proper location:
❑ Select a location that will allow you to remove the monitor
easily during service visits using the mounting bracket
(extension handle).
❑ Select a location that provides only a minimal potential for
the monitor to experience surcharge conditions.
❑ Select a location that will prevent the manhole lid from
potentially damaging the monitor during removal or when
rotating in the opening.
❑ Select a location that will allow personnel to enter/exit the
manhole without removing monitor.
2.
Hold the keyhole at the top end of the bracket against the lower
inner rim of the manhole, and mark the location for the
stainless steal stud through the keyhole in the bracket. Make
sure there will be enough room to lift the bracket up and over
the stud when installed.
3.
Drill a hole(s) into the manhole rim 1 inch (2.5 cm) deep using
a carbide-tipped 5/16-inch drill bit or one that matches the size
of the anchor bolt to be inserted.
7-8
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Note: Consider starting the hole using smaller bits to
make pilot holes and increasing up to the final size bit. In
addition, spray cutting oil or another lubricant into the hole
while drilling and tapping.
Drilling the hole in the manhole rim
4.
Use a 3/8-inch x 16 threads-per-inch (10-mm) tap that matches
the stud thread to cut threads in the hole. Twist the tap
clockwise ¾ turn, and then back out ½ turn before continuing
deeper.
Monitor Installation
7-9
Using the tap to thread the hole
5.
Chase the threading action at intervals to clear the metal debris
by backing the tap almost completely out of the hole and then
screwing it back into the hole. Lubricate the hole between
threading.
6.
Place two 3/8 – 16 hex nuts (with a 3/8-inch washer in
between) onto one end of a 3/8-inch x 2-inch stud.
Placing two nuts and a washer onto the stud
7-10
ADS TRITON+ Manual
7.
Using two wrenches, turn the inner nut counter-clockwise and
the outer nut clockwise simultaneously to bind the two nuts
together on the stud.
Binding the nuts together with the washer in between
8.
Install the stud into the tapped hole using the outer nut to
engage the wrench. Continue turning the nut clockwise until
the stud is seated at least ¾ inch (20 mm) deep in the hole.
Installing the stud into the hole in the manhole rim
Monitor Installation
9.
7-11
Separate the nuts, and turn the inner nut until it is flush against
the rim.
10. Slide the washer against the inner nut, and turn the outer nut
toward the edge of the stud.
Positioning the nuts on the stud to receive the mounting bracket
11. Mount the bottom of the mounting bracket onto the monitor
flange with with two M8 x 35-mm stainless steel bolts, two M8
stainless steel lock washers, and two M8 stainless steel flat
washers.
12. It may be necessary to drill new holes in the flange.
13. Carefully lower the monitor into the manhole, and place the
keyhole in the bracket over the outer nut on the stud.
Note: ADS strongly recommends attaching a security line
to the monitor before lowering it into the manhole to
prevent the monitor from accidentally dropping down the
manhole during installation.
14. Slide the bracket against the inner nut and washer, and tighten
and secure the outer nut against the bracket.
7-12
ADS TRITON+ Manual
15. Neatly coil and secure the excess sensor and communication
cables in the manhole to simplify future monitor service
activities. Secure the cables to plastic anchors or ¼-inch x 2¼inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolts using 14-inch (300-mm) cable
ties.
Note: Be careful to avoid damaging the sensor cables
during installation activities. Even small pinholes in the
cable can cause a sensor to malfunction or fail.
8-1
CHAPTER 8
Inclinometer
The ADS Inclinometer sensor (ADS p/n 8000-0528) utilizes an
integrated accelerometer in a sealed, intrinsically safe housing to
accurately determine the state (angle opening) of a flood gate in
water control management systems. The sensor connects to the
COMM + EXT PWR port on the ADS TRITON+ monitor. Install
the Inclinometer when the flood gate is in the closed position. Once
installed it measures the angle differential from the closed position
and reports this with the ANGLE entity recorded at the monitor
wake-up interval. The ADS TRITON+ monitor can be configured
to send an alert when the angle exceeds a Tilt threshold. The default
Tilt threshold is greater than +/- 5o.
ADS Inclinometer sensor
8-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Installing the Inclinometer
Follow the steps below to install the ADS Inclinometer sensor.
Note: The Inclinometer sensor should not be connected
to the ADS TRITON+ monitor until it is installed onto the
flood gate.
Note: If the default 25’ (7.6m) length of the Inclinometer
cable is not sufficient for the installation, order an
extension cable (ADS P/N 8000-0044-25).
Note: Manhole and sewer system work involves confined
space entry and is inherently dangerous. Therefore,
installers and technicians must comply with all federal,
state, and municipal regulations concerning confined space
entry. ADS is not responsible for any injuries, damages,
claims, or liability resulting directly or indirectly from the
use of this installation guide or the installation of any ADS
equipment.
1.
Ensure the flood gate is in the closed position.
2.
Position the ADS Inclinometer sensor vertically or
horizontally on the flood gate or to a flat, level surface
attached to the flood gate. See the following illustrations
for recommended installation positions.
Inclinometer
8-3
8-4
ADS TRITON+ Manual
3.
Before securing the Inclinometer to the flood gate, ensure
that the sensor is at 90º, 180º, or completely flat.
Inclinometers installed in the positions shown below will
not record accurate angle measurement data.
Improper Inclinometer installation positions
4.
Attach the inclinomenter securely to the flood gate using
one of the following three methods:
Inclinometer
8-5
❑ Construction adhesive
Inclinometer attached using Construction Adhesive
❑ Two #8 stainless steel screws (hole diameter = 4.67
mm (0.184 in)
Inclinometer attached using Stainless Steel Screws
8-6
ADS TRITON+ Manual
❑ Stainless steel clamp
Inclinometer attached using a Stainless Steel Clamp
5.
After the Inclinometer is securely attached to the flood
gate, connect the sensor cable to the COMM + EXT
PWR port on the top of the ADS TRITON+ monitor.
6.
Configure the ADS TRITON+ monitor using QstartXML,
selecting the Inclinometer as one of the devices. See
Chapter 4, Configuration and Activation, for more indepth instructions on how to configure and activate an
ADS TRITON+ monitor.
Inclinometer Data
When activated with an Inclinometer, data collected from the
TRITON+ will include the ANGLE entity. Data for the ANGLE
entity will either be positive points or negative points when the gate
opens, dependent on the installation position of the sensor on the
flood gate.
The following illustrations show the expected ANGLE data values
based on the installation position (with the assumption that the
Inclinometer is installed on the wastewater side of the flood gate).
Inclinometer
8-7
❑ The ANGLE data will be negative values when the
gate opens out to the receiving body of water. ANGLE
will be positive values when the gate opens inward
toward the wastewater collection system:
❑ ANGLE data will be positive values when the gate
opens out to the receiving body of water. ANGLE data
will be negative values when the gate opens inward
toward the wastewater collection system:
8-8
ADS TRITON+ Manual
❑ ANGLE data will be negative values when the gate
opens out to the receiving body of water. ANGLE data
will be positive values when the gate opens inward
towards the wastewater collection system:
9-1
CHAPTER 9
Analog and Digital Inputs and
Outputs
The ADS TRITON+® (with an ADS XIO™) can monitor signals
from other equipment via analog and digital inputs as well as send
signals or information to other equipment via analog and digital
outputs. The interface between the monitor and this equipment is
the ADS XIO (external input/output unit). The XIO can
accommodate up to 2 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 2 digital
inputs, and 2 digital outputs. It also includes an ExPAC that
provides an intrinsically-safe barrier for both external power and
communication to the monitor. External power is essential for
these input and output operations. This chapter provides general
information on how to use, configure, and connect these inputs and
outputs.
Note: Do not attempt to connect to a third-party system,
or connect/interrupt supply of a signal to another system
without an owner representative present. Under some
circumstances, these activities can disable or disrupt a
critical automated process (e.g., a pump control), cause a
dangerous condition (e.g., overpressure), or generate a
false alarm.
9-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Note: Because the COMM + EXT PWR port on the
TRITON+ supports both landline communication and XIO
capabilities, but cannot be used for both simultaneously,
monitors dedicated for communicating over a landline
cannot also be used for XIO operations.
Note: Due to the diversity of signal sources and
frequently undocumented cabling and wiring at remote
monitoring locations, ADS strongly recommends
acquiring a qualified electrician, instrumentation
technician, or owner representative to connect ADS
equipment to the signal source. Consider the examples
and general procedures included in this chapter to ensure a
successful installation.
Analog and Digital I/O 9-3
Analog Inputs
The TRITON+ (with an ADS XIO) supports the monitoring of up
to two analog 4-20mA signals from other instruments. These
signals typically represent measurements made by other devices,
such as flow meters, pressure sensors, or level transducers. To
properly configure the monitor to process the signals received from
these third-party devices, you must configure the ADS Qstart
software with the signal scale and engineering units equivalent to
the signals received.
Connecting a Third-Party Instrument to an
Analog Input on the XIO
Perform the following procedure to connect each third-party
instrument or device (up to two) to an analog input terminal on the
ADS XIO:
Note: Make sure external power is available, but not
turned on, to the monitor before connecting the signal
wiring. If it is not available, you cannot complete testing,
which may require return visits by the owner
representative and/or electrician or instrument technician
for wiring problems.
1.
Determine the location at which to connect to the analog
signal wiring. Make sure the distance from the signal
source to the XIO unit is as short as possible and avoid any
cable runs that would run parallel to switching panels or
other control components. These can create electrical
noise that will interfere with the signal and create false
readings.
9-4
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Following are some common connection points:
❑ Inside the transmitter that supplies the signal
❑ SCADA I/O termination panel
❑ PLC analog I/O terminals
❑ RTU analog I/O terminals
❑ Strip chart recorder I/O terminals
❑ Integrator/totalizer I/O terminals
❑ Front panel display I/O terminals
2.
Configure the Analog Input 1 (or 2) component of the XIO
Device through Qstart with the analog input parameters
that indicate the values or measurements that correspond
to the analog signals within the 4-20mA range and the
specific kind of data you want the monitor to store. Refer
to Chapter 6, Configuration and Activation, for
instructions on supplying this information in Qstart.
3.
Connect the analog input wires to the ADS XIO in the
following way:
Note: Make sure the power is turned off to the third-party
device and XIO.
❑ Release the latches and open the clear, front door on
the XIO.
❑ Run the wires up through the left cable gland on the
XIO into the enclosure. ADS recommends using 18gauge wiring. You may need to loosen the plastic nut
on the cable gland on the outside of the XIO to feed
the wires through.
Analog and Digital I/O 9-5
XIO MODULE
CABLE GLAND
2 WIRES
Feeding wires up through left cable gland in XIO
❑ Insert one of the stripped ends of the positive wire into
the hole corresponding to terminal 1 (or 3) on the I/O
terminal block in the XIO.
❑ Insert one of the stripped ends of the negative wire
into the hole corresponding to terminal 2 (or 4) on the
I/O terminal block in the XIO.
9-6
ADS TRITON+ Manual
I/O TERMINAL BLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
+ 1
+ 2
4-20 mA
Analogue
Inputs
+ 1
+ 2
4-20 mA
Analogue
Outputs
NC
I1
I2
Digital
(Switch)
Inputs
R1
R2
Digital
(Relay)
Outputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Positive Wire
Negative Wire
ANALOG INPUT TERMINALS
Connecting the positive and negative wires from the third-party device to
Terminals 1 and 2 (analog input terminals) on the I/O terminal block
❑ Connect the other ends of the positive and negative
wires to the third-party device based on the vendor’s
specifications.
❑ Close and latch the door to the XIO.
4.
Restore power to the customer’s instrument or device and
the ADS XIO.
5.
Verify that adding the ADS equipment will not add too
much load to the analog signal loop. The XIO input adds
22 ohms to the loop. If too much load is added, the signal
will clip and cause the data to flat line at a lower level than
the true peak, which will result in understated peak levels
or flows. If only one device is connected to the analog
signal, sufficient current is probably available to drive the
XIO input. If more than two devices are attached to the
analog signal loop, ADS strongly recommends load testing
the loop.
Analog and Digital I/O 9-7
Determine whether too much load exists on the analog signal
in the following way:
❑ Activate the monitor with the appropriate analog input
parameters.
❑ Request for the owner to simulate a full-scale event that
generates a signal to 20mA while connected to the XIO
unit. Simulate the full-scale event through utilities in the
transmitter that supply the signal or, when using a depth
sensor, by placing a target under the sensor that will
provide a maximum reading. Magmeters usually have a
utility to drive the output to full scale. However, each
device is different and, in some applications, there is no
way to simulate maximum output. When this occurs,
calculate the load by measuring the voltage that drives the
loop and then measuring the resistance added by each
device on the loop. The owner’s instrumentation
representative should conduct this load calculation because
it requires toggling power to different devices and
disconnecting/reconnecting the signal and, possibly, power
wiring.
❑ Using Qstart, collect the data and verify that the analog
input values were correct during the simulated input time
interval.
Note: If the load is too great and/or the analog signal is
controlling the customer equipment, a loop isolator must
be installed before proceeding.
9-8
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Analog Outputs
The TRITON+ (with an ADS XIO) can provide synchronous or
real-time depth, velocity, and flow rate measurements to up to two
third-party systems or devices via 4-20mA analog output signals.
The most common use for analog outputs is to provide flow and
depth information to SCADA systems via input to Remote
Terminal Units (RTUs) or Programmable Logic Controllers
(PLCs). However, other uses include other meters, totalizers,
samplers, and display equipment.
To configure the monitor to properly deliver the signals to these
third-party devices, you must configure the ADS Qstart software
with the signal scale and engineering units equivalent to the signals
transferred.
Connecting a Third-Party Device to an Analog
Output on the XIO
Note: Connecting the third-party device to the XIO
requires a customer-supplied cable. ADS recommends 18to 20 gauge, shielded, twisted-pair standard control cable.
Consider using Alpha Wire™ M213202 SL005 or
General Cable™ C7106A.41.10 cable. For more
information, contact ADS Client Services.
Perform the following procedure to connect each third-party device
(up to two) to an analog output terminal on the ADS XIO:
Note: Make sure external power is available, but not
turned on, to the monitor before connecting the signal
wiring. If it is not available, you cannot complete testing,
which may require return visits by the owner
representative and/or electrician or instrument technician
for wiring problems.
1.
Verify that the instrument or equipment that will be
receiving the analog signals has been set up to accept the
Analog and Digital I/O 9-9
signal wiring. Setup may involve penetrating existing
enclosures, running conduit, or sealing glands.
2.
Establish the range and engineering units representing 4 to
20mA for the analog output, and then configure the
Analog Output 1 (or 2) component of the XIO Device
through Qstart with the analog output parameters that
indicate the values or measurements that correspond to the
analog signals within the 4-20mA range. Refer to Chapter
6, Configuration and Activation, for instructions on
supplying this information in Qstart.
3.
Configure the device or instrument receiving the analog
signals with the range and engineering units corresponding
to the 4-20mA from the TRITON+.
4.
Connect the analog output wires (from the customersupplied cable) to the ADS XIO in the following way:
Note: Make sure the power is turned off to the third-party
device and XIO.
❑ Release the latches and open the clear, front door on
the XIO.
❑ Run the wires up through the left cable gland on the
XIO into the enclosure. ADS recommends using 18gauge wiring. You may need to loosen the plastic nut
on the cable gland on the outside of the XIO to feed
the wires through.
9-10
ADS TRITON+ Manual
XIO MODULE
CABLE GLAND
2 WIRES
Feeding wires up through left cable gland in XIO
❑ Insert one of the stripped ends of the positive wire into the
hole corresponding to terminal 5 (or 7) on the I/O terminal
block in the XIO.
❑ Insert one of the stripped ends of the negative wire into the
hole corresponding to terminal 6 (or 8) on the I/O terminal
block in the XIO.
Analog and Digital I/O 9-11
I/O TERMINAL BLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
+ 1
+ 2
4-20 mA
Analogue
Inputs
+ 1
+ 2
4-20 mA
Analogue
Outputs
NC
I1
I2
Digital
(Switch)
Inputs
R1
R2
Digital
(Relay)
Outputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Positive Wire
Negative Wire
ANALOG OUTPUT TERMINALS
Connecting the positive and negative wires from the third-party device to
Terminals 5 and 6 (analog output terminals) on the I/O terminal block
❑ Connect the other ends of the positive and negative wires
to the third-party device based on the vendor’s
specifications.
❑ Close and latch the door to the XIO.
5.
Restore power to the customer’s device and the ADS XIO.
6.
Run a test to verify that the third-party instrument is receiving
a correct value from the monitor in the following way:
❑ Enter a test value in the Manual field corresponding to the
appropriate Analog Output (1 or 2) section of the XIO
Device dialog in Qstart, and select the Enable Manual
checkbox. This value must fall within the range
designated in the associated Min and Max Value fields.
Note: ADS recommends testing both analog outputs at
the same time.
9-12
ADS TRITON+ Manual
❑ Click on the OK button on the XIO Device dialog.
❑ Activate the monitor. Refer to Chapter 6, Configuration
and Activation, for instructions on activating the monitor.
❑ Disconnect from the monitor.
❑ Contact the customer representative to verify the receiving
instrument is producing the same value.
❑ Upon confirmation, return to the XIO Device dialog in
Qstart, deselect the Enable Manual checkbox(es), and click
on the OK button.
7.
Re-activate the monitor.
Analog and Digital I/O 9-13
Digital Inputs
The TRITON+ (with an ADS XIO) supports the monitoring of up
to two digital inputs from third-party devices, such as switches or
alarms (relays). To properly configure the monitor to process the
signals received from these devices, you must configure each input
as active through the ADS Qstart software.
Connecting a Third-Party Device to a Digital
Input on the XIO
Perform the following procedure to connect each third-party device
(up to two) to a digital input terminal on the ADS XIO:
Note: Make sure external power is available, but not
turned on, to the monitor before connecting the signal
wiring. If it is not available, you cannot complete testing,
which may require return visits by the owner
representative and/or electrician or instrument technician
for wiring problems.
1.
Configure the Digital Input 1 (or 2) component of the XIO
Device through Qstart to indicate the digital input is active and
whether you want the monitor to store the data received. Refer
to Chapter 6, Configuration and Activation, for instructions on
supplying these settings in Qstart.
2.
Connect the digital input wires to the ADS XIO in the
following way:
Note: Make sure the power is turned off to the third-party
device and XIO.
❑ Release the latches and open the clear, front door on the
XIO.
9-14
ADS TRITON+ Manual
❑ Run the wires up through the left cable gland on the XIO
into the enclosure. ADS recommends using 18-gauge
wiring. You may need to loosen the plastic nut on the
cable gland on the outside of the XIO to feed the wires
through.
XIO MODULE
CABLE GLAND
2 WIRES
Feeding wires up through left cable gland in XIO
❑ Insert one of the stripped ends of one of the wires into the
hole corresponding to terminal 9 (or 11) on the I/O
terminal block in the XIO.
❑ Insert one of the stripped ends of the other wire into the
hole corresponding to terminal 10 (or 12) on the I/O
terminal block in the XIO.
Analog and Digital I/O 9-15
I/O TERMINAL BLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
+ 1
+ 2
4-20 mA
Analogue
Inputs
+ 1
+ 2
4-20 mA
Analogue
Outputs
NC
I1
I2
Digital
(Switch)
Inputs
R1
R2
Digital
(Relay)
Outputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Term 9 Wire
Term 10 Wire
DIGITAL INPUT TERMINALS
Connecting the 2 wires from the third-party device to Terminals 9 and 10
(digital input terminals) on the I/O terminal block
❑ Connect the other ends of the wires to the third-party
device based on the vendor’s specifications.
❑ Close and latch the door to the XIO.
3.
Restore power to the customer’s device and the ADS XIO.
4.
Test the digital inputs in the following way:
❑ Make sure the monitor is activated with the appropriate
digital input parameters.
❑ Allow the monitor to record data from the digital input for
at least two intervals in an inactive state and two intervals
in an active state.
❑ Collect the data from the monitor.
❑ Verify that the data accurately represents the states of the
inputs corresponding to the date/time stamps.
9-16
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Digital Outputs
The TRITON+ (with an ADS XIO) can provide the event status for
to up to two third-party systems or devices via digital (relay) output
signals. To configure the monitor to properly deliver the signals to
these third-party devices, you must configure the ADS Qstart
software with the specific event about which you want to relay the
current status information.
Connecting a Third-Party Device to a Digital
Output on the XIO
Perform the following procedure to connect each third-party device
(up to two) to a digital output terminal on the ADS XIO:
Note: Make sure external power is available, but not
turned on, to the monitor before connecting the signal
wiring. If it is not available, you cannot complete testing,
which may require return visits by the owner
representative and/or electrician or instrument technician
for wiring problems.
1.
Configure the Digital Ouput 1 (or 2) component of the XIO
Device through Qstart to indicate the event with which you
want to associate each digital output. Refer to Chapter 6,
Configuration and Activation, for instructions on selecting this
parameter in Qstart.
Analog and Digital I/O 9-17
2.
Connect the digital output wires to the ADS XIO in the
following way:
Note: Make sure the power is turned off to the third-party
device and XIO.
❑ Release the latches and open the clear, front door on the
XIO.
❑ Run the wires up through the left cable gland on the XIO
into the enclosure. ADS recommends using 18-gauge
wiring. You may need to loosen the plastic nut on the
cable gland on the outside of the XIO to feed the wires
through.
XIO MODULE
CABLE GLAND
2 WIRES
Feeding wires up through left cable gland in XIO
9-18
ADS TRITON+ Manual
❑ Insert one of the stripped ends of one of the wires into the
hole corresponding to terminal 13 (or 15) on the I/O
terminal block in the XIO.
❑ Insert one of the stripped ends of the other wire into the
hole corresponding to terminal 14 (or 16) on the I/O
terminal block in the XIO.
I/O TERMINAL BLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
+ 1
+ 2
4-20 mA
Analogue
Inputs
+ 1
+ 2
4-20 mA
Analogue
Outputs
NC
I1
I2
Digital
(Switch)
Inputs
R1
R2
Digital
(Relay)
Outputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Term 13 Wire
Term 14 Wire
DIGITAL OUTPUT TERMINALS
Connecting the 2 wires from the third-party device to Terminals 13 and 14
(digital output terminals) on the I/O terminal block
❑ Connect the other ends of the wires to the third-party
device based on the vendor’s specifications.
❑ Close and latch the door to the XIO.
3.
Restore power to the customer’s device and the ADS XIO.
Analog and Digital I/O 9-19
4.
Test the digital outputs in one of the following ways, and then
verify that the customer’s device received the change in relay
status:
❑ Adjust your event triggers in Qstart to force an event and
subsequent return-to-normal to occur over a limited period
of time. If you choose this testing option, remember to
reset your event triggers and reactivate the monitor
following the test.
❑ Modify the environmental conditions at the monitoring
location to trigger an event and return-to-normal over a
limited period of time.
10-1
C H A P T E R 10
Modbus
Many newer SCADA and process control systems connect either
directly or wirelessly to measurement devices through a serial
connection or wireless modem to quickly access process values.
One of the industry standard protocols through which this occurs is
Modbus. The ADS TRITON+® monitor serves as a Modbus slave
device and provides process values based on Modbus holding
registers through an ExPAC interface (using a customer-supplied
cable) or wirelessly through the internal cellular modem.
This chapter contains essential connection and reference
information regarding communication and data exchange through a
serial connection involving the TRITON+, ExPAC/XBUS, and
RTU. It also addresses Modbus wireless data exchange and
Modbus data registers.
Note: An RTU (remote terminal unit) is an example of
the kind of customer-supplied equipment that uses
Modbus acquired data. Many other types of equipment
may be connected to TRITON+ monitors; however, all
will communicate as described. A PLC (programmable
logic controller), an I/O (input/output) server, or other
instruments, such as the Telog® Ru-33, may be used in
place of an RTU. ADS® references the RTU in this manual
primarily because it is the most common type of end-point
hardware used with SCADA systems.
10-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Establishing a Modbus Connection
Note: TRITON+ models 8000-FST-IM-4VZ and 8000IM-EP-4VZ do not support Modbus communicationws
through the ADS VPN.
The SCADA or process control system connects to the TRITON+
either through a customer-supplied serial cable connection using the
ADS ExPAC (which may be housed within the ADS XBUS ™ or a
customer-supplied enclosure) or through a cellular wireless modem
in the monitor using Modbus TCP.
Note: Please keep in mind that the COMM + EXT PWR
port on the ADS TRITON+ supports both landline
communication and ExPAC/XBUS capabilities (including
for external power), but cannot be used for both
simultaneously.
Note: The XIO does not support Modbus
communications. Only the ExPAC and XBUS support
Modbus.
Setting Up a Serial Connection
Two Modbus ports are available on the ExPAC through which to
communicate: RS-232 and RS-485.
Note: When both connections are available, ADS
recommends using the RS-485 connection. It has a greater
immunity to noise, supports longer cable runs without
signal degradation, and is easier to wire.
The required port settings are 19200 baud rate, 8 data bits, no
parity, 1 stop bit, and no flow control.
Modbus
10-3
Connecting through the RS-485 Port
When using an RS-485 connection for Modbus communications,
choose a cable that is no longer than 4000 feet (1219 m) in length
with 24-gauge wiring. The cable must include at least one twisted
pair and one ground wire. If the cable extends beyond 1000 feet
(305 m), ADS recommends using 120 ohm termination resistors at
each end of the cable.
Connect the cable to the ExPAC in the following way:
1.
Disconnect (i.e., unplug) the green terminal connector from the
RS-485 port on the top, left side of the ExPAC.
RS-485 TERMINAL
CONNECTOR
ExPAC
RS-485 terminal connector on ExPAC
2.
(applicable only when the ExPAC is housed within an XBUS or
other enclosure) Open the door of the enclosure, and run the
cable through the appropriate entry point into the enclosure.
For an XBUS, this entry point will be the left cable gland at the
bottom of the enclosure. You may need to loosen the plastic
nut on the cable gland on the outside of the XBUS or other
enclosure to feed the cable through.
10-4
ADS TRITON+ Manual
XBUS
CABLE GLAND
RS-485 CABLE
Running RS-485 cable through left cable gland in XBUS
3.
Loosen the screws on the terminal connector.
4.
Make sure the wires from the cable are stripped and separated.
5.
Insert the negative wire (D-) from the cable into the negative
(-) terminal on the connector (refer to the label adjacent to the
port), and tighten the terminal screw.
6.
Insert the positive wire (D+) from the cable into the positive
(+) terminal on the connector, and tighten the terminal screw.
7.
Insert the ground wire (GND/SHL) from the cable into the
ground ( ) terminal on the connector, and tighten the terminal
screw.
Modbus
10-5
RS-485 CABLE
Negative Wire
Positive Wire
Ground Wire
ExPAC
Running the wires to the proper terminals on the RS-485 terminal
connector
8.
Insert the connector back into the RS-485 port on the ExPAC.
Note: Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation for the
device to which you are connecting the ExPAC to
determine the appropriate pin-out for the RS-485
connector on the device end of the cable. Identify the pins
for the D+ and D- signals and the GND or SHL.
9.
(applicable only when the ExPAC is housed within an XBUS or
other enclosure) Gently pull on the cable from the outside of
the enclosure to remove any excess cabling inside the
enclosure. Hand-tighten the plastic nut on the cable gland
(when applicable) to secure the cable and prevent moisture or
debris from entering the inside of the enclosure through the
cable entry point. Then, close and secure the door to the
enclosure.
10-6
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Connecting through the RS-232 Port
When supporting an RS-232 Modbus connection to customer
equipment, such as an RTU or PLC, create a custom cable or use a
customer-supplied serial cable with a DB-9 connector configured to
an RS-232 straight connection specification. A null-modem is not
necessary.
Connect the cable to the ExPAC in the following way:
1.
(applicable only when the ExPAC is housed within an XBUS or
other enclosure) Open the door of the enclosure, and run the
cable through the appropriate entry point into the enclosure.
For an XBUS, this entry point will be the left cable gland at the
bottom of the enclosure. You may need to loosen the plastic
nut on the cable gland on the outside of the XBUS or other
enclosure to feed the cable through. If you are using a prefabricated cable, you may need to remove the DB-9 connector
from the cable so that you can feed the cable through the cable
gland or other entry point.
Modbus
10-7
XBUS
CABLE GLAND
RS-232 CABLE
Running RS-232 cable through left cable gland in XBUS
2.
(applicable only when using a custom cable or after removing
a DB-9 connector from a pre-fabricated cable) Strip and
separate the wires from the cable and attach/re-attach the DB-9
connector to the cable based on the pin-out referenced in the
following table:
Pin
Name
Direction
Notes
1
DCD
Input
2
RX
Output
3
TX
Input
4
DTR
Input
5
GND
6
DSR
Internally connected to RTS and CTS
7
RTS
Internally connected to DSR and CTS
8
CTS
Internally connected to DSR and RTS
10-8
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Pin
Name
9
RI
Direction
Notes
Unused
Pin-out for RS-232 Modbus port on the ExPAC
Note: A logic high is required on either DCD or DTR to
enable communications.
3.
Insert the DB-9 connector from the cable into the RS-232 port
on the top of the ExPAC.
RS-232 TERMINAL
PORT
ExPAC
RS-232 terminal connector on ExPAC
4.
(applicable only when the ExPAC is housed within an XBUS or
other enclosure) Gently pull on the cable from the outside of
the enclosure to remove any excess cabling inside the
enclosure. Hand-tighten the plastic nut on the cable gland
(when applicable) to secure the cable and prevent moisture or
debris from entering the inside of the enclosure through the
cable entry point. Then, close and secure the door to the
enclosure.
Modbus
10-9
Note: Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation for the
device to which you are connecting the ExPAC to
determine the appropriate pin-out for the RS-232 input
connector on the device end of the cable (similar to the
table above).
Note: If the DTR input is not available/supported on the
device, connect the RTS output to pin 7 and pin 4 as well
to ensure the ExPAC DTR input is activated and
communications are enabled. The TRITON+ monitor
connected to the ExPAC will not operate if the DTR or the
DCD lines are not activated.
Setting Up a Wireless Connection
Establishing a wireless Modbus connection enables the TRITON+
to provide the updated Modbus registers to the SCADA or process
control system.
Consider the following when using a wireless connection:
•
While not required, ADS strongly recommends powering the
TRITON+ for any continuous Modbus communications
through an external source using an ExPAC or XBUS.
•
Establishing wireless TCP/IP communication may take several
minutes. Therefore, consider this initial delay in
communication when setting up the host program.
•
Verify that the monitor has been configured for Modbus output
through Qstart with a wireless connection type and the proper
IP address for the monitor.
•
Verify that the process control system has the proper Modbus
slave ID, is configured for wireless TCP communication, and
has the correct IP address for the TRITON+.
•
Once both systems are configured and activated, verify that the
process control system is receiving the appropriate Modbus
register values.
10-10
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Configuring the Monitor for Modbus
Applications
The monitor must be configured with certain information to ensure
it can communicate with and provide data to the RTU or Telog Ru33. This includes information such as the rate at which Modbus
updates the data available to the RTU or Telog unit and Modbus
slave ID for facilitating communication between the ExPAC and
the RTU or the TRITON+ and the Telog Ru-33. This configuration
occurs through the Qstart software. Refer to Chapter 6,
Configuration and Activation, for instructions on entering this
information.
Modbus
10-11
Modbus Data Registers
This section contains tables providing Modbus registers. The first
table lists the Modbus data register addresses corresponding to the
entities for which the TRITON+ provides output data. The RTU
requests data from the monitor using the designated registers, and
the monitor (through the ExPAC) sends the current entity data
representing those registers back to the RTU. Therefore, the user
must program the RTU with the appropriate registers based on the
type of data desired.
The second table lists the Modbus registers associated with more
general TRITON+ information.
Note: The entities available are based on the sensors used
and the data logged. In addition, all values are floating
point, unless otherwise defined.
Register Addresses for Entity Data
The following table contains the entities currently available for
output and the associated register addresses.
Note: The units of measure are based on the units of
measure with which the monitor has been activated, except
for those noted within the table.
Note: Modbus holding registers start at 40001. To
address them with a Modbus Read Holding Register
command, use an address of 0 (zero), which will return
data for register 40001. ADS uses two Modbus registers
to return one little endian floating point number. Registers
that are not updated by the monitor will contain a value of
-99.0. This number represents the initialization value and
indicates the register is not updated. The registers used are
dictated by the monitor configuration, the type and number
of sensors, and the type of processing desired.
10-12
ADS TRITON+ Manual
A typical message exchange, asking for the first 10
registers, would occur as follows:
000064-Tx:3A 30 35 30 33 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 41 45 45 OD
OA
000065-Rx:3A 30 35 30 33 31 34 30 30 30 30 43 32 43 36 30
30 30 30 43 32 43 36 30 30 30 30 43 32 43 36 38
45 33 39 43 32 39 31 30 30 30 30 43 32 43 36 41
41 OD OA
Description
Qstart Entity
Standard Units of
Measure
Registers
Peak Velocity
from Peak
Combo Sensor
or Velocity from
AV|Gated
PEAKVEL_1 for
Peak Combo or
VELOCITY for
AV|Gated
Feet per Second
40001-40002
Upward
Ultrasonic Depth
from Peak
Combo or
AV|Gated
Sensor
UPDEPTH_1
Inches
40003-40004
Pressure Depth
from Peak
Combo or
AV|Gated
Sensor
PDEPTH_1
Inches
40005-40006
Water
Temperature
from Peak
Combo or
AV|Gated
Sensor
WATERTEMP_1
Fahrenheit
40007-40008
Surface Velocity
from Surface
Combo Sensor
SURFACEVEL_3
Feet per Second
40017-40018
Modbus
Description
Qstart Entity
Standard Units of
Measure
10-13
Registers
Smart Depth
from the Surface
Combo or
Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor
SDEPTH_3
Inches
40019-40020
Pressure Depth
from the Surface
Comb Sensor
PDEPTH_3
Inches
40021-40022
Air Temperature
from the Surface
Combo Sensor
AIRTEMP_3
Fahrenheit
40023-40024
Flow rate based
on QContinuity
FLOW1
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40025-40026
Second Flow
rate based on
QContinuity
FLOW2
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40027-40028
Peak Velocity
from the monitor
RAWVEL
Feet per Second
40029-40030
Monitor Battery
Voltage (daily)
BTYVOLT
Volts
40031-40032
Flow Rate
Threshold from
monitor
QTHRESHOLD
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40033-40034
Average Flow
Rate from
monitor
QMLI_AVG
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40035-40036
Average Flow
Depth from
monitor
DMLI_AVG
Inches
40037-40038
Depth Threshold
from monitor
DTHRESHOLD
Inches
40039-40040
Pressure Sensor
Calibration Value
PRESSK
n/a
40041-40042
10-14
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Description
Qstart Entity
Standard Units of
Measure
Registers
Unidepth,
Monitoring Point
1
MP1/UD
Inches
40045-40046
Velocity with
gain applied,
Monitoring Point
1
MP1/RV1
Feet per Second
40047-40048
Flow rate based
on QContinuity,
Monitoring Point
1
MP1/FLOW1
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40049-40050
Flow volume,
Monitoring Point
1
MP1/FLOW_TOTAL
Thousands of
Gallons
40051-40052
Ultrasonic Depth
from sensor
connected to
Channel 1
CH1/U1
Inches
40053-40054
Peak Velocity
from Peak
Combo, Velocity
from AV|Gated,
or Surface
Velocity from
Surface Combo
CH1/V1 or DV1
Feet per Second
40055-40056
Pressure Depth
from Peak
Combo or
AV|Gated sensor
CH1/P1
Inches
40057-40058
Surcharge Peak
Velocity from the
Surface Combo
Sensor
CH1/PV1
Feet per Second
40059-40060
Temperature
from the sensor
attached to
Channel 1
CH1/CT1
Fahrenheit
40061-40062
Unidepth,
Monitoring Point
2
MP2/UD2
Inches
40065-40066
Modbus
Description
Qstart Entity
Standard Units of
Measure
10-15
Registers
Velocity with
gain applied,
Monitoring Point
2
MP2/RV2
Feet per Second
40067-40068
Flow rate based
on QContinuity,
Monitoring Point
2
MP2/FLOW2
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40069-40070
Flow volume,
Monitoring Point
1
MP2/FLOW_TOTAL
Thousands of
Gallons
40071-40072
Ultrasonic Depth
from sensor
connected to
Channel 2
CH2/U2
Inches
40073-40074
Peak Velocity
from Peak
Combo, Velocity
from AV|Gated,
or Surface
Velocity from
Surface Combo
Sensor
CH2/V2 or DV2
Feet per Second
40075-40076
Pressure Depth
from Peak
Combo or
AV|Gated sensor
CH2/P2
Inches
40077-40078
Surcharge Peak
Velocity from the
Surface Combo
Sensor
CH2/PV2
Feet per Second
40079-40080
Temperature
from the sensor
attached to
Channel 2
CH2/CT2
Fahrenheit
40081-40082
10-16
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Register Addresses for Monitor Information
The following table contains the registers corresponding to more
general monitor information:
Description
Standard Units of Measure
Registers
Depth Conversion Coefficient
Inches
40137-40138
Velocity Conversion
Coefficient
Feet Per Second
40139-40140
Volume Conversion
Millions of Gallons per Day
40141-40142
Temperature Conversion Type
Fahrenheit
40143-40144
Scan (Wakeup) Rate
n/a
40197-40198
Note: Temperature Conversion Type will be reported as
9800 for Fahrenheit and 9801 for Celsius.
11-1
C H A P T E R 11
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
While the ADS TRITON+® flow monitor and sensors are designed
for dependability and durability, all electronic devices are
vulnerable to wear, malfunction, or failure, particularly in a harsh
sewer environment. However, many system problems can be
avoided altogether by performing routine maintenance and
inspections. The design of the monitor enables the user to perform
general diagnostics and troubleshooting to prevent, isolate, and
correct many problems easily. These serve to minimize
unnecessary monitor downtime and data loss.
This chapter provides routine maintenance instructions as well as
general diagnostic and troubleshooting guidelines for isolating and
correcting monitoring system problems.
Note: Remove the monitor from the manhole before
replacing the battery packs or performing other service
activities that may involve disconnecting cables from the
monitor.
11-2 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Maintaining the System Components
The TRITON+ flow monitor and sensors should receive routine onsite inspections and remote confidence checks to maintain the
equipment in optimal working condition, minimize monitor
downtime, and prevent possible data loss.
ADS recommends performing these inspections following initial
system installation, during site visits, and on a scheduled interval
(i.e., quarterly or during battery pack replacement).
Note: The only service or maintenance activities ADS
permits within the monitor chassis are battery pack battery
PCB, regulator/modem unit, and fuse replacement.
Therefore, do not handle, alter, modify, remove, or replace
any other components inside the monitor. Such actions
will void the monitor warranty agreement and the IS
certification.
Gathering Replacement Parts and Supplies
Gather the following replacement parts and supplies for performing
routine maintenance:
⚫
Dryer tube for sensors with pressure depth capability
⚫
Battery pack for TRITON+ monitor
⚫
Spare combo sensors and antenna as required
⚫
Soft bristle brush
⚫
Paper towels
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-3
⚫
Compressed air
⚫
Flat head screwdriver and assorted wrenches
⚫
Rubber stretch tape
⚫
Blue magnet (for troubleshooting wireless communications)
Inspecting the Monitor
Perform the following inspections during site visits or from a
remote location (when applicable):
⚫
Inspect the monitor mounting bracket to verify that the bracket
and bolts are free of heavy corrosion and the bolts are tightened
and secure.
⚫
Verify that the four bolts holding the monitor together are
snug, and tighten any loose bolts.
⚫
Verify that the monitor is mounted securely in the manhole.
⚫
Inspect the monitor for general integrity. Verify that nothing
more than surface corrosion is present and that the monitor has
no obvious mechanical defects. Replace the monitor if
necessary.
⚫
Perform monitor data confirmations. These can occur from a
remote location where wireless communication is available.
⚫
Review the applicable logs in Qstart™ to verify the status of
the monitor clock, communications, firmware, battery pack,
and temperatures.
⚫
Clean the monitor and sensors regularly with a soft bristle
brush and paper towels. However, do not use detergent!
Note: Please use special care when cleaning the crystals
on the Surface Combo Sensor. They are covered with a
Teflon® coating. Therefore, do not use a wire brush or
other abrasive, metallic device to clean these sensors.
11-4 ADS TRITON+ Manual
⚫
Make sure all connector ports on the monitor top are dry. Use
compressed air or paper towels to dry out wet or damp
connectors. Note and replace missing interfacial seals in the
sensor connector ends. The connectors can be protected
against moisture by wrapping with self-vulcanizing rubber
stretch tape. Make sure covers are securely in place on any
unused ports on the monitor top.
Confirming the Monitor
Confirm the accuracy of the sensor subsystems in the monitor on a
regular basis through Qstart. Confirmation involves comparing
manually-measured depth of flow and velocity readings to the
monitor's readings. This process also verifies sensor parameters.
Refer to the Qstart online help for detailed information on
performing confirmation procedures.
Obtaining (Uploading) the Monitor Hardware
Configuration
Uploading the monitor’s hardware configuration parameters can
assist in monitor troubleshooting. The uploaded information
displays the IMEI number, firmware version, and details on the
sensor hardware connected to the monitor and the channels to
which they are connected.
Use Qstart to upload the monitor hardware configuration by
performing the following:
1.
Open Qstart and select the monitor from the Location Name
drop-down list.
2.
Select the Connect button to establish communications with
the monitor.
3.
Select the Advanced button in the Functions section.
4.
Select the Upload button in the Configuration section to
upload the hardware configuration parameters from the
monitor.
5.
Print the log while online or hang up and access the saved log
in the Qstart Logs (Configuration type logs).
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-5
Sample uploaded configuration log
Obtaining (Uploading) the Monitor Configuration
Uploading the monitor’s current configuration parameters can assist
in monitor troubleshooting. The uploaded monitor information
shows the information currently stored in the monitor’s memory―
current device configuration and installation details. This
information can be useful to review prior to performing a monitor
activation to verify the monitor location information matches the
computer location information.
Use Qstart to upload the monitor configuration by performing the
following:
1.
Open Qstart and select the monitor from the Location Name
drop-down list.
2.
Select the Upload button to establish communications with the
monitor and automatically perform the location information
upload process. Qstart provides feedback concerning whether
the information matches between the computer and the monitor
and the user chooses whether to update the computer or not.
3.
Choose Hangup to disconnect from the monitor when the
upload is complete.
4.
If the location parameters on the local computer have been
updated, select Save.
Obtaining Diagnostic Codes from the Monitor
The TRITON+ enables you to observe monitor activity, view
diagnostic information, and confirm test cryouts from the monitor
through a small LED status window on the monitor top. The
numbers/characters which, once initialized, display in a sequence
11-6 ADS TRITON+ Manual
and represent current processes, identification, status, or readings
associated with the system and communications. The following
sections contain general descriptions and interpretations of the
diagnostic information available through the LED and instructions
for accessing information or prompting a message.
LED STATUS window on monitor top
Each character displayed in the LED represents a specific activity.
(Refer also to Appendix C for a list of these characters and the
activities to which they correspond.)
The presence of a yellow light at the upper left portion of the LED
display indicates the monitor is awake or involved in active
communication.
Note: Initiating the diagnostic code sequence using the
magnet also wakes up and resets the modem in the
monitor. When communication issues arise, the monitor
often will resume wireless communications after the
diagnostic codes are activated.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-7
Initiating and Reading the LED Diagnostic
Codes
Once the LED code sequence is initiated, codes display in the LED
window. Performing this process requires using a small magnet
(ADS p/n 8000-0460).
Note: ADS does not recommend initiating the diagnostic
code sequence while codes representing monitor activity
are displaying in the window. Therefore, verify that the
LED window is blank and in clear view before attempting
to initiate the code sequence.
Perform the following steps to initiate the LED diagnostic codes:
1.
Hold the ADS magnet against the red dot located next to the
WAKE label for several seconds.
2.
Move the magnet away from the monitor once the flashing A
displays in the LED window. (The sequence cannot begin until
the magnet is removed.)
Proper location for magnet on monitor top
11-8 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Codes initiate after removing magnetic from contact with monitor top
3.
Upon activation, interpret the diagnostic codes in succession in
the following way:
Note: Certain diagnostic information may not be relevant
or available based on the type of communication used by
the monitor. When no information is available for a
particular communication type, the applicable codes will
display zeros.
⚫
indicates modem initialization
⚫
indicates code initiation
is followed by the modem’s model number
⚫
is followed by the wireless provider’s number
⚫
is followed by the battery voltage to two decimal
⚫
places
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
⚫
11-9
is followed by the wireless communication raw
signal strength (ranging from 0 to 31), then
, followed by
the signal strength in decibels (ranging from -51 to -113 dBs;
99 indicates that no signal is available)
⚫
is followed by the monitor’s network IP address
⚫
is followed by the network type (e.g., EGPRS,
WCDMA, or HSPA)
Testing the Monitor Cryout Capability
You can test the monitor’s ability to perform a cryout, representing
a system event or alarm, to an ADS hosted software system (when
applicable) by holding the magnet against the red dot (labeled
WAKE) adjacent to the LED window on the monitor top for more
than 5 seconds and then releasing the magnet from the top. The
sequence Cryout indicates initiation of the cryout test message to
the address configured in the monitor through Qstart.
Checking the Monitor Battery Voltage
Check the battery voltage through the diagnostic codes (initiated on
the monitor LED STATUS window using the blue magnet) or in
Qstart before installing the monitor and after collecting data. The
projected life for the internal monitor battery pack is 15 months at a
15-minute sample rate for the 12-volt battery pack. Actual battery
life will vary based on the number of sensors and active functions
providing data. However, replace the battery pack as soon as
possible whenever the internal voltage for the 12-volt pack is 7.5
volts or less, or if Qstart provides a Low battery status. Although
the monitor may function adequately at 7.5 volts, communications
with the monitor will quickly begin to degrade and become
inconsistent once the battery voltage drops below 7.2 volts.
11-10 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Check the current battery voltage in the monitor through Qstart in
the following way:
Note: Checking the battery voltage through the monitor
status in Qstart for monitors equipped with dynamic SIM
cards is possible only through a serial (direct) connection.
1.
Select the monitor for which you want to check the battery
voltage form the Location Name field in the Monitor section
on the ADS Qstart dialog.
2.
Click on the Status button in the Functions section.
Once communication is established, the Monitor Status
window displays the current status information for the monitor,
including the current battery voltage. The status bar on the
ADS Qstart dialog also displays the current battery voltage.
Qstart will display the battery voltage on the status bar in red
if it is low.
3.
Review the Monitor Status that displays once communication
has been established. Replace the battery pack when the
Monitor Status indicates that the internal voltage is low.
The Print Preview dialog displays the current system
information, including the monitor battery voltage, in printable
format. Select the Print button to print the report contents, if
desired.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-11
Monitor Status report with internal battery pack voltage
4.
Close the Monitor Status window and then click on the green
Hangup button in the Functions section to discontinue
communication with the monitor.
Replacing the Monitor Battery Pack
Note: The only service or maintenance activities ADS
permits within the monitor chassis are battery pack, battery
PCB, regulator/modem unit, and fuse replacement.
Therefore, do not handle, alter, modify, remove, or replace
any other components inside the monitor. Such actions
will void the monitor warranty agreement and the IS
certification.
Warning: The TRITON+ can receive internal power
only from the ADS 12-volt IS battery pack (p/n 80000043-02/04). Do not use any other battery or power
source to power the monitor internally.
ADS offers a replacement 12-volt battery pack (ADS p/n 80000043-02) to replace the existing battery pack when the battery
voltage is low or falls below the previously specified level.
11-12 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Replacing the 12-volt battery pack involves a relatively simple
process.
Note: Battery pack replacement involves removing the
existing PCB for reuse with the replacement battery pack.
Therefore, do not discard or replace the PCB unless it is
necessary.
12-volt battery pack with PCB
Replace the internal battery in the TRITON+ monitor in the
following way:
1.
Collect the data from the monitor (remotely or on-site). This
will reduce the risk of data loss once the battery is
disconnected.
2.
Remove the monitor from the manhole, and disconnect the
following cables as applicable:
❑ Antenna cable from the ANTENNA port on the monitor
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-13
❑ Landline/PSTN modem module from the COMM + EXT
PWR port on the monitor
❑ Sensor cable(s) from the corresponding port(s) on the
monitor
3.
Move the monitor from the hazardous area (i.e., at least 20 feet
(6.1 m) away from the manhole), and place in a dry location.
4.
Brush off the monitor enclosure and remove the 4 bolts
securing the top to the canister using a 13-mm nut driver.
Note: Make a note of the orientation of the monitor top to
the canister before removing the bolts. Keeping proper
orientation between the canister and the top is critical to
maintaining the water and airtight seal on the monitor.
5.
Wipe away any debris or moisture that could enter the chassis
once the unit is opened.
6.
Remove the top (with the attached power regulator dome) by
pulling it straight up from the canister. The battery rests at the
bottom of the canister, and an 18-inch long cable extends from
the battery pack to the top.
Viewing 12-volt battery pack in monitor canister from top
11-14 ADS TRITON+ Manual
7.
Place the top next to the canister, and then disconnect the
battery cable from the dome cable and set the top/power
regulator dome assembly aside. However, do not disconnect
the battery cable while the monitor is awake (e.g., taking
readings or communicating)! When the monitor is awake,
characters and lights display on the LED STATUS window.
Note: Keep the underside of the top, the regulator dome,
and the top gasket free of dirt, mud, and other debris.
Debris and dirt can compromise the seal of the monitor
once it is reassembled. In addition, inspect the monitor
seal for damage.
Placing the top next to the monitor (left) and disconnecting the cables at the
plastic white connectors (right)
8.
Lift out the battery pack from the canister using the white
handle (band) attached to the top of the pack.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
12-volt battery pack outside canister (with retainer plug on top)
11-15
11-16 ADS TRITON+ Manual
9.
Lift off the retainer plug from the top of the battery pack, and
disconnect the PCB from the battery pack in the following
way:
12-volt battery pack without retainer plug
❑ Carefully move the thick red band securing the PCB to the
side of the battery pack off of the PCB.
❑ Carefully disconnect the PCB from the battery pack at the
white plastic connector.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-17
Disconnecting the PCB from the battery pack
❑ Set the PCB temporarily aside in a clean, dry location. Do
not discard! This PCB will be used with the replacement
battery pack.
10. Connect the PCB to the replacement battery pack and then
secure the PCB to the side of the pack with the red band.
11. Run the loose cable from the battery pack through the hole in
the underside of the retainer plug, and then seat the retainer
plug on top of the battery pack. Be sure to pull the excess
cable through the plug before fully seating the plug.
12. Lower the battery pack into the monitor canister, and then
connect the cable from the battery pack to the monitor
top/dome assembly.
11-18 ADS TRITON+ Manual
13. Coil the excess cabling around the inner wall of the canister,
and carefully lower the top/dome assembly back onto the
canister. Keeping the proper orientation between the canister
and the top is critical to maintaining the watertight and airtight
seal on the monitor. Once the top has been torqued down after
manufacture, the sealing gasket develops a memory profile of
the canister lip. Reassembling the two pieces in the same
orientation as before helps the gasket mate correctly with the
canister lip.
Note: Be careful to avoid pinching the battery cable
between the canister sealing lip and the gasket on the
monitor top during reassembly. The cable also can get
trapped between the two parts while tightening the bolts on
the monitor top, preventing an effective air/watertight seal
and potentially damaging the battery cable and/or gasket.
A
CH
NN E L
SENSORS
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
WAKE
CPU
SENS
0518
II 1 G
ST AT US
Rev
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
DATE
Sira 09ATEX2027X
SIR 006
S/N
CSA 2013 2671180
Ex ia IIB T3 (152°C)
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
IECEx SIR09.0020X
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
See CONTROL DWG 8000BK0009
Voir SCHEMA DE CONTROLE
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
Utilisez uniquement la batterie 8000-0043
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
A
NT
A
CONTAINS CELL XMTR
FCC ID: R17HE910
ENN
C
O
MM
R
TM
W
+ EX T P
R
w w w.a d s e n v.c o m
When securing top to canister,
always align COMM+EXT PWR connector
with backside of canister
and molded mounting flange.
Returning the monitor top to the proper orientation with the canister
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-19
14. Finger-tighten the top bolts to make sure the top and gasket are
seated properly. Then, tighten the bolts about halfway to full
torque value by tightening the opposite bolts. Finally, tighten
the bolts to approximately 30 inch-pounds (2.50 foot-pounds/
3.39 Nm) to fully secure the top to the canister. If the monitor
will not seal, loosen the bolts and check for a trapped wire or
debris on either the gasket or the lip. You can increase the
torque value on the bolts incrementally to assist in sealing.
However, tighten the bolts evenly to prevent distorting the
gasket and do not exceed 45-inch pounds (5.0843Nm).
15. Place the monitor upright on the ground surface beside the
manhole, and reconnect the antenna cable to the ANTENNA
port on the monitor or the landline/PSTN modem module to
the COMM + EXT PWR port on the monitor.
16. Check the new battery voltage by activating the diagnostic
codes in the LED STATUS window on the monitor using the
blue magnet. The internal voltage should now be well above
7.5 volts. Refer to Note: Initiating the diagnostic code
sequence using the magnet also wakes up and resets the
modem in the monitor. When communication issues arise, the
monitor often will resume wireless communications after the
diagnostic codes are activated.
17. Initiating and Reading the LED Diagnostic Codes on page 11-6
for instructions on initiating and interpreting the codes.
18. Wrap rubber stretch tape around the entire antenna
cable/ANTENNA port connection, extending 1 to 2 inches
onto the cable beyond the connection.
ANTENNA CABLE
COAXIAL STRETCH TAPE
ANTENNA PORT
TRITON+ MONITOR
11-20 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Antenna cable connected to ANTENNA port on monitor with stretch tape
properly applied
19. Reconnect the sensor cable(s) to the appropriate port(s)
(Channel 1 and/or Channel 2) on the monitor.
Inspecting, Cleaning, and Handling the
Sensors
Perform the following sensor inspections during regular site visits:
⚫
Verify that the installation ring, bands or Mounting Bar are
secure and clear of debris.
⚫
Carefully remove any debris that has accumulated on or around
the Long Range Depth Sensor.
⚫
Clean the face of the Submersion Sensor with a clean, moist
cloth as needed.
⚫
Clean the face of the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor gently with a soft brush, and wipe the sensor with a
clean, moist cloth.
Note: The crystals on the Surface Combo Sensor are
covered with a Teflon® coating. Therefore, do not use a
wire brush or other abrasive, metallic device to clean these
sensors.
⚫
Verify that the face of the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor is horizontally level with the flow. If necessary,
reposition the sensor according to the procedures in Chapter 3,
Sensor Installation and Connection.
⚫
Scrub the face of the Peak Combo Sensor or AV|Gated Sensor
with a soft bristle brush.
⚫
Confirm that all sensor cables are neatly arranged, securely
fastened, and free of debris, cuts, kinks, and breaks that may
affect performance. Replace any sensor that has a damaged
cable.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-21
When handling, storing, or packing the Surface Combo Sensor,
avoid contacting the metal cable connector with the crystals on the
sensor. This could damage the Teflon coating covering the crystals.
Replacing the Pressure Depth Sensor Dryer Tube
or Desiccant
All combo sensors with a pressure depth sensor include a pressure
depth sensor dryer tube. This tube contains desiccant that absorbs
the moisture from the air traveling through the dryer tube into the
clear plastic tubing leading to the pressure depth sensor in the pipe.
Replace the dryer tube or the desiccant contained within the dryer
tube on a regular basis or as necessary. Desiccant can absorb
moisture only when it is blue in color. Pink desiccant indicates that
it can no longer absorb moisture. Therefore, if the desiccant
appears either colorless or pink upon inspection, replace the dryer
tube or desiccant immediately.
Replacing the Dryer Tube
Replace the pressure depth sensor dryer tube (ADS p/n 3704-0032)
in the following way:
1.
Clip the cable ties securing the dryer tube to the monitor.
2.
Cut the clear flexible tubing running from the dryer tube to the
pressure depth sensor connector at a location close to the brass
barbed fitting on the dryer tube.
3.
Set aside, but do not discard, the old dryer tube with the used
desiccant.
4.
Attach a new dryer tube to the pressure depth sensor by
inserting the brass barbed fitting into the open end of the
plastic tubing running from the sensor connector. Make sure
the tubing seats firmly against the fitting to prevent air or
moisture transfer.
11-22 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Inserting the brass barbed fitting into the tube
5.
Secure the new dryer tube to the monitor.
6.
Remove the black end-cap from the dryer tube before reinstalling the monitor in the manhole.
Caution: If the cap is not removed, air will not be able to
enter the dryer tube, adversely affecting the pressure depth
sensor.
7.
Use the View or Read All function in the Qstart software to
fire the sensor and verify that the sensor is working correctly.
Replacing the Desiccant
When replacing the desiccant inside the pressure depth sensor dryer
tube, use indicating beads that are approximately 0.16 inches (4.1
mm) in diameter. Smaller beads may be able to escape the dryer
tube, entering the clear plastic tubing leading to the sensor
connector. The desiccant beads of the appropriate size for this
dryer tube are available through ADS (p/n 901-11055-00).
Replace the desiccant in the following way:
1.
Clip the cable ties securing the dryer tube to the monitor, when
applicable.
2.
Use a 5/8-inch nut driver to remove the inset nut at the free end
of the dryer tube (end of the tube opposite the brass barbed
fitting). Do not use pliers to remove this nut from the tube!
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-23
Free end of dryer tube with inset nut
Warning: Do not attempt to access the desiccant in the
dryer tube through the end of the tube with the brass
fitting! This fitting is not designed for removal.
Removing the fitting will damage the dryer tube and break
the moisture seal on that end of the tube.
3.
Use needle-nose pliers to gently remove the black foam
packing material just inside the opening.
4.
Pour out the old desiccant beads from the dryer tube.
5.
Refill an equivalent amount of new desiccant beads into the
tube.
6.
Carefully replace the foam packing into the dryer tube.
7.
Replace and tighten the nut on the dryer tube.
8.
Secure the dryer tube to the monitor using cable ties, when
applicable.
9.
Use the View or Read All function in the Qstart software to
fire the sensor and verify that the sensor is working correctly.
Note: Some desiccant may be reused following a special
process designed to remove the moisture from the beads.
Please consult the desiccant manufacturer for instructions
on performing this procedure, when applicable.
11-24 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Replacing the SIM Card: LTE-M SIM in 8000FST-IM-4VZ or 8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ
Note: The SIM cards in the 8000-FST-IM-4VZ and 8000FST-IM-EP-4VZ are specifically linked to the modem in
the monitor, therefore, DO NOT attempt to remove or
swap the SIM card from one of these monitors to another.
1.
2.
3.
Verify the SIM replacement for the 8000-FST-IM-4VZ or
8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ is part number M2MTC-2FF-HD-D.
Use Qstart to deactivate the monitor.
Remove the monitor from the manhole and place it in a dry,
clean location an adequate distance away from the manhole.
4.
Slide the old SIM card completely out of the holder.
5.
Insert the new SIM card into the groove in the holder on the
inside of the enclosure, notched edge first with the contacts
facing the pressure valve. Slide the SIM card all the way into
the holder, and press down to lock it into place. The holder’s
spring mechanism should secure the card in the holder.
6.
Replace the cap onto the SIM card enclosure and snap the
locks in place to secure the cap.
7.
Replace and reconnect the plastic tie between the locks holding
the cap on the SIM card enclosure.
8. Request a SIM deactivation for the removed SIM from
[email protected] Include the SIM number (from
the SIM card holder) and TRITON+ serial number. Once the
SIM card is deactivated, you may discard it.
9. Request a SIM activation of the new SIM from the service
provider. Include the SIM number and modem IMEI number.
Wait for confirmation the SIM has been activated.
10. Wait a few minutes and then use Qstart to connect wirelessly
to the monitor to ensure wireless communications.
11. Use Qstart to activate the monitor.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-25
Replacing the SIM Card (8000-FST-IM-GL or
8000-FST-IM-EP-GL)
TRITON+ monitors supporting global 3G wireless network
services handle wireless communications through an internal
modem that is supported by a replaceable SIM card that resides in
an enclosure on the monitor top. The SIM card typically requires
replacement only upon failure, which is rare, or when a change in
wireless carrier occurs. The monitor must be deactivated before
replacing the SIM card!
Replace the SIM card (ADS p/n 507181 or customer-supplied) in
the modem in the following way:
1.
Deactivate the monitor through Qstart.
2.
Remove the monitor from the manhole, and place it in a dry,
clean location (i.e., an adequate distance away from the
manhole).
3.
Wipe away any debris or moisture that could enter the SIM
card enclosure on the monitor top once the cap is removed
from the enclosure.
4.
Release and remove the reusable plastic tie running between
the locks holding the cap on the SIM card enclosure.
11-26 ADS TRITON+ Manual
SIM card enclosure with plastic tie
5.
Pull out the locks securing the cap to the enclosure, and
remove the cap from the enclosure.
SIM card enclosure locks released (left) and enclosure cap removed (right)
6.
The SIM card holder in the enclosure functions based on spring
action. Therefore, press the exposed edge of the SIM card into
the holder and release. The card should pop out slightly, freed
from its secured position.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-27
SIM card slightly ejected from its secure position in holder
7.
Slide the SIM card completely out of the holder.
8.
(applies only when using SIM cards with static IP addresses)
Record the number of the new SIM card (i.e., the IP address)
on the site report. You will need this address to update the LIF
in the Qstart software. The IP address is printed directly on
the SIM card or on a label affixed to the card.
9.
Insert the SIM card into the groove in the holder on the inside
of the enclosure, notched edge first with the contacts facing the
pressure valve. Slide the SIM card all the way into the holder,
and press down to lock it into place. The holder’s spring
mechanism should secure the card in the holder.
Empty SIM card holder showing pressure valve (left); inserting the SIM card
properly into the holder
11-28 ADS TRITON+ Manual
SIM card properly seated and secured in the holder
10. Replace the cap onto the SIM card enclosure, and snap the
locks in place to secure the cap.
11. Replace and reconnect the plastic tie between the locks holding
the cap on the SIM card enclosure.
12. Change the APN name using the Modem Setup device in
Qstart (when necessary).
13. Connect an ADS USB Serial Interface cable (ADS p/n 80000337) to the COMM + EXT PWR port on the monitor (for
battery powered monitors) or a standard A-to-B USB cable to
the USB port on the ExPAC (for externally-powered monitors).
Attach the other end of the USB cable to your laptop computer.
14. Reactivate the monitor through Qstart.
Note: You must reactivate the monitor through a direct
(serial) connection before you can resume wireless
communications following SIM card replacement.
15. Establish wireless communication with the monitor to verify
communication.
16. Recoil and secure the antenna cable to the cable tie mount
using a cable tie, if necessary. Refer to Installing the Antenna
in Chapter 4, Communication, for more information.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-29
Replacing the Fuses in the Monitor
The TRITON+ monitor contains a removable power regulator
secured to a special dome that resides inside the monitor enclosure
and is attached to the monitor top. If a regulator failure occurs, it
typically involves a bad fuse on the regulator board corresponding
to communications or sensors. The regulator board has three fuses,
indicated by three color-corresponding LED lights on top of the
monitor, (ADS p/n 508071, 508072, and 508073) that may be
replaced independently upon failure.
The 5-volt blue fuse corresponds to the sensors and can be blown
due to a shorted sensor. If this fuse is blown, the monitor cannot
detect the sensors. The 3.3-volt yellow fuse is associated with the
processor board. When blown, this fuse prevents the monitor from
logging data and performing successful communications. The red
(main input) fuse is related to the regulator board and rarely has
issues.
Refer to the Troubleshooting section beginning on page 11-37 to
identify whether a fuse may be the source of a particular problem
that has occurred within the TRITON+ system and, if so, which
fuse may require replacement.
Note: If the troubleshooting procedures indicate that a
sensor may have shorted or a sensor may have shorted and
the 5-volt (blue) fuse on the power regulator in the monitor
corresponding to the sensor may have blown, do not
connect the potentially shorted sensor to the same monitor
with a new 5-volt fuse or another monitor until confirming
that the sensor is functional (i.e., not shorted) using a
voltmeter. If the sensor is shorted, it also will blow the
newly replaced 5-volt fuse or the existing 5-volt fuse in the
other monitor. Please contact ADS Client Services for
detailed instructions on determining whether a sensor has
shorted.
Since the fuses attach to the board on the inside of the power
regulator dome inside the monitor, access to and replacement of a
fuse first requires opening the monitor and removing the dome.
Replace a fuse(s) in the monitor in the following way:
11-30 ADS TRITON+ Manual
1.
(applicable only when blue fuse requires replacement) Collect
the data from the monitor (remotely or on-site) to limit the risk
of losing data once the battery is disconnected.
2.
Remove the monitor from the manhole.
3.
(applicable only to externally-powered monitors) Turn off the
power to the monitor at the external source, and then
disconnect the external power/communications cable from the
COMM + EXT PWR port on the monitor.
4.
Disconnect the antenna cable from the ANTENNA port on the
monitor or the landline/PSTN modem module from the
COMM + EXT PWR port on the monitor.
5.
Disconnect the sensor cable(s) from the corresponding port(s)
on the monitor.
6.
Remove the monitor from the hazardous area (i.e., at least 20
feet (6.1 m) away from the manhole), and place in a dry
location.
7.
Brush off the monitor enclosure and remove the 4 bolts
securing the top to the canister using a 13-mm nut driver.
Note: Make a note of the orientation of the monitor top to
the canister before removing the bolts. Keeping proper
orientation between the canister and the top is critical to
maintaining the water and airtight seal on the monitor.
8.
Wipe away any debris or moisture that could enter the chassis
once the unit is opened.
9.
Remove the top (with the attached power regulator dome) by
pulling it straight up from the canister.
10. Place the top upside down next to the canister (with the dome
facing upward), and then disconnect the battery cable (when
applicable) from the dome cable. However, do not disconnect
the battery cable while the monitor is awake (e.g., taking
readings or communicating)! When the monitor is awake,
characters and lights display on the LED STATUS window.
Note: Keep the underside of the monitor top, the
regulator dome, and the top gasket free of dirt, mud, and
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-31
other debris. Debris and dirt can compromise the seal of
the monitor once it is reassembled. In addition, inspect the
monitor seal for damage.
Placing the top next to the monitor (left) and disconnecting the cables at the
plastic white connectors (right)
11. Remove the brass thumb nut securing the dome to the monitor
top.
Dome-securing Nut
Removing nut securing regulator dome to monitor top
12. Carefully lift off the dome from the top (as if opening like a
book). Notice the three fuses seated on the regulator board on
the inside of the dome.
11-32 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Inside of regulator dome (left) and underside of monitor top (right)
13. Remove the bad fuse(s) from the regulator board by gently, but
firmly, pulling and lifting it straight up from the board. Notice
that the label on each fuse displays a color bar (red, blue, or
yellow) that corresponds to the color coding on the board
adjacent to the fuse.
Close up of regulator board showing the three color-coded fuses
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-33
Blue fuse removed from the regulator board
14. Carefully insert the new, replacement fuse(s) into the
corresponding holes in the dome without bending the fuse
filaments. Verify that the color strip on the fuse matches the
color on the regulator board adjacent to the holes. Make sure
the fuse(s) is seated firmly and securely.
15. Realign and reseat the dome against the monitor top, and
replace the thumb nut to secure the dome to the top.
16. (applicable only to battery-powered monitors) Reconnect the
battery cable to the cable exiting from the hole in the top/dome
assembly.
17. Coil the excess cabling around the inner wall of the canister
(when applicable), and carefully lower the top/dome assembly
back onto the canister. Keeping the proper orientation between
the canister and the top is critical to maintaining the watertight
and airtight seal on the monitor. Once the top has been torqued
down after manufacture, the sealing gasket develops a memory
profile of the canister lip. Reassembling the two pieces in the
same orientation as before helps the gasket mate correctly with
the canister lip.
Note: Be careful to avoid pinching the battery cable
(when applicable) between the canister sealing lip and the
gasket on the monitor top during reassembly. The cable
11-34 ADS TRITON+ Manual
also can get trapped between the two parts while
tightening the bolts on the monitor top, preventing an
effective air/watertight seal and potentially damaging the
battery cable and/or the gasket.
A
CH
NN E L
SENSORS
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
WAKE
CPU
SENS
0518
II 1 G
ST AT US
Rev
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
DATE
Sira 09ATEX2027X
SIR 006
S/N
CSA 2013 2671180
Ex ia IIB T3 (152°C)
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
IECEx SIR09.0020X
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
See CONTROL DWG 8000BK0009
Voir SCHEMA DE CONTROLE
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
Utilisez uniquement la batterie 8000-0043
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
A
NT
A
CONTAINS CELL XMTR
FCC ID: R17HE910
ENN
C
O
MM
R
TM
W
+ EX T P
R
w w w.a d s e n v.c o m
When securing top to canister,
always align COMM+EXT PWR connector
with backside of canister
and molded mounting flange.
Returning the monitor top to the proper orientation with the canister
18. Finger-tighten the top bolts to make sure the top and gasket are
seated properly. Then, tighten the bolts about halfway to full
torque value by tightening the opposite bolts. Finally, tighten
the bolts to approximately 30 inch-pounds (2.50 foot-pounds/
3.39 Nm) to fully secure the top to the canister. If the monitor
will not seal, loosen the bolts and check for a trapped wire or
debris on either the gasket or the lip. You can increase the
torque value on the bolts incrementally to assist in sealing.
However, tighten the bolts evenly to prevent distorting the
gasket and do not exceed 45-inch pounds (5.0843Nm).
19. Place the monitor upright on the ground beside the manhole,
and reconnect the antenna cable to the ANTENNA port on the
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-35
monitor or the landline/PSTN modem module to the COMM +
EXT PWR port on the monitor.
20. (applicable only to externally-powered monitors) Reconnect
the external power/communications cable to the COMM +
EXT PWR port on the monitor. Restore power to the monitor
from the external source.
21. Establish communication with the monitor remotely to verify
communication.
22. Rewrap rubber stretch tape around the entire cable connection
between the antenna and ANTENNA port, extending 1 to 2
inches (25 to 50 mm) onto the cable beyond the connection.
When applicable, rewrap the connection between the external
power/communication cable and the COMM + EXT PWR
port in the same manner.
23. Reconnect the sensor(s) to the appropriate ports(s) (i.e.,
Channel 1 and/or Channel 2) on the monitor.
Interpreting the Diagnostic LED Codes on the
ExPAC
The ExPAC includes LED lights that provide diagnostic insight
into the current activities involving communications and power that
pertain to the ExPAC and overall system. The following image and
table includes brief descriptions of each diagnostic LED on the
ExPAC:
Communication
Port TX and RX
LEDS
I.S. TX and RX
LEDs
DC In
LED
I.S. DC
Out LED
11-36 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Diagnostic LEDs on ExPAC
LED
Color
DC IN (D21 next to P3
Yellow
I.S. DC OUT (D20 next
to P4
Yellow
TX (to communication
port)
I.S. TX (to TRITON+)
RX (to communication
port)
I.S. RX (to TRITON+)
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
State
Description
On
Device powered, 9 to 36
VDC
Off
Device not powered
On
TRITON+ power on
Off
TRITON+ power off
Flashing
Transmitting data to
communication port
Off
Not transmitting data
Flashing
TRITON+ transmitting
data
Off
Not transmitting data
Flashing
Receiving data from
communication port
Off
Not receiving data
Flashing
TRITON+ receiving data
Off
Not receiving data
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-37
Troubleshooting
The TRITON+ flow monitor contains several different components
that perform many different functions. Since a malfunctioning
component increases the risk of losing data, isolating the problem
component is essential to performing troubleshooting activities
efficiently. Minimizing monitor downtime is critical.
Consider the following when trying to isolate the component or
subsystem exhibiting the problem:
⚫
Problems affecting only one of the sensor subsystems are
usually caused by one subsystem alone. The problem may
exist in the monitor processor board, sensor (or other input
device), or cabling.
⚫
Problems affecting more than one subsystem usually can be
traced to a problem with the processor board, power source, or
communication lines. Problems in one subsystem can create
problems in other subsystems when the power source or
communication lines are faulty.
⚫
Problems with communications, clock readings, time stamps,
and data storage intervals usually arise from faulty processor
board components, incorrect information entered on the user's
PC, or low batteries.
⚫
Failures occurring outside a connector (i.e., between a
connector and the field input or output device) may arise from
problems with the field unit or component cabling. Failures
occurring on the inside (i.e., between a connector and the
printed circuit board) may arise from problems with the
processor board.
Note: If possible, collect all monitor data prior to
swapping sensors or troubleshooting a monitor to prevent
possible data loss. In addition, remove the monitor from
the manhole before disconnecting cables from the monitor
to avoid possible hazards.
Some problems that occur will not require a site visit, such as
incorrect equipment identification numbers or other system
parameters the user can re-enter on the local PC. However, some
11-38 ADS TRITON+ Manual
problems will require a site visit. When this is necessary, inform
the data analyst any time a field crew is en route to a monitor site to
troubleshoot problems so that the analyst can attempt to collect the
monitor data before they arrive. If the problem is a faulty monitor
and the analyst cannot collect the data remotely, replace the
monitor and deliver the faulty monitor to the office so the analyst
can attempt to collect the data directly. Then, send the monitor to
ADS for repair.
This section provides general guidelines for troubleshooting and
correcting problems with the TRITON+ monitor and sensor
subsystems.
General Monitor Problems
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the TRITON+ flow monitor.
Problem
Time stamp on the collected data is incorrect.
Possible
Causes
PC clock may have been set to incorrect time when the
monitor was activated.
Monitor time zone difference for the PC clock may not
have been set correctly when the monitor was activated.
Monitor clock may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the time on the PC clock and correct if necessary.
Reactivate the monitor to enable the clock.
Verify the time zone setting of the monitor. Correct and
reactivate if necessary.
Collect the data from the monitor and replace monitor if
defective.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-39
Problem
Time on the monitor clock is incorrect.
Possible
Causes
PC clock may have been set to the incorrect time when
the monitor was activated.
Monitor clock may be a faulty.
Monitor time zone difference for the PC clock may not
have been set correctly when the monitor was activated.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the time on the PC clock and correct if necessary.
Reactivate the monitor to enable the clock.
Verify the time zone setting of the monitor. Correct and
reactivate if necessary.
Collect the data from the monitor and replace monitor if
defective.
Problem
You receive a Device Time Out message in Qstart.
Possible
Cause
Communications may be marginal.
Possible
Solutions
Re-attempt communication with monitor. Verify signal
strength. Check a Qstart data collect log or check the
Status in Qstart. If the signal strength indicated is less
than -95 (for example: -99), consider re-orienting the
antenna and/or installing the antenna in a pedestal
above ground.
Modem may be defective.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the modem if defective.
11-40 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
Gap exists within the collected data.
Possible
Causes
Monitor time may be incorrect.
Possible
Solutions
Check monitor time, and reset clock if necessary.
Monitor firmware file may be corrupt.
Attempt to collect data within the gap.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Problem
Data is missing at the beginning or end of the date range
following data collection.
Possible
Causes
Monitor activation may have failed.
Monitor time may be incorrect.
Monitor’s firmware file may be corrupt.
Possible
Solutions
Verify whether the monitor has been activated, and
activate if necessary.
Check monitor time, and reset clock if necessary.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-41
Problem
Monitor independently discontinues logging data.
Possible
Causes
Battery pack may be dead or below minimum voltage
requirement (7.5 volts - internal).
3.3-volt (yellow) fuse on regulator may have blown.
Monitor memory may have been corrupted during
firmware upgrade, causing the monitor to record data
only during monitor communications.
Possible
Solutions
Replace battery pack.
Replace the 3.3-volt (yellow) fuse on the regulator.
If the monitor is logging data only during monitor
communications following a firmware upgrade, contact
your ADS regional representative to clear the monitor
memory and reactivate the monitor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Problem
An I/O error message displays when communicating
with the monitor.
Possible
Causes
Communication quality might be marginal.
Antenna may be defective.
Processor board may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Re-attempt communication with the monitor.
Temporarily attach new antenna, and permanently
replace the existing antenna if the error message no
longer occurs.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
11-42 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Communication Problems
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
wireless communications.
Note: Contact your ADS representative for further
diagnosis prior to replacing a sensor or monitor.
Problem
Monitor does not answer via wireless communication.
Possible
Causes
Signal strength to the modem may be insufficient.
Battery pack may be dead or below minimum voltage
requirement (7.5 volts - internal).
Wireless network failure.
SIM card is not properly provisioned.
Monitor may have lost communication with network and
cannot re-establish communication.
Connection type may be incorrectly configured in the
monitor.
Antenna may be defective.
Antenna may not be attached to the monitor.
Antenna may not be installed correctly.
Monitor may not be on the ADS VPN network.
Monitor may be defective.
Modem may be defective.
3.3-volt fuse on regulator may have blown.
Leading zeros are included before or within the IP
address.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Possible
Solutions
11-43
Check the diagnostic codes on the LED Status window
(using magnet) on the monitor top to verify the IP
address is available. If it does not display initially,
activate the LED Status window again after a minute or
two. Activating the LED Status will reset the modem,
which typically enables it to reconnect to the monitor. If
it still does not display, disconnect the battery pack from
the monitor for at least 1 minute and then reconnect the
battery pack. Once the LED is no longer illuminating,
reactivate the diagnostic codes to verify whether the IP
address is now available.
Relocate the antenna (consider a pedestal mount if
installed outside the manhole)
Reposition the antenna in the correct position of
horizontal and with “This Side Up’ facing upward.
Replace the antenna.
Replace the monitor battery pack (when applicable) if it
is reading below the minimum voltage requirement.
Try connecting to other wireless units in the same area
(other wireless monitor sites). If all connections fail for
similar IP addresses and/or none of the wireless
connections are successful, there may be a wireless
network outage in your area. Contact your regional ADS
representative for them to investigate a possible outage.
Delete any leading zeros included before or within the IP
address.
Replace SIM card in the GL monitor. (Does not apply to
4VZ.)
(applies only if the software provides a “Getting Monitor
Attention” message while attempting to communicate)
Try to communicate with the monitor through a serial
(direct) connection. If direct communication fails,
remove the monitor from the hazardous area (at least 20
feet away from the manhole), disconnect the battery
pack, wait at least 1 minute, reconnect the battery pack,
and then attempt to communicate. If the monitor still will
not communicate, replace the 3.3-volt yellow fuse on the
regulator.
Replace the monitor.
11-44 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
Wireless modem connects but monitor does not
respond.
Possible
Cause
Connection type configuration has reverted to Serial.
Possible
Solutions
Verify that the communication type is set to Wireless.
3.3-volt (yellow) fuse on regulator may have blown.
Connect directly with the monitor using a USB Serial
Interface cable (ADS p/n 8000-0337). Verify the monitor
responds. If it does, the modem might be faulty. If it
does not, remove the monitor from the hazardous area
(at least 20 feet away from the manhole), disconnect
the battery pack, wait at least 1 minute, and then
reconnect the monitor battery pack. If remote
communication resumes, try to connect several times to
ensure communication is reliable.
Replace the 3.3-volt yellow fuse on the regulator.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-45
Problem
Monitor cannot communicate over a serial connection.
Possible
Causes
Serial connection to monitor or field computer may be
loose.
Communication port may not be defined correctly in
Qstart.
USB Serial Interface cable may be damaged.
Serial port on the computer may not be generating
adequate power for the USB Serial Interface Cable to
facilitate communication with the monitor.
USB drivers are not loaded properly.
3.3-volt (yellow) fuse on regulator may have blown.
Possible
Solutions
Verify cable connections to monitor and field computer
are secure.
Verify the port is correct through the Control Panel on
your computer.
Inspect USB serial interface cable for damage.
Load USB drivers following the instructions on the USB
cable.
(applies only if the software provides a “Getting Monitor
Attention” message while attempting to communicate)
Remove the monitor from the hazardous area (at least
20 feet away from the manhole), disconnect the battery
pack, wait at least 1 minute, reconnect the battery pack,
and then attempt to communicate. If the monitor still will
not communicate, replace the 3.3-volt yellow fuse on the
regulator.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
11-46 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Long Range Depth Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
problems with the ultrasonic depth subsystem corresponding to the
Long Range Depth Sensor.
Note: Contact your ADS representative for further
diagnosis prior to replacing a sensor or monitor.
Problem
Depth measured not matching invert flow levels
Possible
Causes
Manhole depth is greater than sensor range (20 feet).
Manhole depth may be incorrect.
Physical offset may be incorrect.
Sensor may not be positioned correctly over the invert.
Something may be obstructing the sensor.
Sensor and/or mounting bar may not be level.
Possible
Solutions
Install the sensor within prescribed range.
Verify the manhole depth, and adjust if necessary.
Verify the physical offset, and adjust if necessary.
Reposition the Mounting Bar so sensor is directly over
the invert.
Neatly coil and cables and/or relocate TRITON+
monitor.
Verify the sensor and Mounting Bar are level, and adjust
if necessary.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-47
Problem
Depth measured remains a constant value.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be positioned incorrectly over invert and/or
incorrectly reading a stationary object (rung, bench, etc.)
in the manhole structure.
Sensor level is incorrect and not measuring invert depth.
Possible
Solutions
Reposition the Mounting Bar so sensor is directly over
the invert.
Neatly coil all cables and/or relocate TRITON+
monitor.
Verify the sensor and Mounting Bar are level, and adjust
if necessary.
Problem
Depth readings are erratic.
Possible
Causes
Debris is in front of sensor.
Mounting Bar has become dislodged.
Sensor cables are in front of sensor.
Sensor is attempting to measure depths beyond
specifications.
Sensor may be submerged.
Possible
Solutions
Clear any debris that may have accumulated on or
under the sensor.
Inspect the Mounting Bar to ensure installation is
secure.
Neatly coil sensor cables and secure them to the
manhole rung or wall.
Verify the sensor and Mounting Bar are level, and adjust
if necessary.
Wait for water level to recede and verify sensor readings
return to normal.
11-48 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Ultrasonic Depth Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
problems with the ultrasonic depth subsystem corresponding to the
Surface Combo Sensor and the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor.
Note: Contact your ADS representative for further
diagnosis prior to replacing a sensor or monitor.
Problem
Range from ultrasonic depth subsystem is slightly
inconsistent with manually measured range.
Possible
Causes
Physical offset may be incorrect.
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Electronic offset might be incorrect.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the physical offset, and adjust it if necessary.
Verify the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-49
Problem
Range from ultrasonic depth subsystem is significantly
greater than manually measured range.
Possible
Causes
Physical offset may be incorrect.
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Electronic offset may be incorrect.
Sensor may not be level.
Foam, extreme condensation, or other substance may
be absorbing the pulse.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the physical offset.
Verify the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
Make sure the sensor is level and in good condition.
Check the hydraulic conditions in the pipe.
Fire the sensor at a shorter distance onto a hard surface
to confirm accuracy.
Clean/dry the sensor.
Replace the sensor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
11-50 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
Range from the ultrasonic depth subsystem is too short
(but not zero).
Possible
Causes
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Electronic offset may be incorrect.
Sensor may be dirty.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
Clean the sensor.
Replace the sensor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Problem
Raw ultrasonic depth data shows depths greater than
the pipe diameter.
Possible
Causes
Physical offset may be incorrect.
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Electronic offset may be incorrect.
Pipe may be surcharged.
Sensor may be dirty.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the physical offset.
Verify the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
Clean the sensor.
Replace the sensor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-51
Problem
Depth data indicates a surcharged pipe, but the pipe is
free flowing.
Possible
Causes
Physical offset may be incorrect.
Electronic offset may be incorrect.
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Sensor may be dirty.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the physical offset and the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
Clean the sensor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Problem
Ultrasonic depth readings are erratic.
Possible
Causes
Noise may exist in the sewer pipe.
Sensor may be dirty.
Flow may be choppy or foamy.
Sensor may not be level.
Possible
Solutions
Check the flow conditions.
Clean the sensor.
Check if the sensor is level and correct if necessary.
Change the power Mode in the sensor parameter
settings to determine whether the readings improve. If
the readings improve, reactivate the monitor with the
new setting.
11-52 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
Individual ultrasonic depth readings (SDEPTH_3) from
Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor are
consistently equivalent to the value obtained from the
following equation: Pipe Height – Physical Offset + 9.99.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor.
5-volt (blue) fuse on regulator may have blown.
Replace the 5-volt (blue) fuse on the regulator.
Caution: Do not connect a potentially shorted sensor to
another monitor until confirming that the sensor is
functional (i.e., not shorted) using a voltmeter. A shorted
sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue) replacement fuse on
the regulator of the monitor.
Problem
Sensor reports abnormal temperatures.
Possible
Causes
Sensor connection to monitor may be loose.
Temperature sensor may be faulty.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Secure sensor connection to monitor if necessary.
Replace the sensor.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-53
Upward Depth Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the upward depth subsystem corresponding to the Peak Combo
Sensor.
Note: Contact your regional ADS representative for
further diagnosis prior to replacing a sensor or monitor.
Problem
UpDepth data periodically reads 0.63 inches (16 mm).
Possible
Causes
Minimum flows are occurring within sensor deadband
(extending 1.0 inches (25 mm) up from bottom of Peak
Combo Sensor) or the sensor is receiving a strong
return signal close to the sensor face.
Sensor transmit/receive surfaces are dirty.
Sensor or cabling might be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify minimum flow depths are not occurring within
sensor deadband.
Set the deadband on the UpDepth sensor to a setting
other than Auto, but well below the expected minimum
flow depth. Fire the sensor several times to verify
whether the readings improve.
Ensure the sensor is installed as closely as possible to
the 6:00 position in the pipe, silt allowing.
Clean the sensor transmit/receive surfaces.
Inspect the sensor cables for integrity.
Check for moisture in the connector.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
11-54 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
UpDepth data seems erratic over a full depth range.
Possible
Causes
Sensor transmit/receive surfaces may be dirty.
Sensor may be rotated greater than 15 degrees from
center.
Sensor may be faulty.
Processor board may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor transmit/receive surfaces.
Check the sensor connections.
Ensure the sensor is installed as closely as possible to
the 6:00 position in the pipe, silt allowing.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Problem
UpDepth readings are abnormally low.
Possible
Causes
Sensor transmit/receive surfaces may be covered with
silt.
Sensor may be physically offset in the flow and the
correct physical offset has not been measured and/or
downloaded to the monitor.
Possible
Solutions
Re-measure physical offset of the sensor.
Check the site conditions, and relocate the sensor if
necessary.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-55
Problem
Individual UpDepth_1 values consistently read -9.99.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Peak Combo Sensor.
5-volt (blue) fuse on regulator may be blown.
Replace the 5-volt blue fuse on the regulator.
Caution: Do not connect a questionable sensor to
another monitor before verifying the integrity of the
sensor. A shorted sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue)
replacement fuse on the regulator in the monitor.
11-56 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Peak Velocity Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the velocity subsystem corresponding to the Peak Combo Sensor
and Surface Combo Sensor (Surcharge Velocity Sensor only).
Since the Surface Combo Sensor is mounted at the top of the pipe,
potential issues involving a sensor that is out of the flow do not
apply to the Surface Combo Sensor.
Note: Contact your regional ADS representative for
further diagnosis prior to replacing a sensor or monitor.
Problem
Monitor often provides a velocity reading of 0.
Possible
Causes
Sensor’s velocity transmit/receive surfaces may be dirty
or the velocity function is broken.
Minimum flows may be occurring within the sensor
deadband (extending 1.0 inches (25 mm) up from the
bottom of the Peak Combo Sensor).
Cabling between the processor board and the velocity
sensor may be bad.
Velocity parameters may require adjustment.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor’s transmit/receive surfaces.
Verify that minimum flows are occurring outside the
sensor deadband.
Check the velocity parameters.
Inspect the sensor cables for tightness.
Check for moisture in the connector.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-57
Problem
Velocity data does not fluctuate much (but is not 0).
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be dirty.
Minimum flows may be occurring within the sensor
deadband (extending 1.0 inches (25 mm) up from the
bottom of the Peak Combo Sensor).
Velocity function may be broken.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor’s transmit/receive surfaces.
Verify that minimum flows are occurring outside the
sensor deadband.
Check the sensor connections.
Check the velocity parameters.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the velocity sensor.
11-58 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
Velocity data seems erratic or exhibits poor quality.
Possible
Causes
Sensor’s transmit/receive surfaces may be dirty.
Sensor may be close to extending out of the flow.
Designated value for the maximum velocity parameter
may be too high, creating too broad of a range.
Transmit Frequency setting may be incorrect.
Sensor may be faulty.
Processor board may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor’s transmit/receive surfaces.
Verify whether the flow depth exceeds the sensor
deadband at the same time and under the same
conditions as the erratic data. Rotate the sensor further
toward the center of the pipe if possible.
Change the Transmit Frequency. It should be set to
High for optimal performance.
Reduce the maximum velocity in the device parameters
to narrow the range.
Check the sensor connections.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Problem
Velocity readings are abnormally high.
Possible
Causes
Sensor’s velocity transmit/receive surfaces may be
covered with silt or other debris.
Sensitivity setting may be too high.
Sensor may be extending out of the flow.
Flow may be reversed or slower than (0.5 feet per
second (0.15 mps)
Possible
Solution
Check the site conditions, and relocate the sensor if
necessary.
Check the velocity parameters.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-59
Problem
Individual PEAKVEL_1 or PEAKVEL_3 values
consistently read -9.99.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Peak Combo Sensor or Surface Combo
Sensor.
5-volt (blue) fuse on regulator may have blown.
Replace the 5-volt blue fuse on the regulator.
Caution: Do not connect a questionable sensor to
another monitor before verifying the integrity of the
sensor. A shorted sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue)
replacement fuse on the regulator in the monitor.
Surface Velocity Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the surface velocity subsystem corresponding to the Surface Combo
Sensor.
Problem
Velocity readings are erratic or incorrect.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be dirty or covered by debris.
Maximum Velocity setting may require adjustment.
Transmit Frequency setting may require adjustment.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor transmit/receive surfaces.
Fine-tune Maximum Velocity setting in device
parameters.
Test other Transmit Frequency settings in the velocity
parameters.
11-60 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
Individual SURFACEVEL_3 values consistently read 9.99.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Surface Combo Sensor.
5-volt (blue) fuse on regulator may have blown.
Replace the 5-volt blue fuse on the regulator.
Caution: Do not connect a questionable sensor to
another monitor before verifying the integrity of the
sensor. A shorted sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue)
replacement fuse on the regulator in the monitor.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-61
Pressure Depth Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the pressure depth subsystem corresponding to the Peak Combo
Sensor or Surface Combo Sensor.
Note: Contact your regional ADS representative for
further diagnosis before replacing a sensor.
Problem
Pressure depth readings are erratic.
Possible
Causes
Pressure vent tube may be pinched or blocked with
water.
Pressure dryer tube may not be functioning properly.
Black cap may still be on the dryer tube.
Desiccant has absorbed too much moisture and no
longer allows the dryer tube to function properly.
Possible
Solutions
Inspect color of desiccant in dryer tube and replace the
dryer tube if necessary.
Inspect the vent tube along its entire length to ensure
the cable is not pinched and that the cable ties securing
the vent tube are not too tight.
Verify that the black cap has been removed from the
dryer tube.
Problem
Pressure depth readings display a good pattern, but are
consistently incorrect.
Possible
Cause
Sensor physical offset may be incorrect.
Possible
Solution
Verify the sensor offset and reactivate with the correct
settings if necessary.
11-62 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
Individual PDEPTH_1 values consistently read 0 under
wet pipe conditions.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Peak Combo Sensor.
5-volt (blue) fuse on regulator may have blown.
Replace the 5-volt (blue) fuse on the regulator.
Caution: Do not connect a questionable sensor to
another monitor before verifying the integrity of the
sensor. A shorted sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue)
replacement fuse on the regulator in the monitor.
Temperature Subsystem
The following table contains general troubleshooting techniques for
the temperature subsystem corresponding to all sensors supporting
the TRITON+.
Note: Contact your ADS representative for further
diagnosis prior to replacing a sensor or monitor.
Problem
Temperature readings are excessively low or incorrect.
Possible
Causes
Temperature sensor may be faulty.
Cable connecting sensor to monitor may be loose or
broken.
Processor board may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Examine the sensor connection to the monitor, and
verify that it is properly connected and secure.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-63
External Power, I/O, and Modbus Subsystems
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the external power, I/O, and Modbus subsystems corresponding to
externally-powered TRITON+ monitors, external input/output units
(XIOs), and external Modbus interface units (XBUSs).
Problem
Monitor is not receiving power from the external source.
Possible
Causes
Breaker may have tripped.
Station power may be off.
Wiring may not be properly connected.
Power supply may be faulty.
ExPAC may be faulty.
Communication cable running between the ExPAC,
XBUS, or XIO is disconnected or defective.
Possible
Solutions
Reset breaker.
Have owner/operator restore main power source to
station, as applicable.
Verify that the wiring is properly connected inside the
XIO/XBUS or to the ExPAC and power supply.
Verify that “On” LED on the front of the power supply in
the XIO/XBUS is illuminated. If it is not, but AC power is
live, replace the power supply/XBUS/XIO.
Verify that the DC OUT LED (to the right of the DC OUT
terminal connector) on the ExPAC is illuminated. If it is
not, but the DC INPUT LED (to the right of the DC
INPUT terminal connector) is illuminated, test the power
at the DC OUT (P4 pins 1 & 2). If power is not available,
replace the ExPAC/XBUS/XIO.
Inspect the communication cable for proper connection
at the monitor and the ExPAC/XBUS/XIO.
Replace communication cable between monitor and
ExPAC/XBUS/XIO.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
11-64 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
Data or readings received at customer input device from
XIO 4-20 mA output are not accurate or were
unexpected.
Possible
Causes
Wiring from XIO output to external 4-20 mA input device
may not be properly connected. (Note: The XIO
provides loop power to both 4-20 mA outputs).
XIO Device may not have been properly configured
through Qstart.
Analog module in XIO may not have been setup properly
or may be defective.
Possible
Solutions
Verify wiring between XIO output and the external input
device has been properly connected.
Verify that the correct entity has been selected and that
the scale has been set properly in Qstart. If necessary,
adjust the configuration and reactivate the monitor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Problem
Data or readings received at the monitor through the 420 mA input in the XIO from the customer output device
are not accurate or were unexpected.
Possible
Causes
Wiring from XIO analog input to external 4-20 mA output
device may not be properly connected.
XIO Device may not have been properly configured
through Qstart.
Analog module in XIO may not have been setup properly
or may be defective.
Possible
Solutions
Verify wiring between the XIO input and the external
output device has been properly connected.
Verify that the correct analog input entity has been
selected, the scale has been set properly, and the
appropriate data checkboxes have been selected in
Qstart. If necessary, adjust the configuration and
reactivate the monitor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
11-65
Problem
Data received at the monitor through the digital input in
the XIO from the customer output device is not
consistent with output.
Possible
Causes
XIO Device may not have been properly configured in
Qstart for the digital input.
Possible
Solutions
Verify that the D1 (or D2) entity and the Store Data
checkbox have been selected for the appropriate digital
input from the XIO Device configuration in Qstart. If
changes are required, reactivate the monitor. (Note:
The D1 corresponds to digital output 1 and D2
corresponds to digital output 2.)
Contact your regional ADS representative.
11-66 ADS TRITON+ Manual
Problem
Event status received at customer input device from XIO
digital output is not accurate.
Possible
Causes
XIO Device may not have been properly configured in
Qstart for the digital output.
Possible
Solutions
Verify that the HIGH_LEVEL (or HIGH_HIGH) entity has
been selected for the appropriate digital output from the
XIO Device in Qstart. Verify that High Threshold and
High-High Threshold have been selected for the Depth
Alarms from the MLI Device in Qstart. If changes are
required, reactivate the monitor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Problem
Modbus communication is not successful.
Possible
Causes
Wiring to RS-485 or RS-232 port on ExPAC may be
incorrect.
Communication port settings in customer device may be
incorrect.
Modbus ID designated in Qstart may be incorrect.
ExPAC may be defective.
Possible
Solutions
Verify wiring for RS-485 or RS-232 is correct.
Verify that the proper communication port settings have
been set in the customer device. Port settings should be
19200 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit (8-N-1),
and no flow control.
Verify that the Modbus ID is correct Qstart. If the ID
requires modification, update the ID and reactivate the
monitor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
A-1
APPENDIX A
Specifications
This appendix contains specifications for the ADS TRITON+ flow
monitor and associated subassemblies, sensors, cables, and the
external power, Modbus, I/O, and landline hardware.
TRITON+ Flow Monitor (ADS p/n 8000-FST-IM)
Enclosure
Cylindrical 0.37-inch (6.39-mm) thick, seamless,
plastic canister with stainless steel threaded
inserts
Aluminum end-cap attached to canister with four
stainless steel bolts and a gasket interface
Meets NEMA6P/IP68 standard
Dimensions
17.75 inches (451 mm) long by 8.75 inches (222
mm) maximum diameter 6.63 inches (168 mm)
minimum diameter
Weight
30.3 pounds (13.7 kg) (with 12-volt battery pack)
Operating /
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4 to 140 F (-20 to 60 C)
Storage: -4 to 167 F (-20 to 75 C)
A-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Power
Internal: One 12-volt, 110 AH, IS alkaline battery
pack
External (option): External Power and
Communications Unit (ExPAC) with an ADS- or
customer-supplied 9- to 36-volt (minimum 15
watt) DC power supply.
Battery Life
15 months at 15-minute sample rate with one
Peak Combo Sensor and weekly pull
communications (i.e., data collects)
11 months at 15-minute sample rate with one
Peak Combo Sensor and hourly push
communications to FTP site
Actual battery life will vary depending on
operating temperature, number of active devices
operated, and frequency of communications.
Connectors
Inputs and
Outputs
Memory
Data Storage
U.S. MIL-C-26482 series 1, for environmental
sealing, with gold-plated contacts and interfacial
seals
•
2 configurable sensor inputs
•
1 communication connector for direct
interface with a computer, external power
input and external communications, or water
quality sampler output cable connection
•
1 antenna port
•
1 SIM card enclosure with an air pressure
valve (for testing purposes only)
832 kilobytes
150 days for 6 stored entities (Peak Combo
Sensor) at a 15-minute sample rate – Refer to
Calculating the Total Days of Storage Available
on page A-4 for details and instructions on
calculating the number of days of data that can be
stored in memory for a specific application.
Specifications
Modem
A-3
For monitors supporting 3G global network
services:
Modem: Telit HE910-D UMTS/HSPA+/GSM
cellular modem using TCP/IP (Transmission
Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
Bands: UTMS 800/850/AWS/1900; GSM 800/
900/1800/1900
For monitors supporting Verizon® network
services:
Modem: Telit ME910C1-NV, LTE-M, cellular
modem using TCP/IP
Bands: B13, 700 MHz
NOTE: The Verizon LTE-M SIM is specifically
linked to the modem in the monitor, therefore; DO
NOT attempt to remove or swap the SIM card
from one monitor to another.
Approvals
Certified under the ATEX European Intrinsic
Safety standards for Zone 0 rated hazardous
areas
Certified under IECEx (International
Electrotechnical Commission Explosion Proof)
Intrinsic Safety Standards for use in Zone 0
(equivalent to Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D)
rated hazardous areas
CSA Certified to Class 2258 03 – Process Control
Equipment, Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive
Systems – For Zone 0 Hazardous Locations, Ex
ia IIB T3 (152°C) in Canada.
CSA Certified to Class 2258 83 – Process Control
Equipment, Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive
Systems – For Class I Zone 0 Hazardous
Locations, AEx ia IIB T3 (152°C) in the USA
(equivalent to Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D).
A-4
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Calculating the Total Days of Storage Available
This section includes a special equation to use in determining the
number of days of data that can be stored in the monitor memory
based on a specific application. Consider the following when
calculating the total days:
•
The monitor memory holds 832 kilobytes (or 851,968 bytes) of
data.
•
The log rate determines the number of readings taken per day.
At a 15-minute sample rate, the monitor will record 96 readings
a day for a single entity. At a 5-minute sample rate, the
monitor will record 288 readings a day for a single entity.
•
One entity reading consumes 8 bytes of monitor memory.
•
The following table lists the standard number of entities
recorded for each sensor device. The date/time stamp for a
reading is equal to one reading. Therefore, each total below
represents the actual entities plus one date/time stamp. A
date/time stamp must be included for each monitoring point
associated with the monitor.
•
Peak Combo
Sensor
AV|Gated
Sensor
Surface
Combo
Sensor
Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor
7
7
6
3
Deduct 2 to 3 days from the total days of storage to
compensate for additional overhead in memory.
Following is the equation for calculating the total days of storage
available in the monitor memory:
Data Storage Available in the Monitor (in Bytes)
=
Number of
Readings
Taken per
Day for
One entity
X
Memory
Consumed for
One Entity
Reading
(Date/Time
Stamp)
X
Number of
Entities Logged
by the Monitor
(based on the
selected
devices)
Total Days of
Storage in the
Monitor
Memory
Specifications
A-5
For example, recording data at a 15-minute sample rate using a
Peak Combo Sensor offers approximately 150 days of data storage.
851,968 bytes
96 readings
X
8 bytes
X
=
7 entities (including
1 for the date/ time
stamp)
158 days (150 when
accounting for
overhead)
A-6
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Intrinsically-Safe Sensors
Long Range Depth Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS6-C1-10)
This sensor supports downward ultrasonic depth at long range and
detects surcharge levels near the manhole lid.
Long Range Depth
Housing
ABS plastic shell, polyurethane-filled
Dimensions
9.15 inches (232.4 mm) long x 4.40 inches (111.8
mm) wide x 4.22 inches (107.2 mm) high
Cable
Standard size: 10.0 feet (3.05 m) long x 0.285
inches (7.2 mm) nominal OD, polyurethane jacket
Extension cables available up to 300 feet (91 m)
Operating /
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4° to 140° F (-20° to 60° C)
Storage: -4° to 167° F (-20° to 75° C)
Note: The sensor will not produce accurate
readings when ice is built up on the sensor.
Specifications
A-7
Accuracy
0.25% of range or 0.13 inches (3.2mm) whichever
is greater in a constant temperature air column
Deadband
0.00 inches/mm
Frequency
75kHz
Range
Resolution
Drift
240 inches (6.1 m) from bottom of sensor housing
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
0.0 inches/mm
Submersion Sensor
Housing
Dimensions
Cable
Operating /
Storage
Temperature
ABS plastic shell, epoxy-filled
2 inches (50.8mm) length x 2 inches (50.8mm)
wide x 1.14 inches (29 mm) high
3 ft. (0.91 m) length, 0.35 inches nominal (8.9mm
nominal) OD, polyurethane jacket.
Operating: -4 to 140 F (-20 to 60 C)
Storage: -4 to 167 F (-20 to 75 C)
Note: The sensor will not produce accurate
readings when ice is built up on the sensor.
A-8
ADS TRITON+ Manual
AV|Gated Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS7-10-35)
This sensor supports upward ultrasonic depth, average velocity,
pressure depth, and water temp.
Enclosure
Polycarbonate plastic shell, epoxy-filled
Dimensions
Enclosure: 6.76 inches (172 mm) long x 1.23
inches (31 mm) wide x 0.83 inches (21 mm) high
Cable
Standard size: 35 feet (10.7 m) x 0.28 inches (7.2
mm) nominal OD, polyurethane jacket
Extension cables available up to 300 feet (91.4 m)
Operating /
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4 to 140 F (-20 to 60 C)
Storage: -4 to 167 F (-20 to 75 C)
Note: This sensor will not produce accurate
readings in frozen flow.
Upward Ultrasonic Depth
Upward Depth
Accuracy
0.5% of reading or +/- 0.125 inches (3.2 mm),
whichever is greater
Deadband
Extending 1.0 inch (25 mm) up from the bottom of
the sensor
Frequency
1 MHz
Range
72 inches (1828.8 mm)
Resolution
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Drift
0
Gated Velocity
Range
-20 to 20 feet per second (-9.1 to 9.1 m/sec)
Deadband
Extending 5.0 inches (127 mm) up from the
bottom of the sensor
Frequency
1 MHz
Resolution
0.01 feet per second (0.003 m/sec)
Specifications
Accuracy
A-9
+/- 0.2 ft/sec (0.06 m/sec) or 4% of actual
average velocity (whichever is greater) in flow
velocities from -5 to 20 ft/sec (-1.52 to 6.10
m/sec)
Pressure Depth
Pressure
Range
0.0 to 10.0 PSI (0.0 - 0.68 Bar): up to 23.06 feet
(7.03 m)
Pressure
Accuracy
0 - 10.0 PSI (0 - 0.68 Bar): +/- 2.8 inches (70.3
mm)
Pressure
Resolution
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Peak Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS4-xx-35/1H)
This sensor supports upward ultrasonic depth, peak velocity, and
pressure depth.
Enclosure
ABS plastic shell, epoxy-filled
Dimensions
Enclosure: 6.76 inches (172 mm) long x 1.23
inches (31 mm) wide x 0.83 inches (21 mm) high
Cable
Standard size: 35 feet (10.7 m) or 100 feet (30.5
m) long x 0.28 inches (7.2 mm) nominal OD,
polyurethane jacket
Extension cables available up to 300 feet (91.4 m)
Operating /
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4 to 140 F (-20 to 60 C)
Storage: -4 to 167 F (-20 to 75 C)
Note: This sensor will not produce accurate
readings in frozen flow.
Upward Ultrasonic Depth
Upward Depth
Accuracy
Deadband
0.5% of reading or +/- 0.125 inches (3.2 mm),
whichever is greater
Extending 1.0 inch (25 mm) up from the bottom of
the sensor
A-10
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Frequency
250 kHz – 1 MHz
Range
60 inches (1524 mm)
Resolution
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Drift
0
Peak Doppler Velocity
Range
-30 to 30 feet per second (-9.1 to 9.1 m/sec)
Deadband
Extending 1.0 inch (25 mm) up from the bottom of
the sensor
Frequency
250 kHz – 1 MHz
Resolution
0.01 feet per second (0.003 m/sec)
Accuracy
+/- 0.2 ft/sec (0.06 m/sec) or 4% of actual peak
velocity (whichever is greater) in flow velocities
from -5 to 20 ft/sec (-1.52 to 6.10 m/sec)
Pressure Depth
Pressure
Range
0.0 to 5.0 PSI (0.0 - 0.34 Bar): up to 11.5 feet (3.5
m)
0.0 to 15.0 PSI (0.0 - 1.03 Bar): up to 34.5 feet
(10.5 m)
0.0 to 30 PSI (0.0 – 2.07 Bar): up to 69.0 feet
(21.0 m)
Pressure
Accuracy
0 - 5.0 PSI (0 - 0.34 Bar): +/- 1.4 inches (36 mm)
0 - 15.0 PSI (0 - 1.03 Bar): +/- 4.1 inches (104
mm)
0.0 to 30 PSI (0.0 – 2.07 Bar): +/- 8.3 inches (211
mm)
Pressure
Resolution
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Specifications
A-11
Surface Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-xx30/1H)
This sensor supports downward ultrasonic depth, surface velocity,
surcharge peak velocity, and surcharge pressure depth.
Enclosure
ABS plastic shell, epoxy-filled
Dimensions
Cable
10.61 inches (269 mm) long x 2.03 inches (52
mm) wide x 2.45 inches (62 mm) high
Standard size: 30.0 feet (9.14 m) long x 0.35
inches (8.9 mm) nominal OD, polyurethane jacket
Extension cables available up to 300 feet (91 m)
Operating /
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4 to 140 F (-20 to 60 C)
Storage: -4 to 167 F (-20 to 75 C)
Note: The sensor will not produce accurate
readings when ice is built up on the sensor.
Downward Ultrasonic Depth
Accuracy
0.125 inches (3.2 mm)
Deadband
1.0 inch (25.4 mm) from the sensor face or 5% of
maximum range, whichever is greater
Frequency
40 kHz
Range
Resolution
Drift
1.0 inch (25.4 mm) (or 5% of maximum range,
whichever is greater) to 10.0 feet (3.05 m)
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
0
A-12
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Surface Velocity
Accuracy
+/- 0.25 feet per second (0.08 m/s) or 5% of the
actual reading (whichever is greater) in flow
velocities from 1.00 to 15.00 ft/sec (0.30 to 4.57
m/s)
Note: Flow conditions may cause the designated
accuracy to vary and hinder or prevent the
effective use of surface velocity technology.
Deadband
3 inches (76 mm) from the bottom of the rear,
descended portion of the sensor
Minimum
Velocity
1 foot per second (0.30 m/sec)
Frequency
Range
Resolution
Varies based on the parameter settings
3 to 42 inches (7 to 1067 mm)
0.01 feet per second (0.003 m/sec)
Surcharge Peak Velocity
Range
-30 to 30 feet/second (-9.1 to 9.1 m/sec)
Frequency
250 kHz
Resolution
0.01 feet per second (0.003 m/sec)
Accuracy
+/- 0.2 ft/sec (0.06 m/sec) or 4% of actual peak
velocity (whichever is greater) in flow velocities
from -5 to 20 ft/sec (-1.52 to 6.10 m/sec)
Specifications
A-13
Surcharge Pressure Depth
Pressure
Range
0.0 to 5.0 PSI (0.0 - 0.34 Bar): up to 11.5 feet (3.5
m)
0.0 to 15.0 PSI (0.0 - 1.03 Bar): up to 34.5 feet
(10.5 m)
0.0 to 30 PSI (0.0 – 2.07 Bar): up to 69.0 feet
(21.0 m)
Pressure
Accuracy
0 - 5.0 PSI (0 - 0.34 Bar): +/- 1.4 inches (36 mm)
0 - 15.0 PSI (0 - 1.03 Bar): +/- 4.1 inches (104
mm)
0 - 30 PSI (0 - 2.07 Bar): +/- 8.3 inches (211 mm)
Pressure
Resolution
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-D1-0030)
This sensor supports downward ultrasonic depth.
Housing
Dimensions
Cable
ABS plastic shell, epoxy-filled
10.61 inches (269 mm) long x 2.03 inches (52
mm) wide x 2.45 inches (62 mm) high
Standard size: 30.0 feet (9.14 m) long x 0.35
inches nominal (8.9 mm nominal) OD,
polyurethane jacket
Extension cables available up to 300 feet (91 m)
Operating /
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4 to 140 F (-20 to 60 C)
Storage: -4 to 167 F (-20 to 75 C)
Note: The sensor will not produce accurate
readings when ice is built up on the sensor.
A-14
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Accuracy
0.125 inches (3.2 mm)
Deadband
1.0 inch (25.4 mm) from the sensor face or 5% of
maximum range, whichever is greater
Frequency
40 kHz
Range
Resolution
Drift
1.0 inch (25.4 mm) (or 5% of maximum range,
whichever is greater) to 10.0 feet (3.05 m)
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
0.0 inches/mm
Inclinometer Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-0528)
This sensor determines tilt via an accelerometer.
Housing
Dimensions
Cable
Weight
Operating Range
Operating /
Storage
Temperature
Solid, molded ABS providing high impact and
abrasion resistance in a fully sealed device
Height 0.865 in (2.2 cm); Width: 2.03 in (5.16 cm);
Length: 3.0 in (7.62 cm)
25 ft (7.62 m) X 0.28 in (7.1 mm) OD;
polyurethane jacket
1.5 lbs (0.68 kg) including 25 feet (7.62 m) of
communication cable and connector
0 to 90º
Operating: -4 to 140 F (-20 to 60 C)
Storage: -4 to 167 F (-20 to 75 C)
Note: The sensor will not produce accurate
readings when ice is built up on the sensor.
Specifications
Accuracy
Resolution
A-15
+/- 0.25º between 0 and 40º
0 to 60º = 0.03º;
60 to 90º = 0.3º
Mounting Method
Compatibility
Mount vertically (90º) or horizontally (180º) or
level on flat surface on the closed flood gate
The Inclinometer sensor is ONLY compatible with
the ADS TRITON+ flow monitor via the
communications port
USB Serial Interface (ADS p/n 8000-0337)
The USB serial interface (or direct connection) cable supports onsite communications with the ADS TRITON+ monitor. It consists
of two cables: a primary cable with interface box and potted metal
connector and a standard USB Type A to Type B cable.
Cable Length
Primary Cable: 10 feet (3.1 m) long
USB A-to-B Cable: 6 feet (1.8 m) long
Construction
Primary: Shielded, 10-conductor cable with
polyurethane jacket; in-line opto-isolation
PCB in ABS plastic housing : 3.3 inches (85 mm)
x 2.5 inches (63 mm) x 1.1 inches (28 mm)
Connections
Primary: Factory-fitted potted connector (to
TRITON+ monitor COMM + EXT PWR port)
USB A-to-B Cable: Type B connector (to interface
box) and Type A connector (to USB port on
computer)
A-16
ADS TRITON+ Manual
ExPAC (ADS p/n 8000-0377)
The ExPAC (External Power and Communication unit) enables the
TRITON+ to receive power from an external DC source and
supports Modbus communications.
Enclosure
Rectangular, ABS Plastic, DIN rail or wall mount,
IP20
Dimensions
5.7 inches (145 mm) wide x 3.6 inches (91 mm)
high x 1.6 inches (41 mm) deep
Weight
Operating
Temperature
External Power
0.55 pounds (0.25 kg)
-4 to 122 F (-20 to 50 C)
Requires DC power input between 9 to 36 volts
and a minimum of 15 watts
I.S. DC output of 8 to 11.8 volts, 500 mA
Connectors
One RS-485 (3 terminals), one RS-232 (DB9),
one USB type B, one 9-to-36-volt DC input (3
terminals), monitor communications (5 terminals),
and one DC out (3 terminals)
Certifications
Associated Apparatus certification for use with
approved equipment in Zone 0 (equivalent to
Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D, in the U.S.) and
Zone 0 in the EU via SIRA/ATEX/CSA
Sira 09ATEX2027X, IECEX SIR09.0020X,
CSA 2013 2671180
Specifications
A-17
Power Supply (ADS p/n 508293)
This ADS-recommended power supply supports externallypowered TRITON+ monitors.
Manufacturer
and Model
Dimensions
Weight
XP Power DNR60US24
3.60 inches (90 mm) high x 1.59 inches (41 mm)
wide x 4.53 inches (115 mm) deep
0.8 pounds (350 g)
Operating
Temperature
-40 to 158 F (-40 to 70 C)
Input Voltage
85-264 VAC
Output Voltage
Ripple and Noise
24 V
50 mV pk-pk, 20 MHz bandwidth (may increase at
low temperatures)
A-18
ADS TRITON+ Manual
XBUS (ADS p/n 8000-0427)
The XBUS™ (External Modbus Interface unit) enables the
TRITON+ to receive power from an external AC power source and
supports Modbus communications.
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
Operating/
Storage
Temperature
Indoor/outdoor NEMA 4X (IP 66), PBT and
polycarbonate plastic with hinged cover
11.02 inches (280 mm) long x 7.49 inches (190
mm) wide x 5.03 inches (128 mm) deep
4.0 pounds (1.8 kg)
14 to 122 F (-10 to 50 C)
Power Supply
XP Power DNR60US24 (Refer to page A-17 for
specifications and details on the power supply)
Power Input
85-264 VAC, 120-375 VDC; 47-63 Hz; 1.10 A @
110 / 0.59 A @ 250 VAC
External Power/
Communications
Unit
ADS ExPAC (Refer to page A-16 for
specifications and details on the ExPAC)
Connectors
Three cable glands for power cable, monitor
communication cable, and RS-232/RS-485 cable,
NEMA4X/IP66 protection
Certification
Associated Apparatus certification for use with
approved equipment in Zone 0 (equivalent to
Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D, in the U.S.) and
CSA Class I, Zone 0, IIB
Sira 09ATEX2027X, IECEX SIR09.0020X, CSA
2013 2671180
Specifications
A-19
XIO (ADS p/n 8000-0400)
The XIO™ (External Input/Output unit) enables the TRITON+ to
receive power from an AC power source and serves as a digital and
analog input and output interface.
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
Operating/
Storage
Temperature
Indoor/outdoor NEMA 4X (IP 66), PBT and
polycarbonate plastic with hinged cover
11.02 inches (280 mm) long x 7.49 inches (190
mm) wide x 5.03 inches (128 mm) deep
5.0 pounds (2.3 kg)
14 to 122 F (-10 to 50 C)
Power Supply
XP Power DNR60US24 (Refer to page A-17 for
specifications and details on the power supply)
Power Input
85-264 VAC, 120-375 VDC; 47-63 Hz; 1.10 A @
110 / 0.59 A @ 250 VAC
Analog Inputs
Two 4-20mA inputs
Isolation: 1500 VAC
Accuracy: 0.05% F.S.
Thermal Drift: 100ppm/C
Analog Outputs
Two 4-20mA outputs
Provides loop power
500 ohm drive capability
Isolation: 1500 VAC
Accuracy: 0.1% F.S.
Linearity: 0.05% F.S.
Thermal Drift: 100ppm/C
Digital Inputs
Two-switch, solid state, or dry contact inputs
Input impedance: 4.7 Kilo-ohms
A-20
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Digital Outputs
Two SPST Relays
Maximum Load: 2 A @ 250 VAC, 2A @ 30 VDC
Minimum Load: 5 VDC, 20 mA
External
Power/Comm
Unit
Connectors
ADS ExPAC (Refer to page A-16 for
specifications and details on the ExPAC)
Three cable glands for power cable, monitor
communication cable, and digital and/or analog
I/O cable, NEMA4X/IP66 protection
5.2-mm DIN rail terminal blocks for I/O connection
(30- to 12-gauge wire size)
Certification
Associated Apparatus certification for use with
approved equipment in Zone 0 (equivalent to
Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D, in the U.S.) and
CSA Class I, Zone 0, IIB
Sira 09ATEX2027X, IECEX SIR09.0020X, CSA
2013 2671180
B-1
APPENDIX B
Part Numbers
This appendix contains a parts list of the most commonly ordered and used
parts supporting the ADS TRITON+® flow monitoring system.
Monitors
8000-FST-IM-4VZ
TRITON+ MONITOR, VERIZON LTE-M (INCLUDES 12VOLT IS BATTERY PACK)
8000-FST-IM-EP-4VZ
TRITON+ MONITOR, EXTERNAL POWER, VERIZON
LTE-M (DOES NOT INCLUDE 12-VOLT IS BATTERY
PACK)
8000-FST-IM-GL
TRITON+ MONITOR, GLOBAL (3G/4G GLOBAL
BANDS; INCLUDES 12-VOLT IS BATTERY PACK)
8000-FST-IM-EP-GL
TRITON+ MONITOR, EXTERNAL POWER, GLOBAL
(3G/4G GLOBAL BANDS; DOES NOT INCLUDE 12VOLT IS BATTERY PACK)
Sensors and Sensor and Sampler Cables
8K-CS7-10-35
SENSOR, CS7, AV|GATED, UPWARD DEPTH,
AVERAGE VELOCITY, PRESSURE SENSOR 0 -10PSI
(0.0 – 0.68 BAR), 35-FT (10.6m) CABLE
8K-CS4-05-35
SENSOR, CS4, UPWARD DEPTH, PEAK VELOCITY,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 5 PSI (0 – 0.34 Bar), 35-FT
(10.6-m) CABLE
8K-CS4-15-35
SENSOR, CS4, UPWARD DEPTH, PEAK VELOCITY,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 15 PSI (0 – 1.03 Bar), 35-FT
(10.6-m) CABLE
8K-CS4-30-1H
SENSOR, CS4, UPWARD DEPTH, PEAK VELOCITY,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 30 PSI (0 – 2.07 Bar), 100-FT
(30.5-m) CABLE
B-2 ADS TRITON+ Manual
8K-CS5-D1-00-30
SENSOR, CS5, US DEPTH, 30-FT (9.14-m) CABLE
8K-CS5-V2-05-30
SENSOR, CS5, US DEPTH, SURFACE VEL,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 5 PSI (0 – 0.34 Bar), 30-FT
(9.14-m) CABLE
8K-CS5-V2-15-30
SENSOR, CS5, US DEPTH, SURFACE VEL,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 15 PSI (0 – 1.03 Bar), 30-FT
(9.14-m) CABLE
8K-CS5-V2-30-1H
SENSOR, CS5, US DEPTH, SURFACE VEL,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 30 PSI (0 – 2.07 Bar), 100-FT
(30.5-m) CABLE
8K-CS6-C1-10
SENSOR, CS6, LRD, CAPSNS, 10’
8000-0023-xxx (xxx
represents cable
length in feet)
SENSOR EXTENSION CABLE, FOR SENSORS without
PRESSURE; STANDARD LENGTHS: 25 FT (7.6m), 50
FT (15.2m), 75 FT (22.8m), 100 FT (30.5m). CUSTOM
LENGTHS TO 300 FT (91m)
8000-0025–xxx (xxx
represents cable
length in feet)
SENSOR EXTENSION CABLE, FOR SENSORS with
PRESSURE; STANDARD LENGTHS: 10 FT (3.0m), 25
FT (7.6m), 50 FT (15.2m), 75 FT (22.8m), 100 FT
(30.5m), 125 FT (38.1m), 150 FT (45.7m), 200 FT
(61.0m). CUSTOM LENGTHS TO 300 FT (91m)
8000-0044-25
CABLE, EXT, COMM/SERIAL PORT, 25’ (7.6-m)
8000-0528
ASSY, INCLINOMETER, TRITON+
8000-0348
SAMPLER CABLE, IS TRITON+, 25-FT (7.6-m), NO
CONNECTOR
8000-0348-01
SAMPLER CABLE, IS TRITON+, 25-FT (7.6-m), FLOW
PROPORTIONAL MODE CONNECTOR
8000-0348-02
SAMPLER CABLE, IS TRITON+, 25-FT (7.6-m), LEVEL
ACTIVATION MODE CONNECTOR
Communication Parts
8000-0334-4VZ-UK1
4G LTE-M VERIZON REG/MODEM CDMA UPGRADE
KIT
8000-0334-4VZ-UK2
4G LTE-M VERIZON REG/MODEM HSPA UPGRADE
KIT
8000-0337
USB SERIAL INTERFACE CABLE (includes 10-foot
(3.1-m) primary cable and 6-foot (1.8-m) removable,
standard USB A-to-B cable)
Part Numbers
B-3
8000-0044-25
USB SERIAL INTERFACE EXTENSION CABLE, 25 FT
(7.6 m) – also extends the Direct Serial Interface cable
(p/n 8000-0054)
508227
STANDARD USB TYPE A TO TYPE B CABLE, 6 FT
(1.8 m) (replacement for USB cable component in 80000337)
507181
SIM CARD, AT&T, FIXED IP
9000-0080
4G/3G ANTENNA with 12-FT (3.6-m) CABLE, SMA
CONNECTOR (for 4VZ and GL TRITON+)
3800-0162
GSM HIRSCHMAN SLIM ANTENNA with 15-FT (4.8-m)
CABLE, SMA CONNECTOR (GL TRITON+ only)
3800-0163
GSM SMARTEQ MINIWING ANTENNA with 15-FT (4.8m) CABLE, SMA CONNECTOR (GL TRITON+ only)
507165
EXTENSION, ANT, 15’ SMA Female to SMA MALE
507168
EXTENSION, ANT, 50’ SMA Female to SMA MALE
8000-0460
MAGNET, BLUE (for activating diagnostic codes)
Monitor Replacement Parts
8000-0043-04
BATTERY PACK, IS, 12V, UNPOTTED with PCB
8000-0043-02
BATTERY PACK, IS, 12V, UNPOTTED without PCB
8000-0447
BLACK FEET, MOUNTING BAR (CS6)
8000-0141
RETAINER, PLUG, URATHANE, 12-V IS BATTERY (for
use with 8000-0043-01/02)
8000-0042-03
PCB, BATTERY, w/ CABLE
3704-0032
REPLACEMENT VENT DRYER TUBE
8000-0338
PROCESSOR BOARD ASSEMBLY
8000-0334-3G
POWER REGULATOR ASSEMBLY, GLOBAL MODEM
AND REPLACEABLE FUSES, IS, 3G, FST-IM
8000-0334-3V-S
POWER REGULATOR ASSEMBLY, VERIZON MODEM
AND REPLACEABLE FUSES, IS, FST-IM
508071
FUSE, MOLDED, 315mA, TH, SLOW BLOW, RED
BAND
508072
FUSE, MOLDED, 140mA, 3.3-volt, TH, SLOW BLOW,
YELLOW BAND
B-4 ADS TRITON+ Manual
508073
FUSE, MOLDED, 100mA, 5-volt, TH, SLOW BLOW,
BLUE BAND
Standard Size Installation Rings ( w/ spreader mechanism & Surface Combo
Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor bracket)
RING,SS [STAINLESS STEEL], [Pipe Diam. Range]
I25-0081
RING, SS, 6 IN (152mm)
I25-0082
RING, SS, 7 - 8.3 IN (178 - 211mm)
I25-0083
RING, SS, 9 - 10.3 IN (229 - 262mm)
I25-0084
RING, SS, 11 - 12.3 IN (279 - 312mm)
I25-0085
RING, SS, 12.5 - 14 IN (317 - 375mm)
I25-0086
RING, SS, 313.5 - 15.75 IN (343 - 400mm)
I25-0087
RING, SS, 14.4 - 16.75 IN (368 - 425mm)
I25-0088
RING, SS, 16.75 - 18.75 IN (425 - 476mm)
I25-0089
RING, SS, 18.5 - 20.75 IN (470 - 527mm)
I25-0090
RING, SS, 20.5 - 22.75 IN (521 - 578mm)
I25-0091
RING, SS, 22.5 - 28.75 IN (572 - 730mm)
I25-0092
RING, SS, 38.5 - 36.75 IN (724 - 933mm)
I25-0093
RING, SS, 36.5 - 48.75 IN (927 - 1238mm)
I25-0094
RING, SS, 48.75 - 60.75 IN (1238 - 1543mm)
I/O and External Power Parts
8000-0377
ExPAC, DIN RAIL, RS485/232/USB
8000-0427
XBUS, MODBUS
8000-0378-xxx (xxx
represents cable
length in feet)
EXTERNAL POWER CABLE, ExPAC-to-TRITON-IM;
STANDARD LENGTHS OF 10 FT (3.0m), 25 FT( 7.6m),
and 100 FT (30.5m); CUSTOMIZABLE UP TO 800 FT
(243.8m)
508293
POWER SUPPLY, 24VDC, 2.5A, 60W, DIN RAIL
508292
MODULE, 4-20mA, 2 IN, 2 OUT, RS485, MODBUS
Part Numbers
8000-0400
XIO, TWO 4-20mA INPUT, TWO 4-20mA OUTPUT,
TWO RELAY OUTPUT, TWO DIGITAL INPUT
8000-0434-xxx (xxx
represents cable
length in feet)
KIT, GROUND, EXTERNAL POWER, TRITON+;
STANDARD GROUND CABLE LENGTHS OF 10 FT
(3.0m), 25 FT( 7.6m), and 100 FT (30.5m);
CUSTOMIZABLE UP TO 800 FT (243.8m)
B-5
Other mounting hardware
8000-0450
ROD, MOUNTING, EXPANDING, CS6, LRD SENSOR
8000-0481
EXTENSION, ROD, MNTG, EXPNDNG, CS6, LRD
SENS
8000-0484
ROD, WALL-MOUNTED, CS6, LRD SENSOR
8000-0307
BRACKET, MOUNTING, SLIDE, SURFACE COMBO or
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR (CS5)
8000-0299
BRACKET, ADAPTER, SLIDE, CS5 to I25-0001 (for
mounting current version of Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to
previous version of Ultrasonic Depth Sensor mounting
bracket)
8000-0271
ADAPTER, PEAK COMBO SENSOR, SILT MOUNT
I40-0007
FLANGE, PIPE SPECIAL INSTALL, PRE-DRILLED,
8 FT (2.44m), SS
700-100238-00
SPECIAL INSTALL RING MATERIAL, SS, 12 IN
(304mm) LONG
I40-0009
FLANGE HANDLE (for mounting monitor in manhole) 2
IN (51mm) WIDE X 18 IN (457mm) LONG X 0.25 IN
(6mm) THICK
508058
BOLT, HEX, SS, M8 X 30MM1
517-8001254-00
WASHER, FLAT, SS1
517-8001274-00
WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, SS1
8000-0021
HOOK, SS, 2-PIECE W/ HARDWARE (FOR
MOUNTING MONITOR ON MANHOLE RUNG)
I10-0003
SPREADER MECHANISM FOR RING, COMPLETE, SS
I40-0010
BRACKET, SURCHARGE, with ULTRASONIC SLIDE
(Note: When ordering this bracket, you also must order
B-6 ADS TRITON+ Manual
the Sliding Adapter Bracket (8000-0299) for receiving the
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor.)
I10–0012
18-IN (610-mm) CRANK HANDLE, SS
1
This item is part of the mounting hardware included with the monitor for the flange handle
(ADS p/n I40-0009).
Note: In all applications, only ADS IS-Certified Service
Technicians are authorized to perform TRITON+ board
and/or component-level.
C-1
APPENDIX C
Monitor Activity Codes
This appendix contains a list of the ADS TRITON+® monitor
activity codes that display automatically on the LED STATUS
window on the monitor top while the monitor is running. This list
also includes descriptions of the monitor activities corresponding to
the codes.
Note: Some of the activities share a common code.
Code
Monitor Activity
Cycling modem power
Processing alarms
Calculating final updepth waveform
(from Peak Combo Sensor)
Reading all the sensor pairs from the
(downward) ultrasonic depth sensor
(stand-alone or integrated sensor in the
Surface Combo Sensor)
Reading the downlooking ultrasonic
depth sensor
Running BASIC task
C-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Code
Monitor Activity
Closing the FTP connection
Deep sleep (monitor going to sleep)
Reading peak velocity (from the Peak
Combo Sensor)
Changing FTP directories
Running display task
Running diagnostic task
Erasing files in modem
Encoding CSV data for FTP delivery
Processing events
Viewing the FTP CSV file send status
Hanging up
No active events
Writing file to modem
Measuring peak velocity (from the Peak
Combo Sensor)
through
NumReadings – updepth reading
number
grabNums – number of vpeak grab
uPairs – number of ultrasonic pairs
being fired
Connecting to FTP site
Waiting for modem power
for 0.5 seconds,
then
for 0.5
seconds
Monitor Activity Codes
Code
C-3
Monitor Activity
Requesting the FTP CSV file send
status
Processing commands
Reading pressure depth (from the Peak
Combo Sensor or Surface Combo
Sensor)
Waiting to receive a message
Processing surface spectrums
Sleep
Reading surface velocity (from the
Surface Combo Sensor)
Transmitting a message
Reading temperature
Reading updepth (from the Peak
Combo Sensor)
System startup
. (Blinking decimal)
Actively communicating through a serial
or wireless connection (remains on and
off an equivalent period of time) or
actively communicating over an FTP
connection (remains on twice as long
than off)
Experiencing communication errors
between the processor (ADS p/n 80000338) and the regulator/modem (ADS
p/n 8000-0334). Check fuse F9 on
battery PCB (ADS p/n 8000-0042-3)
and cable connections between
processor and regulator/modem.
D-1
APPENDIX D
Third-Party Logger Support
The TRITON+® can be configured to provide data to select thirdparty loggers. This appendix contains information regarding the
Telog® Ru-33 Recording Telemetry Unit (RTU) and the Ayyeka®
Wavelet™.
D-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Telog Ru-33
Using a wireless, battery-powered TRITON+ monitor to support the
Telog Ru-33 requires some limited configuration and setup of the
TRITON+. These procedures involve designating the appropriate
identification information to enable recognition and data exchange
between the ADS and Telog units and using an interface cable to
connect the monitor to the RTU.
Note: The Telog Ru-33 must have firmware version
3.300 or later to effectively request data from the
TRITON+ monitor. Contact Telog customer support for
information on setting up the Ru-33.
Connecting the units together primarily involves running the ADS
Triton-Telog Comm Cable from the battery-powered Ru-33 to the
battery-powered TRITON+ monitor. This application requires
installing both units in the manhole, a hazardous environment.
However, ADS offers an optional extension cable (ADS p/n 80000044-25) that allows you to install the Telog unit outside the
hazardous environment.
Note: The Telog Ru-33 does not possess IS (intrinsicallysafe) certification. Therefore, an installation involving
connecting the Telog to the IS TRITON+ with both units
residing inside the manhole will not be considered
intrinsically safe. The installation will be considered
intrinsically safe only when the Ru-33 is installed outside
the manhole.
Configuring the Monitor to Support the Ru-33
Configuring the TRITON+ to support the Telog Ru-33 requires
setting two parameters in Qstart when establishing a new location.
Refer to Create and Configure the Monitor Location in Chapter 6,
Configuration and Activation, for more information.
•
Modbus ID This represents the Modbus slave ID that will be
used by the Ru-33 to indicate the specific monitor from which
System Configuration and Setup for Telog Ru-33 D-3
to request the data. The default ID is 1 (one). Do not change
this value!
•
Modbus Delay Response This represents the amount of
time, in milliseconds, following the request before the monitor
will return the requested Modbus output data to the Ru-33.
ADS recommends maintaining the 10 ms default setting.
Connecting the Monitor to the Ru-33
Connecting the TRITON+ to the Ru-33 requires the ADS TritonTelog Comm Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054-01). First, connect the
black, metal connector (with gray, plastic boot) from the comm
cable to the COMM + EXT PWR port on top of the TRITON+.
Then, connect the black, plastic connector from the comm cable to
either sensor port on the Ru-33. The sensor port is the 9-hole port.
Triton-Telog Comm Cable
Antenna
connector
5-pin
connector
A
CH
NN E L
SENSORS
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
WAKE
CPU
SENS
0518
II 1 G
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga Rev
Sira 09ATEX2027X DATE
SIR 006
Telog Ru-33
S/N
CSA 2013 2671180
Ex ia IIB T3 (152°C)
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
IECEx SIR09.0020X
Ex ia IIB T3(152°C) Ga
Ta = -20°C to +60°C
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
See CONTROL DWG 8000BK0009
Voir SCHEMA DE CONTROLE
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
Utilisez uniquement la batterie 8000-0043
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST-IM
Use only battery pack 8000-0043
CONTAINS CELL XMTR
FCC ID: R17HE910
A
NT
A
ST AT U S
9-hole port
ENN
C
O
MM
R
TM
W
+ EX T P
R
w w w.a d se n v.c o m
COMM + EXT PWR
TRITON+
Connecting the Telog Ru-33 to the TRITON+ monitor using the Triton –
Telog Comm Cable
Note: Do not leave the Triton-Telog Comm Cable
connected to the TRITON+ monitor when the cable is not
also connected to an operational Telog Ru-33. This may
D-4
ADS TRITON+ Manual
cause the TRITON+ to remain awake, unnecessarily
consuming battery power and, consequently, draining the
battery pack. Therefore, disconnect the Triton-Telog
Comm Cable from the TRITON+ monitor whenever the
Telog unit is disconnected from the cable for an extended
period of time, removed from the manhole, or out of
service.
Ayyeka Wavelet
Using a TRITON+ monitor to support the Ayyeka Wavelet also
requires some limited configuration and setup.
Configuring the Monitor to Support the Wavelet
Configuring the TRITON+ to support the Wavelet requires setting
two parameters in Qstart when establishing a new location. Refer
to Create and Configure the Monitor Location in Chapter 6,
Configuration and Activation, for more information.
•
Modbus ID This represents the Modbus slave ID that will be
used by the Wavelet to indicate the specific monitor from
which to request the data. Numbers 1, 58, and 97 are restricted
Modbus IDs for the TRITON+ using Modbus RTU protocol,
but any other number between 2 and 247 may be chosen.
•
Modbus Delay Response This represents the amount of
time, in milliseconds, following the request before the monitor
will return the requested Modbus output data to the Wavelet.
ADS recommends maintaining the 10 ms default setting.
Connecting the Monitor to the Wavelet
Connecting the Ayekka Wavelet to the TRITON+ involves
modifying a communication cable (p/n 8000-0054) to interface with
the Wavelet hardware.
System Configuration and Setup for Telog Ru-33 D-5
1.
Take the cable and remove the hardware on the end by
removing the screws.
Communication Cable (p/n 8000-0054)
Cable with Hardware Removed
D-6
ADS TRITON+ Manual
2.
Cut the end of the wires to remove the connector. Slide the
three pieces of the cap onto the cable to be used later.
Cable with Wires Cut and Cap in Place
3.
Cut the orange wire to remove it.
Cable with Orange Wire Removed
4.
Wire the four wires into the Ayyeka connector. The blue wire
goes into pin 1, green into pin 2, red into pin 3, and black into
pin four, as shown below.
System Configuration and Setup for Telog Ru-33 D-7
Cable with Wired into New Connector
5.
Screw the cap into the connector to complete the cable
modification.
Modified Cable
6.
The cable can now connect the Wavelet to the TRITON+.
D-8
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Connecting the Wavelet to the TRITON+
E-1
APPENDIX E
Sampler Cable Connections and
Specifications
This appendix contains information regarding the ADS TRITON+
sampler cable connections and specifications.
E-2
ADS TRITON+ Manual
TRITON+ Sampler Cable Illustrations
Sampler Cable Illustration
Note: The Output Impedance is 500Ω.
Note: The fuse within the sampler cable is Manufacturer:
Shurter Inc. p/n 0034.6602.
Note: If a 6-pin to 7-pin adapter is required, select the proper
adapter from the sampler provider. Be sure to note that the
adapter has the correct male/female conversions.
Sampler Cable Connection Options and
Specifications
The TRITON+ enables the user to connect a water quality sampler
to the monitor for flow proportional or level-based sampling
operations. ADS offers three 25-foot (7.6-m) cable optoins for
connecting the sampler to the monitor based on the type of
sampling.
Sampler Connections and Specifications E-3
•
No Pre-Wired Connector (ADS p/n 8000-0348) on application
(non-monitor) end of the cable
Specifications for ADS Sampler Cable 8000-0348 – Raw Wires on application end of
Sampler Cable
E-4
ADS TRITON+ Manual
•
Flow Proportional 6-pin Pre-Wired Connector (ADS p/n 80000348-01)
Specifications for ADS Sampler Cable 8000-0348-01 for Flow Proportional Sampling
•
Level Actuation 6-ping Pre-Wired Connector (ADS p/n 80000348-02)
Specifications for ADS Sampler Cable 8000-0348-02 for Level Actuation Sampling
In-8
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Index
1
1/2-band mount, 5-49
silt mount adapter, 5-50
12-volt IS battery pack, 2-3, 2-11
checking voltage, 11-9
replacement, 11-12
3
3/4-band mount, 5-44
silt mount adapter, 5-46
4
4-20mA inputs
connection, 9-3
4-20mA outputs
connection, 9-8
4VZ
SIM card replacement, 11-24
A
AC power cable
wiring to the power supply, 6-15
Accelerometer
Rotation, 4-6
Slope, 4-6
activating the monitor, 4-89
Activating the SIM Card, 3-18
activity codes, 11-6
ADS hosted software system
receiving test cryouts from the
monitor, 11-9
Advanced Device
Notification, 4-22
Advanced Device
Diagnostic tab, 4-18
Modem Setup tab, 4-19
alarms
testing monitor cryouts, 11-9
Alarms device parameters, 4-27
analog device, 4-24
analog inputs, 2-28, 9-1
connection, 9-3
analog outputs, 2-28, 9-1
connection, 9-8
SCADA, 9-8
ANGLE entity, 8-6
antenna, 1-5
installation, 3-8
antenna installation
inside the manhole, 3-8
outside the manhole, 3-10
ANTENNA port, 2-9
APN username and password, 4-19
ATEX
compliance, 1-13
hazardous area, 1-13
standards, 1-2
special conditions for use, 1-6
AV|Gated
editing device
temperature parameters, 4-39
AV|Gated, 4-29
Data Acquisition parameter, 4-37
device parameters, 4-27, 4-29
editing ultrasonic parameters, 4-30
editing velocity parameters, 4-35
general, 2-1
Maximum Velocity parameter, 437
Minimum Velocity parameter, 437
overview, 2-16
Index
pressure depth sensor, 2-18
upward ultrasonic depth
measurement, 2-17
AV|Gated
verifying the sensor position, 4-94
AV|Gated
install information, 5-25
AV|Gated
mounting across from crank, 5-25
AV|Gated
mounting to the ring, 5-25
AV|Gated
securing the cables, 5-27
AV|Gated
verifying the sensor position, 5-29
AV|Gated
installing the ring warning, 5-29
AV|Gated
installing in pipes with silt, 5-31
AV|Gated
physical offset, 5-36
AV|Gated
special installs, 5-38
AV|Gated
securing dryer tube to the monitor,
5-85
B
band
securing the sensor cables, 5-53
battery pack, 1-5, 2-11
replacement, 11-12
voltage
minimum, 11-9
Battery voltage
storage options, 4-18
board
voltage regulator, 2-11
C
cables
In-9
connecting the computer directly
to the monitor, 3-21
connecting the computer to the
monitor through the ExPAC, 322
direct connect, 3-21
indirect connection, 3-22
sensor
extension, 5-42, 5-63
securing in the pipe/manhole, 581
securing to the band, 5-53
securing to the ring, 5-27
standard A-to-B USB cable, 3-22
USB serial interface, 3-21
driver installation, 3-22
specifications, A-15
CDMA/EV-DO communication, 2-4,
3-3
modem
information, 1-13
cellular network, 2-4
certifications, 1-10
ATEX, 1-13
CSA, 1-23
Declaration of Conformity, 1-30
EC Type Examination Certificate,
1-18
IECEx, 1-20
modem, 1-13
SIRA, 1-18
special conditions for use, 1-6
channel, 2-9, 4-29, 4-52, 4-68, 4-71
checking the sensors, 11-20
checklist
project organization, 2-29
cleaning the sensors, 11-20
collecting data, 4-99
COMM + EXT PWR port, 2-9
communication, 1-5, 3-1
antenna, 1-5
direct, 2-3
ExPAC LED codes, 11-35
installing the antenna, 3-6, 3-20
installing the wireless antenna, 3-8
In-10
ADS TRITON+ Manual
internal modem, 1-5
modem
testing monitor cryouts, 11-9
monitor activity codes, 11-6
monitor ANTENNA port, 2-9
monitor COMM + EXT PWR
port, 2-9
on-site, 2-5, 3-21, 3-22
overview, 2-4
remote, 2-3
troubleshooting, 11-42
wireless, 2-3, 2-4, 3-3
compliance, 1-10
ATEX, 1-13
CSA, 1-23
Declaration of Conformity, 1-30
hazardous area, 1-13, 1-20, 1-23
IECEx, 1-20
configuration
editing devices
AV|Gated Sensor, 4-29
Data Delivery, 4-41
Modem Setup, 4-19
Peak Combo Sensor, 4-52
Surface Combo Sensor, 4-70
Modbus, 10-1, 10-10, D-2, D-4
Telog Ru-33, D-2, D-4
configuring a location, 4-7
confined space entry, 5-3
confirmations, 4-96, 11-4
confirming sensors, how to, 4-96
connecting a laptop directly to
monitor, 3-21
connecting a laptop to monitor
through the ExPAC, 3-22
connecting the monitor to a Telog
Ru-33, D-3
connectors
connecting a water quality sampler
to the monitor, 5-83
connecting sensors to the monitor,
5-83
monitor, 2-8
consumption of power, 6-3
contact information, 1-34
control drawing, 1-11
cryouts, 11-9
CSA
certificates, 1-23
certification, 1-23
compliance, 1-23
hazardous area compliance, 1-23
standards, 1-3
special conditions for use, 1-6
customer service, 1-34
D
DAC gain, 4-31, 4-38, 4-54, 4-60, 467, 4-73, 4-76, 4-81
data collects, 4-99
Data Delivery
editing device, 4-41
data registers, 10-11
DC power consumption, 6-3
DC power requirements, 6-3
Declaration of Conformity, 1-30
depth measurement
downward ultrasonic, 2-22, 2-24
pressure, 2-21
upward ultrasonic, 2-17, 2-20
desiccant
pressure depth sensor dryer tube,
11-21
replacing beads in dryer tube, 1122
devices
Alarms, 4-27
Analog, 4-24
AV|Gated
editing velocity parameters, 435
AV|Gated, 4-29
editing ultrasonic parameters,
4-30
AV|Gated Sensor
editing temperature parameters,
4-39
Data Delivery, 4-41
Index
diagnostics, 4-93
editing
AV|Gated Sensor, 4-29
Data Delivery, 4-41
Modem Setup, 4-19
Peak Combo Sensor, 4-52
Surface Combo Sensor, 4-70
Peak Combo, 4-51
Peak Combo Sensor
editing temperature parameters,
4-61
editing ultrasonic parameters,
4-52
editing velocity parameters, 457
Sampler, 4-63
Smart depth, 4-65
Smart Depth, 4-63
Surface Combo, 4-70, 4-84
Surface Combo Sensor
editing (surcharge) peak
velocity parameters, 4-78
editing pressure parameters, 482
editing smart depth (ultrasonic)
parameters, 4-71
editing surface velocity
parameters, 4-74
editing temperature parameters,
4-83
TRITON+, 4-16
Ultrasonic (Smart) Depth Sensor
editing temperature parameters,
4-68
XIO, 4-85
Devices
Flow, 4-44
Flow Loss, 4-45
Inclinometer, 4-46
diagnostic codes, 11-6
diagnostics
codes, 11-35
ExPAC, 11-35
sensors, 4-93
In-11
testing the monitor’s cryout
capability, 11-9
digital inputs, 2-28, 9-1
connection, 9-13
digital outputs, 2-28, 9-1
connection, 9-16
DIN rail
mounting ExPAC, 6-10
mounting power supply, 6-7
direct communication, 3-21
overview, 2-5
direct connect cable
connecting to the monitor, 3-21
specifications, A-15
Doppler effect, 2-21
downward ultrasonic depth
editing sensor device parameters,
4-71
measurement, 2-24
troubleshooting, 11-46, 11-48
dryer tube, 5-85
desiccant, 11-21
end-cap, 5-86
replacement, 11-21
replacing the desiccant, 11-22
securing to the monitor, 5-85
duration, 4-75
dynamic IP, 3-4
E
electronic offset, 4-30, 4-34, 4-53, 455, 4-66, 4-71, 4-83
Enable Scrubbing, 4-37, 4-60, 4-80
entity
ANGLE, 8-6
events
testing monitor cryouts, 11-9
ExPAC, 1-5, 2-3, 2-12
diagnostic codes, 11-35
installation, 6-10
mounting to DIN rail, 6-10
mounting to wall, 6-14
installation and wiring, 6-18, 6-29
In-12
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Modbus, 2-28, 10-1
RS-232 connection, 10-6
RS-485 connection, 10-3
RS-232 connection, 10-6
RS-485 connection, 10-3
running the ground wires, 6-22
specifications, A-16
wiring to the monitor, 6-29
wiring to the power supply, 6-18
extension cables, 5-42, 5-63
external power
consumption, 6-3
ExPAC, 2-12
ExPAC, 1-5
grounding kit, 6-29, 6-34
installation, 6-2
ExPAC, 6-10
power supply, 6-7
XBUS, 6-5
XIO, 6-5
monitor COMM + EXT PWR
port, 2-9
requirements, 6-3
running the ground wires, 6-22, 629, 6-34
supplying to system, 6-36
wiring the AC power cable to the
power supply, 6-15
wiring the monitor to the ExPAC,
6-29
wiring the monitor to the XBUS,
6-29
wiring the monitor to the XIO, 629
wiring the power supply to the
ExPAC, 6-18
XBUS, 1-5
XIO, 1-5, 2-12
external power grounding kit, 6-29,
6-34
F
firmware updates, how to, 4-102
Flow, 4-44
Flow Loss, 4-45
flow type, 4-30, 4-36, 4-52, 4-58
flumes, 4-11
fuses
replacement, 11-29
G
gain, 4-76
Gain, 4-13
ground connection facility, 6-22, 623, 6-29, 6-34
ground wires
connecting to the ExPAC, 6-22
connecting to the monitor, 6-29, 634
connecting to the XBUS, 6-22
connecting to the XIO, 6-22
connecting to XBUS, 6-22
connecting to XIO, 6-22
external power grounding kit, 629, 6-34
ground connection facility, 6-22,
6-23, 6-29, 6-34
GSM/HSPA communication
modem
information, 1-13
H
handling the sensors, 11-21
hazardous conditions, 1-2
hydraulics, 2-15, 5-4
I
I/O, 2-28, 9-1
connecting 4-20 inputs, 9-3
connecting 4-20 outputs, 9-8
connecting analog inputs, 9-3
connecting analog outputs, 9-8
connecting digital inputs, 9-13
connecting digital outputs, 9-16
Index
connecting relay outputs, 9-16
SCADA, 9-8
IECEx
certificates, 1-20
certification, 1-20
compliance, 1-20
hazardous area compliance, 1-20
standards
special conditions for use, 1-6
IMEI
uploading from the monitor, 11-4,
11-5
Inclinometer, 1-4, 2-1, 2-9, 2-26, 446, 8-1
specifications, A-14
ANGLE entity, 8-6
installation, 8-2
extension cable, 8-2
indirect communication, 3-22
inspection
monitor, 11-3
sensors, 11-20
installation
1/2-band mount
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-49
1/2-band mount with silt mount
adapter
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-50
3/4-band mount
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-44
3/4-band mount with silt mount
adapter
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-46
antenna, 3-20
ExPAC, 6-10, 6-18, 6-29
external DC power, 6-2
ground wires, 6-22, 6-29, 6-34
IS considerations, 1-6
manhole characteristics, 5-5
monitor, 7-1
manhole rim, 7-7
manhole wall, 7-4
rung, 7-3
mounting Peak Combo Sensor to
the ring, 5-25
In-13
mounting Peak Combo Sensor to
the ring using the silt mount
adapter, 5-25
mounting Surface Combo Sensor
to the ring, 5-33
mounting Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
to the ring, 5-33
overview, 5-1
Peak Combo Sensor
1/2-band mount, 5-49
1/2-band mount with silt mount
adapter, 5-50
3/4-band mount, 5-44
3/4-band mount with silt mount
adapter, 5-46
silt mount adapter, 5-46, 5-50
pipe characteristics, 5-5
power supply, 6-7, 6-15, 6-18
ring, 5-29
sensors, 5-7, 5-60
mounting Peak Combo Sensor
to the ring assembly, 5-25
mounting Peak Combo Sensor
to the ring assembly using
the silt mount adapter, 5-25
mounting Surface Combo
Sensor to the ring assembly,
5-33
mounting to the ring, 5-23
mounting Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor to the ring assembly,
5-33
ring assembly, 5-12
standard mount, 5-54, 5-56
surcharge mount, 5-76
SIM card, 3-15
site investigation, 5-4
special, 5-5, 5-38
1/2-band mount, 5-49
1/2-band mount with silt mount
adapter, 5-50
3/4-band mount, 5-44
3/4-band mount with silt mount
adapter, 5-46
In-14
ADS TRITON+ Manual
mounting the Peak Combo
Sensor, 5-43
parts and supplies, 5-39, 5-62
tools, 5-42
standard, 5-5, 5-7, 5-60
mounting sensors to the ring, 523
parts and supplies, 5-8
ring assembly, 5-12
tools, 5-11
supplying power to system, 6-36
Surface Combo Sensor
standard mount, 5-54
standard mount using sliding
adapter bracket, 5-56
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
standard mount, 5-54
standard mount using sliding
adapter bracket, 5-56
surcharge mount, 5-76
wireless antenna, 3-8
XBUS, 6-5, 6-29
XIO, 6-5, 6-29
installation types, 4-10
flume, 4-11
lookup, 4-12
pipe, 4-10
weir, 4-11
installing an inclinometer, 8-2
internal modem
replacing the SIM card, 11-25
internal power
12-volt IS battery pack, 1-5, 2-11
interval, 4-42
intrinsic safety (IS), 1-2
certified tools, 1-6
maintenance, 1-9
IP address
static and dynamic, 3-4
IS battery pack, 1-5, 2-11
IS certification
Peak Combo Sensor, 1-4
Surface Combo Sensor, 1-4
IS sensors, 2-15
L
Latitude, 4-13
LED window
monitor, 11-6
monitor activity codes, 11-6
leveling
Surface Combo Sensor, 5-35
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 5-35
location file (XML), 2-3
long range depth sensor, 2-1
Long Range Depth Sensor
advanced parameters, 4-48
blanking, 4-49
capacitance, 4-50
editing long range device, 4-47
editing parameters, 4-48
extension, 5-71
gain control, 4-50
installation, 5-64, 5-72
Installation, 5-60
invert orientation, 5-66
manhole depth, 5-63
Mounting Bar installation, 5-64
overview, 2-18
part number, A-6
part numbers, 2-18
physical offset, 5-75
power, 4-49
securing sensor cables, 5-81
specifications, A-6
Submersion Sensor, 2-19, 5-74
temperature, 4-49
troubleshooting, 11-46
wall mount, 5-71
Longitude, 4-13
lookup tables, 4-12
low voltage, 11-9
M
maintenance
checking the sensors, 11-20
parts and supplies, 11-2
Index
restrictions, 1-9
sensor inspection, 11-20
SIM card replacement, 11-25
system components, 11-2
manhole
conditions, 5-5
depth, 5-6
mounting the monitor
manhole rim, 7-7
manhole wall, 7-4
rung, 7-3
securing sensor cables, 5-81
maximum velocity, 4-59, 4-75, 4-80
memory, 2-2
Modbus, 2-28, 4-91
configuration, 10-10, D-2, D-4
connecting through the ExPAC
RS-232 port, 10-6
connecting through the ExPAC
RS-232 port in the XBUS, 10-6
connecting through the ExPAC
RS-485 port, 10-3
connecting through the ExPAC
RS-485 port in the XBUS, 10-3
output data registers, 10-11
SCADA, 10-1
setting up a wireless connection,
10-9
Telog Ru-33, D-2, D-4
verifying output data, 4-91
XBUS, 10-3, 10-6
mode, 4-66, 4-72
modem, 1-5
antenna connection to monitor, 320
ceritification, 1-13
installing the wireless antenna, 3-8
replacing the SIM card, 11-25
testing monitor cryouts, 11-9
Modem Setup, 4-19
Modem Setup, 4-18
Modem Setup
editing device, 4-19
Modem Setup
In-15
APN username and password, 419
moisture in pressure depth sensor,
11-21, 11-22
monitor
12-volt IS battery pack
checking voltage, 11-9
replacement, 11-12
activation, 4-89
activity codes, 11-6
CDMA communication, 2-4
configuration
Modbus, 10-10
confirmation, 11-4
connecting a water quality
sampler, 5-83
connecting communication cable
to ExPAC, 6-29
connecting communication cable
to XBUS, 6-29
connecting communication cable
to XIO, 6-29
connecting ground wire, 6-29, 634
connecting sensors, 5-83
connectors, 2-8
control drawing, 1-11
diagnostic codes, 11-6
direct connection, 3-21
estimated battery life, 11-9
EV-DO communication, 2-4
external DC power requirements,
6-3
external power, 6-1
fuses
replacement, 11-29
ground connection facility, 6-22,
6-23, 6-29, 6-34
HSPA+ communication, 2-4
indirect connection, 3-22
inspection, 11-3
installation, 7-1
manhole rim, 7-7
manhole wall, 7-4
rung, 7-3
In-16
ADS TRITON+ Manual
LED window, 11-6
monitor activity codes, 11-6
memory, 2-2
Modbus configuration, 10-10
mounting bracket, 7-4
new product warranty, 1-32
on-site communication, 3-21, 3-22
out-of-warranty repairs, 1-33
overview, 2-4
ports, 2-8
power, 1-5
external, 6-1
processor board, 2-5
regulator
replacement, 11-29
replacing the fuses, 11-29
remote communication, 3-3
replacing the battery pack, 11-12
replacing the fuses, 11-29
replacing the regulator, 11-29
replacing the SIM card, 11-25
returns, 1-33
running sensor diagnostics, 4-93
securing the dryer tube, 5-85
shipping for warranty work, 1-33
specifications, A-1
supplying external power, 6-36
telemetry, 1-5
Telog Ru-33, D-2
testing cryout capability, 11-9
torque for bolts, 11-19, 11-34
troubleshooting, 11-38
troubleshooting fee, 1-33
Verizon wireless network services,
2-4, 3-3
voltage regulator board, 2-11
warranty, 1-32
wireless communication, 1-5, 2-4,
3-3
wiring to the ExPAC, 6-29
wiring to the XBUS, 6-29
wiring to the XIO, 6-29
monitor configuration
uploading, 11-5
Monitor Hardware Configuration
Uploading, 11-4, 11-5
mounting bracket for the monitor, 74
mounting the monitor
manhole rim, 7-7
manhole wall, 7-4
rung, 7-3
N
new product warranty, 1-32
Notification, 4-22
O
obtaining
monitor configuration, 11-5
on-site communication, 3-21, 3-22
out-of-warranty repairs, 1-33
overview
AV|Gated Sensor, 2-18
pressure depth, 2-18
upward ultrasonic depth, 2-17
communication, 2-4
on-site, 2-5
direct communication, 2-5
monitor, 2-4
Peak Combo Sensor, 2-20
peak velocity, 2-21
pressure depth, 2-21
upward ultrasonic depth, 2-20
sensors
AV|Gated Sensor, 2-18
Peak Combo Sensor, 2-20
Surface Combo Sensor, 2-23
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 2-22
Surface Combo Sensor, 2-23
downward ultrasonic depth, 224
surcharge peak velocity, 2-25
surface velocity, 2-25
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 2-22
downward ultrasonic depth, 222
Index
P
part numbers
monitor, B-1
sensors, B-1
system components, B-1
parts
antenna installation, 3-6
maintenance, 11-2
replacement, B-1
special installation, 5-39, 5-62
standard installation, 5-8
PC communication cable, 3-21
Peak Combo device parameters, 4-51
peak combo sensor, 2-1
Peak Combo Sensor
1/2-band mount, 5-49
1/2-band mount with silt mount
adapter, 5-50
3/4-band mount, 5-44
3/4-band mount with silt mount
adapter, 5-46
connecting to the monitor, 5-83
diagnostics, 4-93
editing device
temperature parameters, 4-61
ultrasonic parameters, 4-52
velocity parameters, 4-57
editing devices, 4-52
inspection, 11-20
installation
1/2-band mount, 5-49
1/2-band mount with silt mount
adapter, 5-50
3/4-band mount, 5-44
3/4-band mount with silt mount
adapter, 5-46
silt mount adapter, 5-46, 5-50
IS certification, 1-4
overview, 2-20
peak velocity measurement, 221
pressure depth measurement, 221
In-17
upward ultrasonic depth
measurement, 2-20
pressure sensor dryer tube
replacing desiccant, 11-22
replacing pressure sensor dryer
tube, 11-21
securing dryer tube to the monitor,
5-85
silt mount adapter, 5-25, 5-46, 550
special installation, 5-43
specifications, A-9
troubleshooting
peak velocity, 11-56
pressure depth, 11-61
temperature, 11-62
upward ultrasonic depth, 11-53
peak velocity
editing sensor device parameters,
4-57, 4-78
measurement, 2-21, 2-25
troubleshooting, 11-56
physical offset, 4-52, 4-68, 4-71
Surface Combo Sensor, 5-36
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 5-36
ping amplitude, 4-32, 4-38, 4-54, 461, 4-77, 4-81
pipe
conditions, 5-5
dimensions, 5-6
securing sensor cables, 5-81
shape, 5-6
pipe height, 4-30, 4-52, 4-68, 4-71
ports, 2-8
connecting a water quality sampler
to the monitor, 5-83
connecting sensors to the monitor,
5-83
power, 1-5
12-volt IS battery pack, 2-3, 2-11
battery pack, 1-5, 2-3
replacement, 11-12
checking battery pack voltage, 119
consumption, 6-3
In-18
ADS TRITON+ Manual
ExPAC, 1-5, 2-3, 2-12
external, 6-1
ExPAC, 6-18, 6-29
installation, 6-2
mounting the XBUS, 6-5
mounting the XIO, 6-5
power supply, 6-15, 6-18
requirements, 6-3
running the ground wires, 6-22,
6-29, 6-34
supplying to system, 6-36
XBUS, 6-29
XIO, 6-29
internal
12-volt IS battery pack, 2-11
checking battery pack voltage,
11-9
replacing the battery pack, 1112
regulator
replacement, 11-29
replacing fuses, 11-29
replacing the regulator, 11-29
running the ground wires, 6-22, 629, 6-34
supply to system, 6-36
wiring the AC power cable to the
power supply, 6-15
wiring the monitor to the ExPAC,
6-29
wiring the monitor to the XBUS,
6-29
wiring the monitor to the XIO, 629
wiring the power supply to the
ExPAC, 6-18
XBUS, 1-5, 2-3, 2-12
XIO, 1-5, 2-3, 2-12
power supply
installation, 6-7
mounting to DIN rail, 6-7
installation and wiring, 6-15, 6-18
specifications, A-17
wiring to the AC power cable, 615
wiring to the ExPAC, 6-18
pressure depth
editing sensor device parameters,
4-82
measurement, 2-18, 2-21
troubleshooting, 11-61
pressure depth sensor
replacing the desiccant in the dryer
tube, 11-22
replacing the dryer tube, 11-21
securing dryer tube to monitor, 585
processor board, 2-5
Project organization checklist, 2-29
Provider, 4-20
pump station, 5-5
Q
Qstart
analog device parameters, 4-24
assigning and editing devices, 414
AV|Gated device parameters, 4-29
collecting data, how to, 4-99
configuring a location, how to, 4-7
confirmations, 4-96
CSV decimal, 4-3
CSV file delimiters, 4-3
Dat path, 4-3
Data Delivery device parameters,
4-41
data formats, 4-3
date format, 4-3
default location, 4-3
editing devices
AV|Gated Sensor, 4-29
Peak Combo Sensor, 4-52
Surface Combo Sensor, 4-70
firmware updates, 4-102
low voltage, 11-9
Modbus, D-2, D-4
Modem Setup device parameters,
4-19
Index
monitor activation, 4-89
Peak Combo device, 4-51
port settings, 4-3
Sampler, 4-63
Settings, 4-3
starting Qstart, 4-2
Surface Combo device parameters,
4-70, 4-84
Telog Ru-33, D-2, D-4
units of measure, 4-3
updating monitor firmware, 4-102
viewing logs, 4-104
XIO device parameters, 4-85
R
Recipient 5, 4-23
regulator
replacement, 11-29
replacing fuses, 11-29
regulator replacement, 11-29
relay outputs
connection, 9-16
repairs
out of warranty, 1-33
replacement
12-volt IS battery pack, 11-12
desiccant in dryer tube, 11-22
dryer tube, 11-21
fuses, 11-29
parts/part numbers, B-1
regulator, 11-29
SIM card, 11-25
returns
international, 1-33
rim mounting, 7-7
ring
assembly, 5-12
installation, 5-29
mounting Peak Combo Sensor, 525
mounting Peak Combo Sensor
using the silt mount adapter, 525
In-19
mounting Surface Combo Sensor,
5-33
mounting the sensors, 5-23
mounting Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor, 5-33
securing the sensor cables, 5-27
RS-232 Modbus connection, 10-6
RS-485 Modbus connection, 10-3
RTU
defining Modbus output data
registers, 10-11
rung mounting the monitor, 7-3
S
sampler, 2-9
connecting to the monitor, 5-83
sampler connections, E-1
sampler specifications, E-1
sampling, 4-63
SCADA
analog outputs, 9-8
connection, 9-8
Modbus, 10-1
Modbus output data registers, 1011
setup, 4-91
verifying Modbus output data, 491
wireless communication, 10-9
sensitivity, 4-58, 4-75, 4-79
sensor extension cables, 5-42, 5-63
sensor temperature, 4-40, 4-62, 4-68
sensors, 1-4
1/2-band mount
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-49
1/2-band mount with silt mount
adapter
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-50
3/4-band mount
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-44
3/4-band mount with silt mount
adapter
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-46
In-20
ADS TRITON+ Manual
AV|Gated
editing devices, 4-29
AV|Gated Sensor
overview, 2-18
upward ultrasonic depth, 2-17
cleaning, 11-20
confirmation, 11-4
connecting to the monitor, 5-83
extension cables, 1-4
handling, 11-21
inclinometer
specifications, A-14
inspection, 11-20
installation, 5-7, 5-60
ring assembly, 5-12, 5-23
standard mount, 5-54, 5-56
surcharge mount, 5-76
monitor ports, 2-9
mounting to the ring, 5-23
overview, 2-15
AV|Gated Sensor, 2-18
Peak Combo Sensor, 2-20
Surface Combo Sensor, 2-23
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 2-22
part numbers, B-1
Peak Combo Sensor
editing devices, 4-52
mounting to the ring, 5-25
mounting to the ring using the
silt mount adapter, 5-25
overview, 2-20
peak velocity, 2-21
pressure depth, 2-21
specifications, A-9
troubleshooting peak velocity,
11-56
troubleshooting pressure depth,
11-61
troubleshooting temperature,
11-62
troubleshooting upward
ultrasonic depth, 11-53
upward ultrasonic depth, 2-20
running diagnostics, 4-93
securing cables in the
pipe/manhole, 5-81
securing cables to the band, 5-53
securing cables to the ring, 5-27
securing dryer tube to the monitor,
5-85
special installation, 5-38
parts and supplies, 5-39, 5-62
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-43
tools, 5-42
specifications
inclinometer, A-14
Peak Combo Sensor, A-9
Surface Combo Sensor, A-11
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, A-13
standard installation, 5-7, 5-60
mounting Peak Combo Sensor
to the ring, 5-25
mounting Peak Combo Sensor
to the ring using the silt
mount adapter, 5-25
mounting sensors to the ring, 523
mounting Surface Combo
Sensor to the ring, 5-33
mounting Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor to the ring, 5-33
parts and supplies, 5-8
ring assembly, 5-12
tools, 5-11
storing, 11-21
Surface Combo Sensor
downward ultrasonic depth, 224
editing devices, 4-70
leveling, 5-35
mounting to the ring, 5-33
overview, 2-23
physical offset, 5-36
specifications, A-11
surcharge peak velocity, 2-25
surface velocity, 2-25
troubleshooting downward
ultrasonic depth, 11-46, 1148
Index
troubleshooting surcharge peak
velocity, 11-56
troubleshooting surcharge
pressure depth, 11-61
troubleshooting surface
velocity, 11-59
troubleshooting temperature,
11-62
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
leveling, 5-35
mounting to the ring, 5-33
overview, 2-22
physical offset, 5-36
specifications, A-13
troubleshooting downward
ultrasonic depth, 11-46, 1148
sewer system hydraulics, 2-15
shipping, 1-33
Silt, 4-13
silt mount adapter, 5-25, 5-46, 5-50
SIM Activation, 3-18
SIM card
APN, 4-20
APN username and password, 419
AT&T public static, 4-20
Authentication, 4-20
dynamic, 2-10, 3-4
Installation, 3-15
Modem Setup, 4-20
parts and supplies, 3-6
password, 4-20
Provider, 4-20
replacement
monitor modem, 11-25
static, 2-10
static outputs, 3-4
username, 4-20
SIM card enclosure, 2-10
SIM card replacement, 11-25
SIM card replacement
4VZ, 11-24
8000-FST-IM-4VZ, 11-24
In-21
8000-FST-IM-GL, 11-25
GL, 11-25
SIRA certification, 1-13, 1-18
site investigation, 5-4
hydraulics, 5-4
sliding adapter bracket, 5-15, 5-33, 556, 5-58, 5-68, 5-78
smart depth
editing sensor device parameters,
4-71
smart depth device, 4-65
SMTP Password, 4-24
SMTP Server, 4-24
SMTP Username, 4-24
special conditions for use, 1-6
special installation, 5-5
1/2-band mount, 5-49
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-49
silt mount adapter, 5-50
1/2-band mount with silt mount
adapter
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-50
3/4-band mount, 5-44
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-44
silt mount adapter, 5-46
3/4-band mount with silt mount
adapter
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-46
parts and supplies, 5-39, 5-62
Peak Combo Sensor, 5-43
sensors, 5-38
Surface Combo Sensor, 5-54
standard mount, 5-54
standard mount using sliding
adapter bracket, 5-56
tools, 5-42
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 5-54
standard mount, 5-54
standard mount using sliding
adapter bracket, 5-56
surcharge mount, 5-76
specifications, A-1
ExPAC, A-16
inclinometer, A-14
monitor, A-1
In-22
ADS TRITON+ Manual
Peak Combo Sensor, A-9
power supply, A-17
Surface Combo Sensor, A-11
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, A-13
USB serial interface cable, A-15
XBUS, A-18
XIO, A-19
standard installation, 5-5
mounting Peak Combo Sensor to
the ring, 5-25
mounting Peak Combo Sensor to
the ring using the silt mount
adapter, 5-25
mounting sensors to the ring, 5-23
mounting Surface Combo Sensor
to the ring, 5-33
mounting Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
to the ring, 5-33
parts and supplies, 5-8
ring, 5-29
ring assembly, 5-12
sensors, 5-7, 5-60
mounting to the ring, 5-23
ring assembly, 5-12
standard
ring, 5-29
tools, 5-11
static IP addresses, 3-4
store data, 4-31, 4-34, 4-37, 4-40, 444, 4-53, 4-55, 4-56, 4-67, 4-72, 476, 4-81, 4-83
storing the sensors, 11-21
Submersion Sensor
disable alarm, 4-50
warning, 5-75
supplies
antenna installation, 3-6
maintenance, 11-2
special installation, 5-39, 5-62
standard installation, 5-8
support, 1-34
surcharge
mounting the Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor in the manhole, 5-76
surcharge detection, 4-68, 4-73
surcharge peak velocity
measurement, 2-25
troubleshooting, 11-56
surcharge peak velocity sensor
editing device parameters, 4-78
surcharge pressure depth
editing sensor device parameters,
4-82
troubleshooting, 11-61
Surface Combo device parameters, 470, 4-84
surface combo sensor, 2-1
Surface Combo Sensor
connecting to the monitor, 5-83
diagnostics, 4-93
editing device
(surcharge) peak velocity
parameters, 4-78
pressure parameters, 4-82
smart depth (ultrasonic)
parameters, 4-71
surface velocity parameters, 474
temperature parameters, 4-83
editing devices, 4-70
handling and storage, 11-21
inspection, 11-20
IS certification, 1-4
leveling, 5-35
measuring the physical offset, 536
mounting sensor to the ring, 5-33
mounting sensor to the ring using
the sliding adapter bracket, 515, 5-33
mounting sensor to the ring with
previous sensor mounting plate,
5-15, 5-33, 5-56
overview, 2-23
downward ultrasonic depth
measurement, 2-24
surcharge peak velocity
measurement, 2-25
surface velocity measurement,
2-25
Index
pressure sensor dryer tube
replacing desiccant, 11-22
replacing pressure sensor dryer
tube, 11-21
securing dryer tube to the monitor,
5-85
sliding adapter bracket, 5-15, 5-33,
5-56, 5-58, 5-68
special installation
standard mount, 5-54
standard mount using sliding
adapter bracket, 5-56
specifications, A-11
troubleshooting
downward ultrasonic depth, 1146, 11-48
surcharge peak velocity, 11-56
surcharge pressure depth, 11-61
surface velocity, 11-59
temperature, 11-62
surface velocity
editing sensor device parameters,
4-74
measurement, 2-25
troubleshooting, 11-59
T
telemetry, 1-5
Telog Ru-33, 1-5, D-2
configuration, D-2, D-4
Triton – Telog comm. cable, D-3
temperature
troubleshooting, 11-62
Temperature
storage options, 4-18
temperature sensor
AV|Gated Sensor
editing device parameters, 4-39
Peak Combo Sensor
editing device parameters, 4-61
Surface Combo Sensor
editing device parameters, 4-83
Ultrasonic (Smart) Depth Sensor
In-23
editing device parameters, 4-68
tools, 1-6
antenna installation, 3-6
special installation, 5-42
standard installation, 5-11
torque for monitor bolts, 11-19, 1134
transmit frequency, 4-74, 4-80
Triton – Telog comm. cable, D-3
troubleshooting, 11-37
communication, 11-42
fee, 1-33
monitor, 11-38
Peak Combo Sensor
peak velocity, 11-56
pressure depth, 11-61
temperature, 11-62
upward ultrasonic depth, 11-53
peak velocity, 11-56
pressure depth, 11-61
Surcharge Combo Sensor
surcharge peak velocity, 11-56
surcharge peak velocity, 11-56
surcharge pressure depth, 11-61
Surface Combo Sensor
downward ultrasonic depth, 1146, 11-48
surcharge depth, 11-61
surface velocity, 11-59
temperature, 11-62
surface velocity, 11-59
temperature, 11-62
ultrasonic depth, 11-46, 11-48
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
downward ultrasonic depth, 1146, 11-48
upward ultrasonic depth, 11-46,
11-48
U
ultrasonic depth
measurement, 2-17, 2-20, 2-24
troubleshooting, 11-46, 11-48
In-24
ADS TRITON+ Manual
ultrasonic depth sensor, 2-1
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
connecting to the monitor, 5-83
diagnostics, 4-93
editing devices
temperature parameters, 4-68
inspection, 11-20
leveling, 5-35
measuring the physical offset, 536
mounting sensor to the band with
previous sensor mounting plate,
5-56
mounting sensor to the ring, 5-33
mounting sensor to the ring using
the sliding adapter bracket, 515, 5-33
mounting sensor to the ring with
previous sensor mounting plate,
5-15, 5-33
mounting the Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor in the manhole, 5-76
overview, 2-22
sliding adapter bracket, 5-15, 5-33,
5-56, 5-58, 5-68, 5-78
special installation
standard mount, 5-54
standard mount using sliding
adapter bracket, 5-56
surcharge mount, 5-76
specifications, A-13
troubleshooting
downward ultrasonic depth, 1146, 11-48
upload
monitor configuration, 11-5
Uploading
firmware version, 11-4, 11-5
IMEI number, 11-4, 11-5
Monitor Hardware Configuration,
11-4, 11-5
upward ultrasonic depth
editing sensor device parameters,
4-30, 4-52
measurement, 2-17, 2-20
troubleshooting, 11-53
USB cable, 3-22
USB serial interface cable, 2-5, 3-21
driver installation, 3-22
specifications, A-15
UTMS/HSPA+ communication, 2-4,
3-3
V
velocity direction, 4-36, 4-58, 4-75,
4-79
velocity measurement
peak, 2-21
surcharge peak, 2-25
surface, 2-25
Verizon network services, 2-4, 3-3
viewing logs, 4-104
voltage regulator board, 2-11
W
wall mounting, 7-4
warnings, 1-10
warranty, 1-32
customer service, 1-34
international returns, 1-33
invalidation, 1-10
new product, 1-32
out-of-warranty repairs, 1-33
shipping, 1-33
troubleshooting fee, 1-33
water quality sampler
connecting to the monitor, 5-83
weirs, 4-11
wet well, 5-5
wireless antenna installation
inside the manhole, 3-8
outside the manhole, 3-10
wireless communication, 1-5, 2-4, 33
antenna, 1-5
installation, 3-8, 3-20
Modbus, 10-9
Index
parts and supplies, 3-6
Verizon network services, 2-4, 3-3
X
XBUS, 1-5, 2-3, 2-12
cable glands, 6-36
installation, 6-5
installation and wiring, 6-29
Modbus, 2-28, 10-1
RS-232 connection, 10-6
RS-485 connection, 10-3
mounting, 6-5
RS-232 connection, 10-6
RS-485 connection, 10-3
running the ground wires, 6-22
specifications, A-18
wiring to the monitor, 6-29
XIO, 1-5, 2-3, 2-12
4-20mA inputs
In-25
4-20mA outputs
analog inputs, 2-28, 9-1
connection, 9-3
analog outputs, 2-28, 9-1
connection, 9-8
cable glands, 6-36
digital inputs, 2-28, 9-1
connection, 9-13
digital outputs, 2-28, 9-1
connection, 9-16
installation, 6-5
installation and wiring, 6-29
mounting, 6-5
relay outputs, 9-16
running the ground wires, 6-22
SCADA, 9-8
specifications, A-19
wiring to the monitor, 6-29
XIO device parameters, 4-85
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement